SmartPlant P&ID

User’s Guide
June 2004 Version 4.1

DPID2-PE-200004E

Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2004 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software--Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, PDS, and MARIAN are registered trademarks Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Customer Support and Documentation Comments........................................................9 Introducing SmartPlant P&ID .......................................................................................10 SmartPlant P&ID Program Group ..............................................................................11 What's New in SmartPlant P&ID?..............................................................................12
SmartPlant P&ID Help Command.................................................................................... 12 Printable Guides Command .............................................................................................. 12 SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Command ......................................................................... 12 SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Command ........................................................................ 13 About SmartPlant P&ID Command.................................................................................. 13 Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID................................................... 13

Navigating in the Software: An Overview .....................................................................14 Working With the Design Window: An Overview ....................................................15
Show Command................................................................................................................ 17 Options Command ............................................................................................................ 17 Previous Command........................................................................................................... 22 Save Settings Command ................................................................................................... 22 Zoom Area Command....................................................................................................... 22 Zoom In Command ........................................................................................................... 23 Zoom Out Command ........................................................................................................ 24 Fit Command .................................................................................................................... 24 Pan Command................................................................................................................... 25 Display Command ............................................................................................................ 26 Toolbars Command........................................................................................................... 26 Properties Command......................................................................................................... 28 New Command ................................................................................................................. 34 Cascade Command............................................................................................................ 36 Tile Horizontally Command ............................................................................................. 36 Tile Vertically Command ................................................................................................. 36 Active Window List.......................................................................................................... 36

Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview..............................................38
Engineering Data Editor Command.................................................................................. 39 Stockpile Menu: An Overview ......................................................................................... 41 Edit Menu: An Overview.................................................................................................. 43 Claim Command ............................................................................................................... 44 Release Claim Command.................................................................................................. 44 Claim Status Command .................................................................................................... 45 View Menu: An Overview................................................................................................ 45 Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview ......................... 59

Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.......................................................................65
Catalog Explorer Command ............................................................................................. 65 Catalog Menu: An Overview ............................................................................................ 68 View Menu ....................................................................................................................... 77 Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer) ............................................................................... 79

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 3

Table of Contents
Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview .................................................................. 82

Working With the Properties Window: An Overview ...............................................83
Properties Window Command .......................................................................................... 84

Customizing the Software: An Overview...................................................................91
Customize Command........................................................................................................ 92 Custom Commands Command ......................................................................................... 97

Working with Drawings: An Overview .......................................................................102 Open Command ........................................................................................................104
Open Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 104 Open Plant Structure Dialog Box ................................................................................... 105 Filter Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 106 Customize Current View Dialog Box ............................................................................. 107 Open an Existing Drawing.............................................................................................. 108 Open a Drawing in a Different Database ........................................................................ 109 Customize the Open Dialog Box .................................................................................... 110

Recent Drawings.......................................................................................................111
Access a Recently Open Drawing................................................................................... 111 Switch to Another Open Drawing or View..................................................................... 111

File Properties Command .........................................................................................112
File Properties Dialog Box.............................................................................................. 112 View Document Properties ............................................................................................. 115 Set Document Properties................................................................................................. 116

Close Command........................................................................................................117
Close an Active Drawing ................................................................................................ 117

Exit Command ..........................................................................................................118
Close the Program........................................................................................................... 118

Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview ............................................................119
New Template Command ............................................................................................... 120 Create a Drawing Template ............................................................................................ 121 Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border..................................................................... 122

Saving Drawings: An Overview...............................................................................124
Save Command ............................................................................................................... 125 Save As Command.......................................................................................................... 125

Re-creating Drawings: An Overview .......................................................................127
Recreate a Drawing......................................................................................................... 129 Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition ............................................................... 129

Using Filters: An Overview......................................................................................130
Add Filter Command ...................................................................................................... 131 Filter Tab Cut Command ................................................................................................ 138 Filter Tab Copy Command ............................................................................................. 139 Filter Tab Paste Command.............................................................................................. 139 Filter Tab Delete Command............................................................................................ 139 Filter Tab Use Alternate Symbology Command............................................................. 140 Filter Tab Properties Command...................................................................................... 140

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview ................................................141 Understanding Database Constraints........................................................................143 Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview...................................................................144 4 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Select Tool Command..................................................................................................... 145 Select Tool Ribbon ......................................................................................................... 146 Configuration (PickQuick) Tool ..................................................................................... 146 Select an Item.................................................................................................................. 147 Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool............................................. 148 Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool ............................................... 149

Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview.....................................................................150
Show Grid Command ..................................................................................................... 150 Snap Grid Command....................................................................................................... 151

Placing Equipment: An Overview ............................................................................152
Place Equipment ............................................................................................................. 153 Place Multiple Representations....................................................................................... 154

Routing Lines: An Overview....................................................................................156
Line Routing Ribbon....................................................................................................... 157 Route a Line.................................................................................................................... 158 Start a Line in Free Space ............................................................................................... 159 Start a Line from a Connect Point................................................................................... 160 Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line .................................................................... 161 Insert a Vertex into an Existing Line .............................................................................. 161 Branch from an Existing Line......................................................................................... 162 Branch to an Existing Line ............................................................................................. 162 Add a Manual Gap to a Line........................................................................................... 163 Assign Heat Tracing ....................................................................................................... 164

Break Run Command ...............................................................................................165
Break a Pipe Run ............................................................................................................ 165

Join Runs Command.................................................................................................166
Join Pipe Runs ................................................................................................................ 166

Using Piping Components: An Overview ................................................................167
Place a Piping Component .............................................................................................. 167 Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview ...................................................................... 169

Placing Instrumentation: An Overview ....................................................................174
Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window)................................................................... 175 Place an Inline Instrument .............................................................................................. 175 Place an Offline Instrument ............................................................................................ 177 Add Instruments to a Loop ............................................................................................. 178 Updating Associated Instruments with Loop Properties (Properties Window) .............. 179 Remove an Instrument from a Loop ............................................................................... 180

Labeling: An Overview ............................................................................................181
Placing Labels: An Overview ......................................................................................... 182 Using the Types of Labels: An Overview....................................................................... 191 Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview .................................................. 201 Calling Item Tag Validation ........................................................................................... 208

Using Annotations: An Overview ............................................................................210
Place an Annotation ........................................................................................................ 211 Place an Area Break........................................................................................................ 212 Place a Package............................................................................................................... 213 Place a Revision Cloud ................................................................................................... 214

Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview ...............................................215
Undo Command .............................................................................................................. 216 Move Command ............................................................................................................. 217

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 5

Table of Contents
Move To Drawing Command ......................................................................................... 222 Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview.................................................... 225 Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview....................................... 238 Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview........................................................................ 245 Copying Items: An Overview ......................................................................................... 253 Selecting Connected Items: An Overview ...................................................................... 254 Modifying Item Properties: An Overview ...................................................................... 258

Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview ................................................263
Move to Different Stockpile Dialog Box........................................................................ 264 Place an Item from the Stockpile .................................................................................... 264 Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing......................................... 265 Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile........................................................... 265 Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet..................................................................... 267 Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile................. 268

Gapping Lines: An Overview...................................................................................269
AutoGap Command ........................................................................................................ 269 Gap Now Command ....................................................................................................... 270

Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview.................................................271
Update Symbology Command........................................................................................ 271 Update Symbology ......................................................................................................... 272 Update Line Settings....................................................................................................... 272

Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview ......................................................273
Image Command............................................................................................................. 275 Object Command ............................................................................................................ 276 Paste Special Command.................................................................................................. 280 Links Command.............................................................................................................. 281

Working With Assemblies: An Overview................................................................284
Save As Assembly Command......................................................................................... 285

Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview ....................................................288 Claiming Items: An Overview..................................................................................289
Claim Command ............................................................................................................. 291 Release Claim Command................................................................................................ 300 Claim Status Command .................................................................................................. 301 Show Claims Command ................................................................................................. 303

Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview ................................................304
Compare and Refresh Command .................................................................................... 305

Consistency Checking: An Overview ...........................................................................313 Show Inconsistencies Command ..............................................................................314
Show Inconsistencies ...................................................................................................... 314

Properties Command ................................................................................................315
Consistency Check Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 316 Review an Inconsistency................................................................................................. 317 Resolve an Inconsistency................................................................................................ 319

Reapply Rules Command .........................................................................................321
Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency.................................................. 322

Importing Drawing Data: An Overview ......................................................................323 6 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Table of Contents Import Data File Command ......................................................................................324
Import Log Dialog Box................................................................................................... 324

Import SmartSketch Command ................................................................................325
Using the SmartPlant Migrator ....................................................................................... 325 Import a SmartSketch File .............................................................................................. 328

Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data .......................................................................329
Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data .................................................................................. 329

Generating Reports: An Overview...............................................................................331 Plant Reports Command ...........................................................................................333
Plant Reports Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 333 Generate a Report ........................................................................................................... 334

My Reports Command..............................................................................................335
My Reports Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 335

Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview............................................337
Tabular Format Report.................................................................................................... 338 Fixed Format Report ....................................................................................................... 340 Composite Format Report............................................................................................... 341 New Command ............................................................................................................... 343 Edit Command ................................................................................................................ 345 Delete Command ............................................................................................................ 350 SmartPlant Reports Toolbar............................................................................................ 351

Printing Drawings: An Overview .................................................................................361 Print Command.........................................................................................................363
Print Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 363 Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 364 Print a Drawing ............................................................................................................... 365 Print a Selected Area....................................................................................................... 366 Set Print Options ............................................................................................................. 367 Change Printer Properties ............................................................................................... 368 Print to a File................................................................................................................... 368

Page Setup Command...............................................................................................369
Page Setup Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 369 Set up a Page Layout....................................................................................................... 370

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview ......................................371 Publishing to TEF: An Overview .............................................................................373
Publish Command........................................................................................................... 375 Find Documents to Publish Command ........................................................................... 379 Browser Command ......................................................................................................... 381

Retrieving from TEF: An Overview.........................................................................382
Retrieve Command ......................................................................................................... 385

Correlating Items: An Overview ..............................................................................387
Correlate Command ........................................................................................................ 387

Using the To Do List: An Overview.........................................................................390
To Do List Command ..................................................................................................... 391 Open the To Do List ....................................................................................................... 391

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 7

Table of Contents
To Do List Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 392

Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview ............................................406 Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists....................................................................407 Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID ...............................................................408 Setting Construction Status.......................................................................................409 Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation ........................................................410 Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID ...........................412 Using Filters Versus Levels......................................................................................413 Glossary ..........................................................................................................................414 Index................................................................................................................................436

8 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Customer Support and Documentation Comments

Customer Support and Documentation Comments
For the latest support information for this product, use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.intergraph.com/ppm/services/support.asp. Send documentation comments or suggestions to PPMdoc@intergraph.com.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 9

allowing faster. The graphical representation of the P&ID is a view or a report of the data. Running on Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2000. SmartPlant P&ID incorporates the latest Microsoft technologies. to provide integration with existing data and other systems. SmartPlant P&ID features a comprehensive. Intergraph INtools. data consistency. such as Intergraph PDS. As a data-centric. SmartPlant P&ID does not require a traditional. The design rule-base confirms data consistency and compliance with plant and engineering standards. and feedback is immediate. or equipment and line lists. automatic checks. With quick access to supporting engineering data. and Aspen Zyqad. The open architecture of SmartPlant P&ID permits integration with other systems. SmartPlant P&ID is vastly different from graphic-driven P&ID solutions of today.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID creates intelligent P&IDs by populating the database with relevant plant data. This method provides valuable information throughout the plant life cycle. such as OLE automation. The rule-based and automation capabilities of SmartPlant P&ID also differentiate it from other P&ID systems. such as process data from process simulation databases based on Aspen Zyqad from Aspen Technologies. All data from the P&ID is stored in the plant database and adheres to plant standards. more efficient design with less iteration. rule-based solution for the P&ID life cycle. The strong data import and export facilities of SmartPlant P&ID allow users to populate the system with relevant plant data. and drag-and-drop capabilities. 10 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and standards compliance. SmartPlant P&ID significantly cuts design and modification time and increases accuracy with its exclusive data-centric approach and use of design rules. Data is entered directly into the database. expensive CAD engine for P&ID creation. all of which allow users to share data with third-party software. SmartPlant P&ID helps users improve design quality. userdefinable rule-based system that assists the engineer during the design phase of the plant and subsequent life cycle phases. rules are executed. You can then use this information in the SmartPlant P&ID Stockpile to design the P&ID. Inc.

Rule Manager defines rules for placement and property copying on placement. Drawing Manager allows you to create and delete P&IDs and drawing versions and print multiple drawings. and so forth. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. including all plant components and their relationships. gapping. SmartPlant P&ID Installation Guide. SmartPlant has several programs and utilities for running and managing your plant data. or the SmartPlant P&ID Upgrade Guide. By manipulating model views. and formats. For more information about SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Insulation Specification Manager allows you to create and modify lookup tables for insulation specifications and thicknesses.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID Program Group SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. heat tracing. Options Manager also defines paths to SmartPlant files and directories. such as specifying user permissions. SmartPlant P&ID provides the design environment for SmartPlant. SmartPlant Engineering Manager performs higher-level data management tasks. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 11 . Drawing Manager allows you to perform Workshare.and project-specific commands. unified data structure that represents the plant model. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model and can be a schematic drawing or a table. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data. Options Manager defines plant-wide graphic standards for symbology. designing plant hierarchies. The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety.

dialog boxes. Inconsistency Report . you can access registration and support information. The report is available in the Engineering Data Editor by selecting View > Plant Reports. learning tools.A tabular report.Functionality changes provide a variety of display options using the Fit command. The user's guides contain the same information as the online Help. and the guide opens in the appropriate application. procedures. • SmartPlant P&ID Help Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID Help Opens the Help viewer where you can read topics about commands. Inconsistencies Report.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID What's New in SmartPlant P&ID? This version of SmartPlant P&ID contains the following new functionality and changes. Click a link. Printable Guides Command Help > Printable Guides Opens a page in your default browser that includes links to the user's guides in portable document format. • Fit Command . 12 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can print it if necessary. On this page. and other items to help you use SmartPlant P&ID more efficiently.xls. SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Activates your web browser and opens the SmartPlant P&ID World Wide Web page. and so forth. provides a list of all inconsistencies.

On this page you can learn about international and regional conferences. and more. click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID > Programming Help. Follow the instructions and links on this web page to find your information. About SmartPlant P&ID Command Help > About SmartPlant P&ID Displays information about your copy of the software. This documentation consists of a programmer's guide and reference guides for placement automation and the logical model. Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID On your desktop. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 13 . including the version number and the copyright. informal networking. and licensing notices. legal. Note • Programming with SmartPlant P&ID is the method by which you can use the Automation layer to customize the software to meet your own particular requirements. online forums. structured product feedback.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Opens your web browser to the Intergraph Process & Power Client Community web page.

page 264 • 14 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigating in the Software: An Overview The drawing interface is divided into four distinct parts: the Design window. You can navigate through the nodes in a catalog by clicking the + or – icons by the selected node. and the Properties window. the Catalog Explorer. Related Topics Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer. you can double-click nodes in the tree view to open them. and organizing data. Your system administrator defines customized properties and their defaults for each item in Data Dictionary Manager. and it can also display items in the plant and drawing stockpiles. The Engineering Data Editor allows you to see the same information in a tabular format. you can see the traditional diagram of a plant containing equipment. page 66 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. The two views also provide a way for you to view information in the database in different ways. Design Window The Design window displays Drawing views and the Engineering Data Editor. Each part provides specific features that you need to create drawings in the software. Catalog Explorer The Catalog Explorer displays all available catalog items for you to use in drawings and plant models. Each of these views provides a way for you to enter information for the plant model into the database. This view is exactly the same tabular view that you can display in the Design window. Engineering Data Editor The Engineering Data Editor is a modification of the stockpile display. instrumentation. view and modify the properties associated with that item in the Properties window. In addition. editing properties. with the same capabilities for modifying the display. Properties Window When you select an item in a plant model. and piping in a graphical representation. the Engineering Data Editor. The Catalog Explorer contains a hierarchical representation of the selected catalog. you can enter. page 67 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. In the Drawing view.

The title bar identifies the drawing name. using vertical and horizontal scroll bars as well as Zoom and Pan commands to change the center point for the Drawing view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Working With the Design Window: An Overview The Design window itself consists of several parts. too. You create your drawing In the Drawing view. You can define one or more Engineering Data Editors for a drawing. you can cascade or tile views to more easily navigate among them. The Engineering Data Editor displays drawing information in a table. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 15 . A tab scroll provides a way to view tabs hidden from display by the horizontal scroll bar. You can add new tabs for additional filters as needed. and so forth. too. Filter tabs provide a quick and easy way to choose what appears in the Drawing view. much like a Properties window. In the Engineering Data Editor. you can specify filters and layouts to define the table information and even edit some item properties. Each window has its own independent set of properties defining view range. By using commands on the Window menu. The Design window. displays the model information for a design in a Drawing or Engineering Data Editor view. or Modeler. display properties. You can open as many windows as needed to support a design.

By manipulating model views. This view displays the common idea of a model: a diagram containing items such as equipment. For more information about the data model. • SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. piping. for example.A tabular view that presents the plant data in a tabular format. page 138 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 108 • 16 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . however. and instrumentation. The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. unified data structure that represents the plant model. Click OK to re-create the drawing from the database. Caution • The software continually updates the database as you edit a drawing. including all plant components and their relationships. Occasionally. When you re-open the drawing. but the drawing file reflects the status when you last saved the drawing. see Using the Properties Glossary: An Overview Related Topics Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. As a result. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data. page 53 • Open a New Drawing View. (B) Engineering Data Editor . the database is up-to-date with changes that you posted to the drawing. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model and can be a schematic drawing or a table. the software recognizes that the drawing file is different from the database and displays a message: One or more items in this drawing are inconsistent with the database. page 35 • Open an Existing Drawing. the software can end in an abnormal way.Navigating in the Software: An Overview • (A) Drawing view . due to power outage. the software does not update the drawing file until you actually save the file (when you click File > Save or when you quit the program).A graphical representation of the plant model. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor.

Displays the drawing as it appears when you print it. page 21 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options. Display as printed . screen appearance. page 273 Options Dialog Box Sets options for the current drawing. see Related Topics.Sets the number of entries for the recently used files list on the File menu. export formats. For more information about linking. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. grids. you can set the number of recently used files that appear on the File menu. and so forth. placement information. page 21 General Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets options for updating links in the drawing and displaying the drawing. and so forth. Open this dialog box by clicking Tools > Options on the main menu bar. Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show Command Available on the Drawing View Shortcut menu. Update links automatically at open . Opens the Options dialog box. labels. such as notes. page 33 Options Command Tools > Options Changes settings that control recently used files. For example.Updates links automatically when a drawing is opened. Recently used files list . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 17 . the Show command allows you to choose to display drawing elements. the status bar. page 91 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. and recently used files.

page 21 • Options Command. the description appears in the status bar at the bottom of the window. page 17 18 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Sets the default background color for all Drawing views in the active drawing. (for example. the line weight and color) for item types throughout a plant structure. The connect points in the drawing appear in this color.Sets the highlight color. Note • To set the symbology.Sets all the colors listed above to the default display value. page 283 • Change a Link. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options. When you point at the command button on the toolbar.Sets the color of selected items.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show status bar . Use Defaults . Highlight . Background . Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. Related Topics • Break a Link. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. too. and handle colors in the drawing. Selected items . highlight.Sets the color of handles when an item is selected. selection. use Options Manager. prompts that explain what to do at each step of the command appear in the status bar. Also. page 282 • Customize the Software With the Options Command. Handles .Displays the status bar at the bottom of the main window. and messages about the operations the software is performing appear in the status bar. page 278 Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) Allows you to select options for the background. page 21 • Embed a New Object.

and a valve can be an approaching item to that pipe run. but this option allows you to change the default on a drawing-by-drawing basis. The pipe is highlighted when the valve is within the locate tolerance. is placed. Also. Existing. Locate . you can indicate the drawing in which the partner OPC is stored until you place it in that drawing. and Future.Specifies the range. the Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box appears after you place a new OPC. The plant administrator sets the plant-wide default at setup. The construction status for an item appears in the Properties window when the item is selected. the construction status can be set for individual drawing items by changing its value in the Properties window. For example. a pipe run can be a candidate item. called the locate zone. If you keep the pointer within the break-away tolerance from the line. Break-away . to move a valve. you drag the valve.Assigns the selected construction status to all placed items. the locate tolerance defines how close that the pointer must approach in order to select the item.Sets the number of pixels at which an item disconnects from its parent item. A candidate item is any item in the drawing that meets the placement rules of the approaching item. page 17 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 19 . Default construction status . Place partner OPC in Stockpile . page 21 • Options Command. Using this dialog box. the partner OPC is automatically stored in the Stockpile. OPC. If you clear this option. page 204 • Customize the Software With the Options Command. If you are not placing an item but only selecting drawing items.Indicates that when a new off-page connector. the valve does not disconnect from the line. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Placement Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets the default construction status for the active drawing. at which a candidate item is highlighted when another item approaches. This list contains the following options: New. For example. and tolerances for locating items and moving around in the drawing. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC Dialog Box Opens after you place a connector on a drawing. the 2 represents the size of the drawing and the 1 represents the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio. Coincident (1:1) . Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector. page 204 • Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile. 20 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . which opens when you click Tools > Options on the main menu bar.Imports a reference file. Scale reference files .Sets a scale option for importing a drawing. ready to be placed in the drawing. These settings take effect in your next drawing session. at full scale (1:1). Drawing list .Displays the hierarchical tree representation of the plant. When you select a node. The specified ratio defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. much like a catalog item during placement mode. Plant Hierarchy . The Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box allows you to select the drawing stockpile into which the partner of the new connector is placed. unless you have selected the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option on the Placement tab of the Options dialog box. This tab is part of the Options dialog box. page 206 • Place an OPC or Utility Connector. The reference file is at the end of the pointer. also known as an inserted object. the drawings associated with that node appear in the Drawing list area. This setting causes the reference file to appear temporarily in the lower left of the drawing and determines a drawing scale that fits the reference file within the drawing. page 204 Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets options for inserting objects in the drawing. page 204 • Move a Connector to Another Stockpile.Displays all the drawings associated with the selected node on the Plant Hierarchy tree. Choose a stockpile from this view to associate your partner connector with. page 202 • Store a Partner Connector.Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. Select Scale . Note • The Fit to Sheet option in the Select Scale list determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet but allows you to specify where the file is inserted by clicking on the drawing sheet.

Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Custom Scale . click the tab containing the information that you want to customize. Drives . page 282 • Customize the Software With the Options Command. report templates are stored. page 278 Browse Dialog Box Allows you to select a directory that contains your reports. page 21 • Options Command. Open this dialog box by clicking Tools > Options > Files Tab > Browse. page 18 Placement Tab (Options Dialog Box). page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 21 . Select options on the dialog box to make the appropriate changes. page 282 • Embed a New Object. which allows you to select a local or network folder to store your user-defined reports and report templates. Browse . page 20 3. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. page 19 Files Tab (Options Dialog Box). when you type 3 and 2 in each of the respective boxes. page 21 • Edit an Embedded Object. Click Tools > Options. Look in . page 283 • Change a Link. Select a different drive in order to see directories that reside on that drive in the Look in box. or personal.Displays the currently selected folder and the available folders in the active drive. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command.Sets the scale for a drawing that you insert. Related Topics • Break a Link. the scale of the foreign drawing is one and one half times its original size. page 17 Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box).Opens the Browse dialog box. page 17 Customize the Software With the Options Command 1. On the Options dialog box. • • • • General Tab (Options Dialog Box).Specifies the folder where your user-defined. For example.Lists the drives that are currently active on your computer. 2. My Reports .

page 37 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. To refresh the window. and the software does not remember more than one view. page 22 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 22 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Save the Settings for the Active View. Related Topics • Restore a Drawing View. the view changes to the view present before you zoomed in. press F5. For example. page 15 Restore a Drawing View Click View > Previous. press Esc. This action is convenient for large drawings. page 15 Zoom Area Command View > Zoom Area Enlarges the display of an area in the active window by allowing you to draw a fence around that arbitrary area of the drawing. • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. if you zoom in and then click View > Previous. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. Notes • To stop the repainting of items in the window.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Previous Command View > Previous Restores the previous view. page 15 Save Settings Command View > Save Settings Stores all display filters for the active Drawing view.

press Esc or right-click in the drawing. To refresh the window. 3. Click the view at the center of the area you want to zoom in on. To refresh the window. press F5. On the main toolbar. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. click Zoom In: . page 15 Zoom In on the Drawing 1. press F5. The selection then fills the view. This action is convenient for large drawings. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. This action is convenient for large drawings. right-click or press Esc. • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. 2. To quit the command. page 15 Zoom In Command View > Zoom In Enlarges the display of items around a specified point in the active window. press Esc. On the main toolbar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Zoom In on an Area 1. click View > Previous. 2. On the Drawing view. use the pointer to fence the area that you want to zoom in on. press Esc. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. click View > Previous. To quit the command. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. To stop the repainting of items in the window. click Zoom Area: . page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 23 . Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. To stop the repainting of items in the window.

To stop the repainting of items in the window. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. page 15 • Zoom Out from an Area. However. click Zoom Out . if any items are selected in the drawing. On the main toolbar. 2. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. If only one item is selected in the drawing. Related Topics • Fit All Items in the Active Drawing View. the command zooms to the selected item. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. page 15 Fit Command View > Fit Fits all items in the active view if no items are currently selected. press Esc. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. This action is convenient for large drawings. Click the Drawing view at the center of the area you want to zoom out from. the command fits only the selected items in the active view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Zoom Out Command View > Zoom Out Reduces the display of items around a specified point in the active window. To quit the command. To refresh the window. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. press F5. page 25 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 24 Zoom Out from an Area 1. page 15 24 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . right-click or press Esc. click View > Previous.

Related Topics Pan a Drawing View. Click in the view again to define how far you want to pan. 3.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Fit All Items in the Active Drawing View On the main toolbar. To quit the command. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. To refresh the window. To go back to the previous view. Notes • • • You can click and drag the hand pointer to pan the view. Click in the view that you want to pan. page 15 Pan Command View > Pan Allows you to move the display in any direction from a specific point in a drawing to see other areas of the drawing by dragging the pointer across the view. press F5. press Esc. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. On the main toolbar. click Fit . page 25 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. press Esc or right-click in the Drawing view. page 15 • Pan a Drawing View 1. too. To stop the repainting of items in the window. This action is convenient for large drawings. 2. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 25 . click View > Previous. click Pan: .

Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. page 85 Toolbars Command View > Toolbars Opens the Toolbars dialog box. page 28 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Color Buttons .Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected.Adds color to the toolbar buttons. New . hiding. Toolbar Name . Open this dialog box by clicking View > Toolbars on the main menu bar. Clearing this option causes toolbar buttons to appear in black and white.Resets the selected toolbar to the original icons. hide. page 15 Toolbars Dialog Box Sets options for displaying. or changing toolbars. You can select the box next to the toolbar that you want to display. page 41 • Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off. too. page 66 • Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off. Reset . Customize .Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with the Customize dialog box. 26 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Lists the available toolbars. which allows you to create new toolbars and display or hide selected toolbars. page 28 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. You can change toolbar color schemes and button sizes. Toolbars .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Command View > Display Allows you to specify the windows you want to see in your design session: • • • Catalog Explorer Properties Window Engineering Data Editor Related Topics • Display the Engineering Data Editor. page 91 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar.Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box. or change.

Click View > Toolbars. page 28 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar.Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see. On the New Toolbar dialog box. You cannot choose a name for your new toolbar that is already used for another toolbar. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box. type the name of the new toolbar. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. 3. Click OK. 7. 2. page 95 Create a New Toolbar 1. Open this dialog box from the main menu bar by clicking View > Toolbars > New. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 27 . click New. click the category that contains the command that you want to add. On the Toolbars dialog box. 5.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Large Buttons . Show ToolTips .Type the name of the new toolbar in the box. page 28 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. Toolbar Name .Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when the pointer pauses over one of them. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the new toolbar. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. 4. page 95 New Toolbar Dialog Box Creates a new toolbar. 6. Click Tools > Customize.

page 91 Remove a Button From a Toolbar 1. click Tools > Customize. click the category that contains the command that you want to add. page 91 Properties Command View > Properties Displays the View Properties dialog box. page 15 28 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. 2. On the Toolbars tab. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 314 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. drag the button that you want to remove from the toolbar into the Buttons area. The set of property tabs that are available in the View Properties dialog box depends on the active view. On the Toolbars tab. page 22 • Save the Settings for the Active View. Related Topics • Restore a Drawing View.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Add a Button to a Toolbar 1. page 37 • Show Inconsistencies. 2. which lets you define and control settings for the active view. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. you cannot reset it. select the toolbar that you want to restore. Click View > Toolbars. page 91 Restore a Customized Toolbar to Its Default Settings 1. On the main menu bar. Click Tools > Customize on the main menu bar. Note • If you create a new toolbar. 3. 3. In the Toolbars dialog box. Drag the command button from the Buttons area to the toolbar. Click the Reset button. These tabs logically organize the properties into sets that you can use for manipulating special view qualities.

page 28 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 29 .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Properties Dialog Box Opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view and select Properties from the shortcut menu.Opens the Select Filter dialog box. Filter .Contains information about how the software displays the filtered items in your Drawing view. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Properties on the main menu bar.Allows you to specify the color of the filtered items. You can name the new filter appropriately. You specify the name of the filter when you choose or create it. you must right-click the drawing filter tab and select Use Alternate Symbology.Allows you to specify the line width for your filtered items. This information is read-only. Width . Color . You can modify the properties of the filter that you choose from the Select Filter dialog box. Note • If the active view is the Engineering Data Editor. This dialog box allows you to edit a filter for your drawing. Scroll down the list to choose a line width. • Related Topics Properties Command. page 138 View Properties Dialog Box Controls the display of information in the Drawing view. Filter Name . Properties .Displays the name of the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. In order for the alternate symbology to take effect in your drawing. which allows you to choose or create a filter for your Drawing view. Browse . Scroll down the list to choose a color. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Alternate symbology .Opens the Filter Properties dialog box.Contains information about the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. then View > Properties opens the Table Properties dialog box.

Turns the display of inconsistency indicators on or off.Turns on the display of the options selected on the Claims tab. Notes can contain links to a file. drawing borders. Description .Turns the display of notes on or off. View name . Show . Prevent selection of inserted objects . Drawing borders . This information is read-only. Notes .Displays the type of view. Grids . Claims . and readout category. Select . 30 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . notes. The inserted file appears gray in the drawing.Allows you to enter a description of the Drawing view. description.Makes inserted foreign data non-locatable in a drawing. page 28 • View Properties Dialog Box.Turns the grid display on or off.Toggles the display of the drawing border on or off. including the name. select this box. in any view.Includes other options for the selection of items in your drawing. Related Topics • Properties Command. and inconsistency indicators. grids.Lists options for objects you want to appear in your Drawing view. When you select the check box. If the display of labels is turned off here. Items that you can display include labels.Allows you to name the Drawing view. For example. if you insert a file using Edit > Insert Object and do not want to accidentally select that file in the drawing. Do not show labels for filtered items . for example.Navigating in the Software: An Overview General Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Displays miscellaneous information about a Drawing view.Prevents the display of labels in filtered views of the design. Labels . type. then the Do not show labels options is not available since all labels are no longer displayed regardless of the view tab that you are using. Inconsistency indicators .Toggles the display of all labels on or off. View type . the display toggles on for that item. a Microsoft Word file. page 29 Display Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the display of items in a Drawing view.

Density . This option is available only with the Static grid style. page 28 • View Properties Dialog Box. page 150 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 31 .Turns the grid display on or off. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker.Turns the snap-to-grid feature on or off. Show grid . which is the number of minor grid lines. You do not have to display the grid in order to snap items to it. and so you cannot change the Index list when using the Dynamic grid style. page 33 • Properties Command. The choice of grid style affects the option that is available in the Spacing or Density box and the availability of the Index options. the grid lines for a dynamic grid change with the level of magnification. When you zoom in or out. or coarse levels when you choose the Dynamic grid style from the Style list. Style . page 29 Grid Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the behavior of the grid in the view.Specifies either Static or Dynamic grid style. Index . too. solid grid lines. Related Topics • Properties Command. When you select this option.Turns the grid display and grid snapping on or off. For a dynamic grid display the number of index lines varies depending on the zoom level. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. page 28 • Show Grid Command. Grid lines are not printed.Allows you to specify fine.Allows you to specify the space between the grid lines when you choose the Static grid style from the Style list. View . Snap grid . Spacing . Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • You can access the View Properties dialog box by right-clicking in space in your drawing and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu. medium.Specifies the grid index.

if you specify a severity level of five. all errors with . page 28 • Show Inconsistencies. you can specify the severity level and control the warnings that you see.Specifies the display of invalidly claimed items in the Drawing view. Errors above severity . Invalidly claimed items are items which differ from the Plant items and which you cannot modify and check into the Plant without first establishing a valid claim. Approved warnings are marked with .Turns the display of errors on or off. Show . which appears when you click View > Properties. page 314 Claims Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Sets options for the display of items in the Drawing view according to their claim states. Invalid claims . Again. The software verifies in real-time if the composition of a drawing and the underlying data model satisfy rules defined in Rule Manager. Errors are marked with a Warnings above severity . For example. Claim .Lists options for objects you want to appear in your Drawing view.Specifies the special display of drawing items that are not claimed at all. Status .Displays the possible claim states for all items except invalidly claimed items. which signify the suitability of design work that you perform while creating the drawing. Choose the indicators and severities that you want to view in your drawing. This tab is part of the View Properties dialog box. 32 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Invalid claiming can happen only for Plants that support shared claiming of database items. You can specify the severity level. Related Topics • Properties Command. severity of five or above appear. If you specify a special display for invalidly claimed items in the Drawing view. then these display options override all other options designated in the Claim area of this dialog box. Approved warnings .Displays the possible claim states and combination of claim states for drawing items. Warnings are marked with a .Turns the display of warnings on or off.Turns the display of approved warnings on or off. Open the View Properties dialog box by clicking View > Properties.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Inconsistency Indicators Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the display of inconsistency indicators. Not claimed .

On the Grid tab. For errors and warnings. if you specify 5.Specifies the special display of drawing items that are claimed solely by other projects or the Plant. Warnings. Notes. For more information about claiming items. Grids. you can choose the Show grid or Snap grid option. select the items that you want to display in the view. Also on the Display tab. Claimed only by this project . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 33 . Density.Specifies the special display of drawing items when the active project shares a claim on with another project or the Plant. 7. page 302 • Release a Claim. 2. you can select from any of the Errors. and Index options. project status. If your Plant is configured so that it honors only exclusive claiming. 3. On the Inconsistency Indicator tab. then these display options will have no effect in the Drawing view. and you can enter a view name and description. Drawing borders. errors with severity level of 5 or greater are displayed.Allows you to select a line width for items with the corresponding claim state. You can select any of the Labels. On the Display tab. and the properties of the grid.Specifies the special display of drawing items to which this project has the sole claim. if needed. and Inconsistency indicators options. The View type box is read-only. Shared claims . see Related Topics.Allows you to select a color for items with the corresponding claim state. Related Topics Claim a Drawing Item. you can specify the severity level of the displayed inconsistencies. page 292 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Claimed only by others . Filter labels. 4. select the Prevent selection of inserted objects option if you want to prohibit the selection of linked or embedded objects in the drawing. Tip • Claiming items is governed by projects. select the General tab. For example. On the Claims tab. page 301 • Change the Properties of a Drawing View 1. Click View > Properties. Widths . On the View Properties dialog box. and options specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and Drawing Manager. 6. Colors . and Approved warnings options. you can choose special display colors for drawing items according to their claim status. 5. in the Style.

page 289 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Creating a new Drawing or Engineering Data Editor view of a drawing does not create a new copy or version of the drawing.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Important • If the active view is the Engineering Data Editor. the graphical Drawing view is opened on top of the Engineering Data Editor when you select Window > New > Drawing. page 35 • New Drawing Window Command. Related Topics • New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu). Related Topics Claiming Items: An Overview. You can change the view features for the new Drawing window using the commands on the View menu. • Related Topics Open a New Drawing View. The same drawing data simply displays in the different views. page 91 • New Command Window > New Allows you to open a new Drawing or Engineering Data Editor window within the Design window. Notes • If only the Engineering Data Editor view of a drawing is open. then clicking View > Properties opens the Table Properties dialog box. The new view has the same filters as the previous Drawing view. page 15 • 34 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 34 New Drawing Window Command Window > New > Drawing Creates a new Drawing view within the active drawing. This command copies the contents of the active Drawing view into a new window and displays the contents as graphical items. page 35 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.

Select it and click End Task. and so forth.pid:3. which you can access from the Help > Printable Guides command.pid:2. quit all SmartPlant applications. Click Window > New > Drawing. For more information.pid:1. For more information on the Windows Task Manager. You create new drawings in Drawing Manager.pid) the new view is named Pipeline. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 35 . Tip A new Drawing view is not the same as a new drawing. Pipeline.exe process. • Notes • • You can have as many Drawing views open for a drawing as needed. Edit the drawing as needed. When you open a new Drawing view (for example. page 34 • Open a New Drawing View 1.Navigating in the Software: An Overview New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu) Window > New > Engineering Data Editor Opens the Engineering Data Editor in the Design window and allows you to view and edit model data for a drawing in a tabular format. In Task Manager search for an extra draft. • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. and subsequent new Drawing views are Pipeline. 2. Related Topics New Drawing Window Command. see Microsoft Windows Help. If the software gives indications that a drawing is in use when it is not. see SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager Help. and then open the Windows Task Manager. Pipeline.

page 15 36 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can easily access another open document by clicking one of the window names on the list.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Cascade Command Window > Cascade Overlaps windows diagonally across in the Design window. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen. page 15 • Zoom In on an Area. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 23 • Zoom Out from an Area. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 23 • Zoom In on the Drawing. page 15 Active Window List Displays an alphabetical list of open document windows below the commands on the Window menu. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 Tile Vertically Command Window > Tile Vertically Arranges windows to fit vertically in the Design window. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 24 Tile Horizontally Command Window > Tile Horizontally Arranges windows to fit horizontally in the Design window.

Your settings are automatically saved upon quitting the software. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 37 . Notes • • This command saves all display filters for the active Drawing view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save the Settings for the Active View Click View > Save Settings or right-click a tab at the bottom of the active view and select Save Settings. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.

to color code items according to the stockpile that they are currently in. The EDE is automatically displayed in the lower left of the main window.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview The Engineering Data Editor (EDE) uses a grid or tabular format to display the query results for the database. You can also filter the display by using the buttons that correspond to different stockpiles and drawings: • • • • Active Drawing Active Drawing Stockpile Stockpile Other Drawings By default. If you want to list all items select Plant Item from the list. for instance. and you can also open the EDE to appear in the Design window. The list on the toolbar contains filters that query the database and display the corresponding items in the EDE. You can use the Display Settings command. You can re-query and thereby refresh the EDE display by clicking the Refresh button . Finally a summary box displays a comparison between the number of items in the view and the total number of items. that exist in the database. The EDE Toolbar At the top of the EDE is the EDE toolbar. 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . which allows you to define the items that you want to see in the EDE. Use Edit View to display the Table Properties dialog box. The menu buttons are found here: • • • Stockpile Edit View Click the down-arrow next to the menu button to expose the available commands. You customize a filter and layout for the display on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Customizing the EDE Commands on the Edit menu allow you to customize the display of the EDE further. initially only the Active Drawing and Active Drawing Stockpile buttons are selected. of the type chosen in the list.

page 41 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. If the cell is populated by a readonly property or a property that is only automatically generated by validation. if the cell contents are compatible. Related Topics Display the Engineering Data Editor. • Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. For more information. the Query Results dialog box opens. page 53 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 54 • Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview. You can then choose to refine your query in order to generate fewer items or to enter report-only mode and run a report on your query results. Notes • The maximum number of items that can be displayed in the EDE is 65.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Editing Properties in the EDE You can edit some of the properties viewed in the table by selecting a table cell and filling in the appropriate information. you cannot edit that cell. page 38 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 39 . The contents of cells can be copied to other cells. then you choose the value from the select list. Then you can view the properties in the Properties window and edit item properties there. click Related Topics.537. If the property has a select list associated with it. page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. The EDE is where you view items in the Stockpile or in a drawing stockpile. page 263 Engineering Data Editor Command View > Display > Engineering Data Editor Turns on or off the display of the Engineering Data Editor. You can select a entire row by clicking the corresponding icon in the left-most column of the table. If your database query results in more than this number. too.

Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. and so forth. Continue with this query so that I can generate a plant or personal report Causes the Engineering Data Editor to enable only these commands: Edit view. Edit . Delete view. for example.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list.Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Query Results Dialog Box Displays options for continuing your work in the Engineering Data Editor when you have requested more information than can appear in the interface. To add to or modify the definition list.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. =. Examples of properties include Equipment Type. Match all .Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Additional Filter Criteria .Displays the number of items that your query returned. This option is useful when creating a report for large data sets such as an entire plant database. 40 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . <>. and Estimated Length. Relationships include.Allows you to choose between refining your query or entering report-only mode. Maximum Allowed .Displays the currently allowed number of items in the Engineering Data Editor.Displays all new criteria to add to the current filter.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Match any . you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. Rows Returned . and a value. Delete . greater than. Add . >. Property .Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property.Allows you to use the Additional Filter Criteria list in this dialog box to refine your query in order to display an allowed number of items in the view. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list. equal to. Save view. Options . an operator. Instrument Loop Item Tag. Refine Query Definition . You can either refine your query or run a report with your query results. My Reports. Operator . Match any is the default matching method. and Plant Reports. not equal to.

which can be free text. page 154 • Remove an Item from a Drawing. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. or choose null. Do not use an asterisk. page 250 • Remove an Item from the Model. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. ?. in the Value box. %. You can type a percent sign. as a wildcard character for a single character. Click the down-arrow next to the Stockpile menu to display the available commands. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. page 15 • Stockpile Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile Contains commands for moving and deleting items.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. Tip • To close the Engineering Data Editor. *. you must type a value. page 265 • Place Multiple Representations. page 59 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 58 Display the Engineering Data Editor Click View > Display > Engineering Data Editor. page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. click View > Display > Engineering Data Editor again. page 38 • Update the Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Value . page 251 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 41 . Related Topics Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 38 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. or type a question mark. Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview.

page 251 Move to Different Stockpile Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Move to Different Stockpile Allows you to move a stockpile item from one stockpile to another. page 154 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. page 38 42 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 245 • Remove an Item from the Model. you can move an item from the Stockpile into the stockpile for your active drawing if you know the item belongs in that drawing but are not yet ready to place the item. page 152 Delete Stockpile Item Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Delete Stockpile Item Removes the stockpile item from the plant model completely. That is the item and its properties are deleted from the database and can no longer be placed in a drawing. This multiple representation allows the depiction of an item from another drawing in a detailed or alternate view. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Multiple representations are available only for some types of equipment. regardless of symbol settings in Options Manager or Catalog Manager. For instance.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Place Multiple Representation Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Place Multiple Representation Allows you to place a second instance of an equipment item in a second drawing. The Move to Different Stockpile dialog box opens. You can even move items from one drawing stockpile to another. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. Similarly you can move an item in the Drawing Stockpile to the Stockpile so that it can be used in other drawings. page 38 • Place Multiple Representations. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. page 265 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview.

Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. page 43 • Paste Command. If the cell is read-only. page 147 Copy Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Copy Places the value in the currently selected cell onto the Clipboard so that you can paste it somewhere else. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 43 . page 87 • Select All Command. Values placed on the Clipboard remain there until newer values are copied over them. This command does not remove the value from the selected table cell. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. You must have previously placed a value on the Clipboard in order to paste it. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 44 • Select an Item. page 87 Paste Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Paste Places the value from the Clipboard into the selected cell. page 43 • Review and Edit Item Properties. You can also invoke a claim at any time to expand the scope of your project. You can also release a claim at any time and you can determine the validity of a claim.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Edit Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > Edit Allows you to copy and paste values from one cell to another cell in the Engineering Data Editor and to select all the items in the view in order to create a select set. page 289 • Copy Command. then the Paste command is not available. and any new item created in a project is automatically claimed by that project. Click the down-arrow next to the Edit menu button to display the available commands. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview.

page 144 • Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Gives control of the selected items to the current active project.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Select All Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Select All Chooses all the items in the active Engineering Data Editor. allowing you to confirm the "claim-ability" of the items and enter claim comments. You can create a select set using this command. page 292 • Claiming Items: An Overview. page 289 Release Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Release Claim Allows you to relinquish control by your project of the selected items. The Claim dialog box opens. page 301 44 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Claims must be released before projects can be completed or for other projects to be able to check in drawings with changes. A confirmation message is displayed so that you can confirm the release-claim action. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 289 • Release a Claim. page 87 • Select an Item. Claim comments can be viewed later by anyone in the Plant when the claim status is displayed.

page 64 • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Claim Status Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Status Opens the Claim Status dialog box. page 61 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 45 . page 54 • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. page 57 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. You must select the items in the Drawing view or the Engineering Data Editor before using this command. Click the down-arrow next to the menu button to display the commands. which displays the details of the claimed state of the selected items and enables you to claim items. and so forth. page 56 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. page 58 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. page 302 View Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > View Displays the commands that help you customize and manipulate the layout and content of the Engineering Data Editor. release the claims to items. page 289 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor.

page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. too. see Default Table Layouts. and layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. page 46 • 46 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Note • The Engineering Data Editor is where stockpile items are displayed. You can specify the default filter and layout for a certain item type also. Specify brief and bulk properties in this dialog box. equipment or motors).Displays the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Related Topics Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. or Paste Bulk Properties commands from the Properties window toolbar. page 53 • Edit View Command. page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Brief and bulk properties appear in the Properties window when you select the Show Brief Properties. Filter . Item type . Advanced . page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 38 Table Properties Dialog Box Enables you to select the item types.Lists all of the filters that have been saved for the selected item type. For a list of default layouts. Layout . page 50.Lists all of the layouts that have been saved for the selected item type. filters. Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. and you can further modify the layout and create custom filters for your Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Edit View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Edit View Opens the Table Properties dialog box. where you can define and save filters or layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. This dialog box appears when you right-click an existing table and select Edit View. where you can access options to specify the tabular display. Copy Bulk Properties.Lists all the item types that you can select (for example. If you click Advanced on this dialog box. the Advanced Table Properties dialog box opens.

Includes areas to add. This dialog box opens when you click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box.Displays the name of a saved filter. Definition . You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property. Base filter . Add . an operator. page 46 Filter Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to define. You can change a filter to the default by selecting this box. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 47 . which allows you to select a base filter. and a value. Match all . Examples of properties include revision number and name. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Delete . select.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box Allows you to define.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Match any is the default matching method. select. Edit . page 53 • Edit View Command. and save filters and layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list.Displays the name of the filter.Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list.Indicates if the named filter is the default filter for the item type selected on the Table Properties dialog box.Opens the Select Filter dialog box.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. and save a filter for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. as it is defined in Filter Manager. Match any . Browse .Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. remove. Default .Displays options that allow you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. Name . Related Topics • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. or edit filter criteria. Property .

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Operator . in the Value box. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. page 52 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Bulk. you must type a value. Note • Saving a layout is not the same as saving a view in the Engineering Data Editor.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. Options include a blank value. You can designate a layout as the default by checking this box and then clicking Save. Save . <>. Or. you can select any of the layouts in the list.Lists the property display types associated with the Properties window.Removes the named layout. greater than. Relationships include.Displays the name of a saved layout. see Save an Engineering Data Editor View 48 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. *. The selected item type and display properties define what appears in the Properties window when you select the Show Brief Properties. and so forth. page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. or type a question mark. Brief. ?. as a wildcard character for a single character. In order for your choice in the Usage box to take effect. Delete (Name) . and Brief/Bulk.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. Do not use an asterisk. you must exit and reenter the design software. for example. %. not equal to. Copy Bulk Properties.Saves the data in this dialog box as a named layout. Value . =. Layout names must be unique.Indicates whether the named layout is the default layout for the item type on the Table Properties dialog box. which can be free text. page 54 Layout Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box) Define. equal to. Usage . and save a layout for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. You can enter a new layout name and then click Save to save the layout for re-use. or Paste Bulk Properties commands from the Properties window toolbar. or choose null. For more information about saving views. Default . select. Name . >. You can type a percent sign.

Displays the caption for each column in the Engineering Data Editor.Displays all defined criteria associated with the selected layout. To edit an entry. Up .Lists the properties that apply to the item type specified in the Table Properties dialog box. If you select an entry in the Sort Property view.Displays a list of all the properties that apply to the item type defined in the Table Properties dialog box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Definition . page 47 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Insert . Edit . depending on the row you have selected.Removes the currently selected entry. Delete (Definition) . Sort Property . you can specify the property.Adds a new entry at the end of the existing entries and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. Add . You select one. Property . Down . Moving a row down either moves a display column to the right or moves a sort order down. page 54 • New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu). Related Topics • Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box.Lists the columns that appear in the Engineering Data Editor. page 53 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. The buttons to the right act upon the active list view. If you select an entry in the Display Property view. you can specify the property and its caption. Caption (Definition) . Moving a row up either moves a display column to the left or moves a sort order up. page 35 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 49 . If you select an entry in the Sort Property view.Moves the currently selected entry down one line. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. Order . Display Property . Caption (Edit) . You can select one. and its type.Lists the sort types Numeric and Alphanumeric. If you select an entry in the Display Property view. select it and modify the property in the Edit group.Allows you to edit a single entry selected in either the Display Property or Sort Property list views. This group contains two list views. the Edit group allows you to edit the property.Lists the sort orders Ascending and Descending. the Edit group allows you to edit the property and the caption.Displays the caption for each column in the Engineering Data Editor. its order. In order to add to or modify either list.Moves the currently selected entry up one line.Places a new entry above the currently selected entry and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. Type . order and type. depending on the row you have selected.

and saving under a new name. Different layouts are included with SmartPlant Electrical and SmartPlant P&ID.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Default Table Layouts The software includes several default layouts. You can use them to base your own layouts on by changing the layout name. adding or deleting properties. SmartPlant Electrical • • • • • • • • • • • • Default Battery Bank List Default Bus List Default Cable List Default Circuit List Default Circuit Breaker List Default Control Stations List Default Document List Default Generator List Default Load List Motor List Default PDB List Default Reference Cable List Area Break Drawing Equipment Equipment Component Exchanger Mechanical Equipment Other Vessel Instrument Instrument Loop Item Note Nozzle OPC Package SmartPlant P&ID • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 50 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Notes • If you do not find a filter that you want under Filter. page 53 Define a New Engineering Data Editor View 1.Navigating in the Software: An Overview • • • • • • • • Pipe Run Piping Component Plant Item Plant Item Group Other Representation Safety Class Signal Run System Related Topics • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. right-click the table and select Edit View. Click Window > New > Table. On the Table Properties dialog box. Open the Advanced Table Properties dialog box by clicking Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. Select a filter from the Filter list. 2. 3. • • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. The Table Properties dialog box opens. Select a layout from the Layout list. select an item type from the Item Type list. you can define a filter on the Filter tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. To modify an existing table. Open the Advanced Table Properties dialog box by clicking Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. If you do not find a layout that you want under Layout. you can define a layout on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 51 . 4.

Tip • After you have defined a specific filter for your Engineering Data Editor. • 4. operator. On the Filter tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. 9. and value in the Edit group. Click OK on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box and again on the Table Properties dialog box so that the software can populate your table. specify a name for the filter in the Base filter box. Click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. Click Browse if you want to search for a filter or create a new filter (either simple or compound) using the Select Filter dialog box. populate the Definition box with properties and values. such as greater than and not equal to. page 56 52 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . repeat steps 4 and 5. You can click Add to add another line to the Definition box. Click Delete if you want to delete the current row in the Definition box. Select a property. 3. 6. 5. Tip The Property list displays properties that apply to your item type. 8. To further define a filter. you can save that definition: Save an Engineering Data Editor View. • Tip Check Default if you want this filter to be the default for the item type that you selected on the Table Properties dialog box. the Value list displays the specific properties that you can filter for. 2. Click either Match all or Match any. Tip You can open the Table Properties dialog box by right-clicking the Engineering Data Editor and choosing Edit View from the shortcut menu. • 7. if necessary. the Operator list displays all the possible relationships.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View 1. To add more entries.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. 2. • 8. select a row in the Sort Property box and click Move Up or Move Down. select a row in the Display Property box and click Move Up or Move Down. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. click Delete if you want to delete the layout. page 91 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. 7. specify a name for the layout. and then specify the property and caption in the Edit group at the bottom of the dialog box. Click Save if you want to save the layout in order to apply it to another Engineering Data Editor. Click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. • 4. • Tip Select Default if you want this layout to be the default table layout for the item type. repeat step 7. repeat step 5. you can always create My Filters in the Filter Manager environment. To further define a layout. click Add to add an entry. and type in the Edit group at the bottom of the dialog box. Click Add to add a blank line to the Display Property list. Then select the property. Tip • To change the sort order of the properties in the Engineering Data Editor. order. To add and define more sort properties. which you specify on the Table Properties dialog box. page 38 Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor 1. In the Sort Property list. However. 5. Tip To change the display order of the columns in the Engineering Data Editor. Tip You can right-click an existing Engineering Data Editor and select Edit View to open the Table Properties dialog box. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 53 . 3. you lose that information. On the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. populate the Definition box with display and sort properties. To add and define more display properties. Project Filters should not be created at a satellite site because when you synchronize reference data. 6.

page 53 4. Insert. you lose that information. filter. and Move Down buttons apply to the active list view. you should not store custom layouts for the Engineering Data Editor because when you synchronize reference data. see Save an Engineering Data Editor View. You can also name and save the entire Engineering Data Editor. click the View menu and select Edit View. • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 38 Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View 1. Review and edit the item type. see Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. Delete. specify a name in the Name box and click Save on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. For more information.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Important • The Add. page 52 Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Move Up. Click OK to display the modified view. which can be either Display Property or Sort Property. If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. layout and all. and layout on the Table Properties dialog box. Notes • After defining a layout. you can save it if you want to apply it to another view of the Engineering Data Editor. 3. page 38 54 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. page 56 • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. If you want to customize a filter or layout click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. In the Engineering Data Editor. To save the view layout. For more information.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Save View Opens the Save View dialog box. page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. This name. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Save View in the EDE. which applies to the currently active EDE.Provides space for you to type in the name of your custom view. is displayed at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar with other saved views. Related Topics • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. which allows you to name and save the current Engineering Data Editor. Name . page 56 • Save View Command. page 56 Save View Dialog Box Allows you to specify a name for your custom Engineering Data Editor. page 55 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 55 . page 38 • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. These custom views appear at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Related Topics • Save an Engineering Data Editor View.

You can change filters and layouts by using the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Notes • An EDE view is a combination of item type. page 64 • • • The EDE is where you can display stockpile items. That is. see Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Tip • You can reactivate your saved view any time from the bottom of the filter list on the EDE toolbar. 2.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save an Engineering Data Editor View 1. You can delete a saved view. Enter a name for your view in the Name box. After you customize the Engineering Data Editor (EDE). page 38 56 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and layout. page 54 Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. and this action applies to any EDE that refers to those table properties. Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. filter. and the new layout is reflected in both views of the EDE. For more information. too. There are several ways to customize your EDE: Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. click View > Save View on the EDE toolbar. you can change a layout that applies not only to a standard view but also to a saved view. page 57.

Lists the saved views. Name . page 57 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 57 Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View 1. page 38 Delete View Dialog Box Lets you choose a saved custom Engineering Data Editor and delete it. 2. Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Delete View Allows you to delete a view if you have stored a custom Engineering Data Editor view. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Choose one and click OK to delete that view. Tip Saved views are displayed at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. The Delete View dialog box opens. Related Topics • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. page 57 • Delete View Command. • Note • The Engineering Data Editor is where stockpile items can be displayed. Click View > Delete View on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 57 . and you can choose the view that you want to delete from a list of saved views. These custom views appear at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineer Data Editor toolbar under Saved Views. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Delete View in the EDE. Select the view that you want to delete from the Name list in the Delete View dialog box. It no longer appears in the filter list in the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Related Topics • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View.

Related Topics Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. This command queries the database and builds a new view with new results. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. The database can change all the time.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Refresh Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Refresh Updates the display in the Engineering Data Editor. page 58 • Update the Engineering Data Editor Click Refresh Note • on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. page 38 58 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 38 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. The Engineering Data Editor is not updated automatically: you must update it by using the Refresh command manually.

you can save it and also delete it later. page 61 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 59 .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview You can change the content and layout of the Engineering Data Editor rather extensively. Once you have defined and edited a view. By specifying the display settings. in exactly the order that you want to see them. you can quickly limit the number of items that are displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. page 54 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Related Topics Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. You can create your own filters to narrowly define the contents of the view. too. for instance. Several methods to customize the look of the Engineering Data Editor exist. You can control the scrolling of the Engineering Data Editor with the Freeze Panes command. You can clarify the cells that are read-only and the cells that allow you to enter new property information or modify existing information. you can define the font that Stockpile items appear in. page 64 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. and you can create unique layouts with exactly the properties that you want to see. By using the AutoFilter feature. if necessary.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview AutoFilter Command Engineering Data Editor > View > AutoFilter Allows you to filter the items displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. When you click AutoFilter. Open this dialog box by clicking View > AutoFilter > Custom in the EDE. begins with. The Boolean or is less restrictive than the and. Or . For instance. but you want to see only vertical drums. Comparison operator . Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. arrows appear at the top of each column. Related Topics AutoFilter Command. does not equal. you need to use the Edit View command and enter options on the Table Properties dialog box and the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. page 60 • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. page 64 • 60 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . To create more elaborate filters and displays. use the AutoFilter command (click the arrow at the top of the Eq Subclass column and choose vertical drums). page 38 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. And . Click the arrow at the top of the column that contains the data that you want to filter on and choose the value from the list that appears. page 61 Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box Sets options for the behavior of the AutoFilter as it controls the display of items in the Engineering Data Editor.Allows you to add another comparison in the Boolean sense of or: this means any one of the criteria must be met.Lists the available comparisons: for example. Select this command again to deactivate it.Lists the available values currently stored in the column. and so forth. equals. Value . if the Engineering Data Editor displays Equipment: Vessels. is greater than.Allows you to add another comparison using the Boolean operator sense of and: this means all criteria must be met.

2. respectively. In the second comparison operator and value boxes. choose Custom from the list. • • • Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. enter the comparison operator and value that you want. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. enter the operator and value that you want. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. choose that criterion from the list that is displayed. Tip Click View > AutoFilter again to turn the AutoFilter feature off. Do one of the following: • • To match one criterion.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor 1. You can choose Blanks or NonBlanks from the list in order to display items that either have no value in the column or do have a value in the column. enter the operator and value that you want. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 61 . and then click the And button. To display rows that meet either one condition or another condition. To display rows that meet two conditions. In the second comparison operator and value boxes. Turn AutoFilter on by clicking View > AutoFilter on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Click the down-arrow at the top of the column you want to filter values for. and then click the Or button on the Custom AutoFilter dialog box. The Custom AutoFilter dialog box opens. Enter the comparison operator and value that you want.

but you want to always see the item tag as you scroll to the right end of the rows to view the supplier. and you can specify the font that items in the Stockpile are listed in. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Freeze Panes Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Freeze Panes Allows you to scroll through the Engineering Data Editor while keeping the display of specified rows and columns constant. For instance. the first column can contain the item tag. For example. page 38 62 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can choose that read-only cells are filled with a special background color. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. you can choose the size of icon that is displayed in the view. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 38 Display Settings Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Display Settings Opens the Display Settings dialog box. You can accomplish this layout by using the Freeze Panes command. which allows you to specify various display options for the Engineering Data Editor.

the remaining options in the Row area then pertain to that location. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. Item . Column .Causes large icons to appear in the view. . . Font . or Other Drawings. page 62 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 63 . depending on Color whether you are specifying this property in the Row area or the Column area.Causes the font to be bold for items selected from the Item list. these settings apply to individual items.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Settings Dialog Box Sets options for the display of icons and rows and columns in the Engineering Data Editor. that is. Large . Read-only properties .Causes the font to be italicized for items selected from the Item list. Stockpile.Allows you to specify large or small icons for the display in the far left column of the view. Icon size in table . Italic Bold . respectively.Allows you to specify either the font or background color. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Display Settings in the EDE. Small . these settings apply to item properties.Sets the font for the items selected from the Item list. Row . page 64 • Display Settings Command.Allows you to choose a background color for read-only table cells.Causes small icons to appear in the view. When you select one of these options. that is.Contains settings that apply to columns in the view. Active Drawing Stockpile. Read/write properties . You can subsequently select another option from the Item list and define fonts and colors for those items and so on until you have specified the appearance for all locations in the Item list.Lists the different locations of items: Active Drawing.Allows you to choose a background color for the table cells that you can edit in the Engineering Data Editor.Contains settings that apply to rows in the view.

4. follow these steps: 1. To do so. page 38 64 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 61 You can use the Freeze Panes feature. Specify a special background color for read-only properties. choose large or small icons. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. For more information. select the column to the right of where you want the split to appear. Notes • You can also customize the Engineering Data Editor by using the AutoFilter feature. see Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. too. too. To freeze the top horizontal pane. click the cell below and to the right of where you want the split to appear. style. if you want. On the Display Settings dialog box. For more information. 2.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor 1. and color that you want these items to be displayed in. and the specify font. select the row below where you want the split to appear. you can totally redefine the content and layout of your Engineering Data Editor. Click View > Display Settings on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Tip You can specify this display information for each of the four types of items in the Item list. 3. To freeze the left vertical pane. • 5. And by clicking View > Edit View on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. see Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. page 54 • • Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. Specify a special background color for read/write properties. Choose an item type in the Item list. Click View > Freeze Panes on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. 2. To freeze both the upper and left panes.

You can browse the catalog tree view for drawing items that you need and create bookmarks for important categories. In the Tree view. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. Catalog Explorer replaces the paper catalog with an electronic equivalent. page 66 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Conceptually. page 66 • Rename a Catalog Node.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview Catalog Explorer is an interface to view and manipulate an electronic catalog containing drawing symbols and their associated properties. page 65 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 65 . Related Topics Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off. The paper catalog contains many items arranged in sections. page 66 Catalog Explorer Command View > Display > Catalog Explorer Turns the display of Catalog Explorer on or off. page 75 • Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off. You can create a navigation bar in the region between the tree and list views for shortcuts to places throughout the catalog. In the List view. You also use the List view to select catalog items before placing them in a drawing or in a stockpile. page 80 • Create a Custom Catalog. you can view the nodes of the catalog file system and open or close the nodes to see the contents. page 72 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. the Catalog Explorer resembles a manufacturer catalog with pictures of parts to build a plant. you can search for items or browse through the catalog and bookmark certain pages and sections. Toolbar buttons carry out commands and allow you to customize the tree and list views to suit your work session. you see the contents of the opened node. These toolbar buttons are located at the top of the tree view. Catalog Explorer consists of two main views: the Tree view and the List view.

and then selecting Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. 3. Click Esc to quit placement mode. to select the appropriate placement for the item. Or. click the symbol that you want to place. If the item that you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. Tip Or. page 91 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. • Notes • The procedure for placing items from the Catalog Explorer list view is similar to that of placing items from a stockpile. Tips • You can also right-click the empty area in the main toolbar and then select Catalog from the shortcut menu. page 186 Place a Two-Point Label. items placed from the Catalog Explorer list view remain in that view. depending on the label. 2. Labels are a special class of item in Catalog Explorer. 4. Select and place the item in the appropriate place in the drawing. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Find the catalog node in the Tree view. In the Catalog Explorer list view. Use Catalog Explorer to view the symbol catalog and its contents and manipulate catalog items. Place a One-Point Label.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off 1. Click View > Display > Catalog Explorer. page 65 Place an Item from Catalog Explorer 1. click View > Toolbars and select Catalog. you can use the Configuration tool. page 188 • • • 66 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . However. whereas. or PickQuick. You can place labels with one-point placement or two-point placement. they disappear from the stockpile. You can enter values for properties of the placed item by clicking the item. you can drag the required item from Catalog Explorer into the Drawing view. when you place items from the stockpile. 2.

• 3. Notes • You can import a spreadsheet in a recognized format into a stockpile to populate it. For more information. depending on the stockpile that you want to place the item in. page 265. too. page 267.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. choose either Send to Stockpile or Send to Drawing Stockpile. page 14 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. page 265 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 67 . Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. 2. page 238 • One-Point Label Placement. see Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. page 184 • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. page 146 • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview. Items remain in the stockpile until you place them in a drawing or delete them from the stockpile. From the shortcut menu. 4. page 65 Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer 1. page 150 • Two-Point Label Placement. Select the appropriate node in the symbol library in order to display catalog symbols in the Catalog Explorer list view. In the Catalog Explorer list view. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. right-click the symbol that you want to add to the stockpile. Tip Or you can double-click a node name in the Catalog Explorer tree view to expand the node. For more information. page 187 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. click "+" by the node containing the appropriate symbol library. • • Related Topics • Navigating in the Software: An Overview. In the Catalog Explorer tree view.

page 70 Find Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Find Displays the Find dialog box. page 75 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. Note • The list of commands that are available on the Catalog menu depends on whether the Tree view or the List view is active. and cancel the selection of the Catalog Explorer option. page 68 • Rename a Catalog Item. page 65 68 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 70 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Tips • Or use the menu command Close when you right-click in the tree view of Catalog Explorer. page 82 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. page 82 • Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Close the Catalog Explorer Window Right-click the main toolbar area. The Find dialog box allows you to search the catalog for a specific item or group of items. page 76 • Rename a Catalog Node. you can search for catalog items. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. Related Topics • Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. page 65 Catalog Menu: An Overview Catalog Explorer > Catalog The Catalog menu in Catalog Explorer provides access to commands that allow you to manipulate list view items and tree view nodes in the Catalog Explorer. Also. Or toggle the display of Catalog Explorer back off by clicking the icon on the main toolbar: • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.

as a wildcard character for a single character. Related Topics • Explore Elsewhere Dialog Box.Enter the location from which you want to view symbol information. or type a question mark. Related Topics Find Command. "?". "%".Opens the Explore Elsewhere dialog box. allowing you to search any network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol library.Specifies the drive or folder that contains the symbol library that you want to search. Look In . as a wildcard character to find multiple characters.Specifies the class of item for which you want to search. page 69 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. Look in .Specifies the name of the item for which you want to search.Clears all search criteria in preparation for a new search. "?". You can type a percent sign. page 70 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 69 . allowing you to search any network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol library to display in the Look In box. Class . Named . Stop . Results List .Ends the current search. Browse . Find Now . page 70 Explore Elsewhere Dialog Box Opens when you click Browse on the Catalog Explorer Find dialog box.Lists the items that met the defined search criteria. You can drag catalog items from this area into a My Catalog set of items in the Catalog Explorer tree view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Catalog Explorer Find Dialog Box Allows you to search the active catalog for a specific item based on user-defined search criteria. New Search . You can type an asterisk. or select a drive from this list and use the tree that is displayed below to find the location you want. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. or type a question mark. as a wildcard character for a single character. page 68 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer.Starts a search of the symbol library defined in the Look In: box. Open this dialog box by clicking File > Find in the Catalog Explorer. "*".

page 68 New Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > New Creates a new item or adds a node under the selected node in the Catalog Explorer. as a wildcard in either the Named or Class options to broaden the scope of your search. However. You can select one or more items by using the Ctrl or Shift keys. you can save the set of current search results to use later by dragging them into a My Catalog folder or subfolder in the Catalog Explorer Tree view. page 74 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. • . fill in the Name & Class options. page 69 • Catalog Menu: An Overview. page 65 • 70 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the Find dialog box. 3. *. Clicking the File menu button itself repeats the last command that you used from the File menu. click Find. Note • Clicking the down-arrow of the File menu button accesses a list of the associated commands. Click Find Now to start the search with the defined criteria.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer 1. Related Topics • Catalog Explorer Find Dialog Box. Tip You can use the asterisk. page 82 • Delete a Catalog Item. page 75 • Delete a Catalog Node. but you cannot place an item directly onto a design from this results window. 2. On the Catalog Explorer Catalog menu Tip The Tree view must be the active view in Catalog Explorer for the Find command to be available on the File menu. Related Topics Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. • Note • Items found by the search appear at the bottom of the Find dialog box.

right-click the tree view and click Refresh Symbol Toolbar. 5. you can create a Vessels node under Toolbars. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. In the Catalog Explorer tree view. Related Topics • Activate Symbol Toolbars. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 71 . and under Vessels you can create Vertical and Horizontal. Symbol toolbars can be plant-level or user-level. 4. You create plant-level toolbars in Catalog Manager. Click New on the shortcut menu. Plant-level symbol toolbars are created in Catalog Explorer. for example. find symbols you want to place on your new symbol toolbar. Notes • • You can dock the symbols toolbars on any side of the main window. whereas. A divider appears in the symbol toolbar between levels. 2. 3.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Designing Symbol Toolbars Symbols toolbars allow you to create toolbars that contain the symbols you use most frequently. keeping them conveniently located for easy access. You must have the proper permissions. Right-click the Toolbars node under My Catalog. In the Catalog Explorer list view. your symbol toolbars can streamline your work considerably. you create user-level toolbars in either Catalog Manager or SmartPlant P&ID. When you add all the new symbols you want to the new toolbar. or piping symbols. open the My Catalog node. Name the new toolbar. Drag symbols from the list view and drop them into the new toolbar in the tree view. page 76 • Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. instrumentation. Tip • The new toolbar appears on the left side of the window. For example. 6. to create symbol toolbars. page 71 Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar 1. page 71 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. • • Related Topics • Designing Symbol Toolbars. 7. You can define up to two levels of toolbars. The symbol toolbars can be docked on any side of the main window. With the most often used equipment.

You can drag selected items to a custom catalog from the Find dialog box. If the symbols reside on your computer. New Category is selected so that you can rename it. Type a name for the category. Right-click the tree view. click New. 7. • Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. Select the items that you want to add to the custom catalog from the list view. other users cannot view the symbols when they open that drawing on another workstation. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. From the shortcut menu. 3. which opens when you click Find on the Catalog Explorer File menu. Type a new name for the node. Caution • Do not move symbols to the My Catalog folder on your computer using Windows Explorer. • 5. Tip The software adds a subcategory called New Category to the My Catalog node. Use the My Catalog folder only for shortcuts to symbols in the plant catalog. 4. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Navigate through the tree view to display in the list view a group of items that you want to add to the custom catalog. page 68 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. select it in the tree view and right-click. page 65 Open Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Open Opens the Catalog Explorer window. 6. Click the My Catalog node in the Catalog Explorer tree view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Create a Custom Catalog 1. click Rename. Drag the selected items from the list view to the appropriate category or subcategory of the My Catalog portion of the tree view. Notes • To rename a node. On the shortcut menu.

On Catalog Explorer File menu. When you clone an existing symbol. you must define all of the graphics and properties for the new symbol. Related Topics • Clone Command. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. click Clone. the software copies all of the graphics and associated properties for the original symbol to the new. Click the item you want to copy in the Catalog Explorer List view. Note • Cloning symbols differs from creating new symbols. The software places a copy of the selected item in the List view. page 73 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 73 . When you create a new symbol. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. You can then modify the properties of the cloned symbol. 2. page 73 Clone a Catalog Item 1. you may or may not be able to clone items from certain catalogs. cloned symbol. Related Topics • Clone a Catalog Item.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Clone Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Clone Creates a copy of the selected catalog item.

• Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. You must first delete all sub-nodes and catalog items that populate a node before you can delete the node itself. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. Click OK on the confirmation box to delete the selected node. 2. See your system administrator for information regarding your current privileges. Important • Depending on your editing permissions. page 75 • Delete a Catalog Node. Click the custom catalog node that you want to delete in the Catalog Explorer Tree view. click Delete. page 65 74 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 74 Delete a Catalog Node 1. 3. you are able to delete nodes in certain catalogs. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. On the File menu .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Delete Removes the selected item from the Catalog Explorer list view or catalog node from the tree view. you are able to delete items from certain catalogs. Note • You must first delete all sub-nodes and catalog items that reside under a node before you can delete the node itself. Related Topics • Delete a Catalog Item. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

2. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. you can delete items from certain catalog. On the File menu . Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 65 Rename a Catalog Node 1. 3. Important • Depending on your editing permissions. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. page 65 Rename Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Rename Allows you to type a new name for the item or node. In the Catalog Explorer List view. 3. click the custom catalog item that you want to delete. click Delete. On the File menu . 2.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete a Catalog Item 1. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 75 . Click the custom catalog node that you want to rename in the Catalog Explorer tree view. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Click OK on the confirmation box to delete the selected item. you can rename nodes in certain catalogs. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. See your system administrator for information regarding your current privileges. Type the new name for the custom catalog node. click Rename.

click Refresh Symbol Toolbar. On the File menu . page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Related Topics • Activate Symbol Toolbars. Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. Related Topics Designing Symbol Toolbars. Right-click in the Catalog Explorer tree view. page 71 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 68 76 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. page 71 • Designing Symbol Toolbars. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. click the custom catalog item that you want to rename. page 65 Refresh Symbol Toolbar Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Refresh Symbol Toolbar Activates plant. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Rename a Catalog Item 1. page 65 • Close Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Close Closes the Catalog Explorer window. 2. you can rename items in Catalog Explorer. 3. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. 2. On the shortcut menu. page 71 Activate Symbol Toolbars 1. Enter the new name for the catalog item. page 76 • Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. In the Catalog Explorer list view.or user-level symbol toolbars or updates the symbol toolbars to incorporate any modifications to a toolbar. click Rename.

Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 213 Send to Drawing Stockpile Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Send to Drawing Stockpile Sends the catalog item selected in the list view to the Active Drawing Stockpile.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Send to Stockpile Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Send to Stockpile Sends the catalog item selected in the list view to the Stockpile. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. page 178 • Place a Package. page 178 • Place a Package. page 78 Large Icons Command Catalog Explorer > View > Large Icons Displays larger icons and names horizontally in the list view and does not list details. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. page 78 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 77 . This command is particularly useful for instrument loops and packages and other items that reside in a stockpile but generally are not depicted graphically in a drawing. This command is particularly useful for instrument loops and packages and other items that reside in a stockpile but generally are not depicted graphically in a drawing. page 213 View Menu Catalog Explorer > View The Catalog Explorer View menu provides commands that allow you to control the display format of catalog items within the Catalog Explorer list view.

page 77 78 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Small Icons . List .Displays the icon. Options include • . Details . • • • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 65 • View Menu.Displays the icon for an item in the list view in a smaller format.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Small Icons Command Catalog Explorer > View > Small Icons Displays smaller icons with names horizontally in the list view and does not list file locations. page 78 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 65 Customize the Catalog Explorer List View 1.Displays the icon for an item in the list view in a larger format. Large Icons . Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. Choose the display of items in your list view. page 78 Details Command Catalog Explorer > View > Details Displays smaller icons with names and source information vertically in a single column in the list view. name. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View.Displays the icon and name for an item in the list view in a simple list. In Catalog Explorer click the down-arrow on the View menu 2. and file location for an item. page 78 List Command Catalog Explorer > View > List Displays smaller icons with names vertically using multiple columns in the list view and does not list details.

page 81 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 79 . you open the node for the piping and all the piping types appear in the list view. All of the commands for managing your shortcut buttons are found on the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu. Then when you open Catalog Explorer and click this shortcut button. if your workflow requires you to route a lot of piping. If you want to make a shortcut to a particular symbol that you use a lot. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 80 • Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer. you can use the symbol toolbar. but you are limited by the size of the Catalog Explorer window. Also. page 82 • Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. These buttons reside on the navigation bar between the tree and list view in the Catalog Explorer window. you want to make a shortcut button to the Process Lines node. shortcut buttons are shortcuts to catalog nodes only.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer) Catalog Explorer > Navigation The Navigation menu in Catalog Explorer provides commands that allow you to control the display and assignment of shortcut buttons within the Catalog Explorer. Shortcut buttons provide shortcuts that bookmark a node in the active Tree view of Catalog Explorer. The software does not limit the number of shortcut buttons that you can create. Consequently you save the time and effort of browsing the catalog node structure in the tree view in order to find the node that you want to open in the list view. For example.

page 91 • Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer. Verify that shortcut buttons are set to appear on the navigation bar between the tree and list views of Catalog Explorer by clicking the down-arrow on the Navigation menu and making sure that Show Buttons is selected. For example. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. You must also select the Show Buttons option in the menu in order for your shortcut button to appear between the tree view and list view windows of Catalog Explorer. 2. 3. and show buttons. you can add a shortcut button to the nozzles node of the Catalog Explorer tree view by selecting Nozzles in the tree view and then choosing Add Button from the menu that appears when you click the downarrow of the Navigation menu. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. remove. On the Navigation menu.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Add Button Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Add Button Adds a shortcut button to Catalog Explorer for the active tree view node. page 81 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 65 Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar 1. page 82 • Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. Clicking on the Navigation menu button itself repeats the last command that you used from the menu. page 91 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 65 80 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In the tree view. Note • You can right-click any shortcut button to display options to add. click Add Button to create a shortcut button for the currently selected node. Note • Clicking the down-arrow of the Navigation menu button above accesses a list of the associated commands. page 80 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. if you frequently select nozzles. select the node that you want a shortcut to.

click Remove Button to delete the active shortcut button from the navigation bar. page 65 Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar On the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu . Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 65 Show Buttons Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Show Buttons Causes shortcut buttons to appear on the navigation bar between the tree view and the list view of Catalog Explorer. page 80 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Tip • Or you can right-click any shortcut button and select Remove Button from its shortcut menu.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Remove Button Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Remove Button Removes the active shortcut button from the list of shortcut buttons in Catalog Explorer. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 81 . Related Topics • Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer). page 79 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 80 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.

3. click an available command. page 79 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. For example. A check mark next to the menu item indicates that shortcut buttons appear in Catalog Explorer. the icon located next to the menu button. The commands on these menus allow you to customize the Catalog Explorer. page 80 • Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer). page 80. page 82 Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button 1. Click the toolbar button itself. click Show Buttons. page 65 82 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and that most recent command from the menu is carried out. see Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. After customization you can control the content and display of components in the Catalog Explorer window. Click the down-arrow portion of a Catalog Explorer toolbar button to open the associated menu. Related Topics • Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. for example. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. The software assigns the selected command to the Catalog Explorer toolbar button. page 65 Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview The Catalog Explorer toolbar buttons access the Catalog Explorer File. Related Topics • Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview. On the menu. page 82 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Note • You must first define a shortcut button in order to display it. the Find command on the File menu. you can control the display of icons in the list view and define shortcut buttons that allow you easy access to user-defined groups of catalog items. 2. For more information. For example. click on the File menu button (not the down-arrow) and the Find command is carried out again.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer On the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu Tip • . and Navigation menus. The buttons appear on the navigation bar between the tree and list views. View.

all the properties of that type of component appear. then the Selected Items list contains the choice Select Set as well as individual items in the set. or all components are of the same type. page 86 • Display Null Values in the Properties Window. for instance. This action can be particularly useful when correcting inconsistencies. When you pause your pointer over the buttons on the Properties window toolbar. You can use the Copy Bulk Properties and Paste Bulk Properties buttons to copy properties from one item to another. or assemblies. You can display and edit relationships that involve components. then only the common properties appear. page 89 • Show Brief Properties. page 89 • Paste Bulk Properties. or Edit > Cut to modify property values in this grid. The active items always determine the content of the Properties window. At the top of the Properties window is the Selected Items list. which itemizes all of the selected objects individually and as a select set. Do not use the Edit > Copy. You can only have one Properties window open. If more than one item is selected in the Design window. a ToolTip appears. If you copy or paste values in the grid area. page 90 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 83 .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Working With the Properties Window: An Overview The Properties window display is a two-column table that provides the common properties of the current selection in the active Design window. Notes • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. page 88 • Customize the Properties Window. as well as by selecting an item in the Design window. giving the name of the button. You can display item properties by locating the appropriate item in the Selected Items list. You can modify the values for properties in the Properties window. component types. Edit > Paste. • • • Related Topics Copy Bulk Properties. or when you must apply changes to more than one item. If your select set contains components of different types. use Ctrl+C and Crtl+V. An item and the properties that belong to it are associated when the item is created in Catalog Manager. If the selected items have different values for their common properties. but you can change those properties specified as bulk in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. If only one component is selected. the value box is blank.

Displays those properties that have been previously specified as brief on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Display Null . and so forth. Related Topics • Review and Edit Item Properties. see Copy Bulk Properties.Displays properties grouped by specific categories. page 87 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview.Displays a null value in blank properties that currently contain no value. You must have previously selected an item or items and copied bulk properties. page 144 Properties Window Toolbar You can customize the display of the Properties window by using the following Properties window toolbar buttons: Alphabetic . according to relevance. To see the case data that appears for corresponding items. too. For more information. For more information. Paste Bulk Properties . which are displayed for equipment. Copy Bulk Properties . You can review and edit the properties.Lists properties in alphabetical order. pipe runs or instruments. temperatures. look in Data Dictionary Manager.Displays a list of case conditions. 84 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Note • You can display the Properties window by clicking View > Display > Properties Window. Categorized .Pastes copied bulk properties onto the newly selected item or items. Show Case Data . Show Brief Properties . for example.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Properties Window Command View > Display > Properties Opens the Properties window and displays characteristics for a selected item or a select set. This option helps avoid confusion between empty cells and cells containing a zero. Case data includes both process cases and control cases. see Paste Bulk Properties. The applicable properties of an item are defined when it is created in Catalog Manager. Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. pressures. The properties are then available to paste onto other items.Copies the bulk properties of a selected item.

and select Properties. page 90 Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off 1. page 83 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 85 . Use the Properties window to view and edit item properties. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 89 • Paste Bulk Properties. Related Topics • Copy Bulk Properties. Or right-click an item. Tip • Another method for displaying the Properties window is to right-click the empty area in the main toolbar and then select Properties from the shortcut menu. 2. The item characteristics appear in the Properties window. page 88 • Customize the Properties Window. but you can change those properties in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. page 86 • Display Null Values in the Properties Window. • Related Topics Properties Window Toolbar. Click View > Display > Properties Window.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • The software includes a default set of bulk and brief properties. page 89 • Show Brief Properties.

Display case data by clicking Show Case Data . use the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window choose a single item or the select set of all listed items. only that either no value has been assigned or that the different items have different values for the property. only properties that all items have in common appear. • 4. If more than one item is selected in the Drawing view or in the Engineering Data Editor. • Tips • The properties that are subsequently displayed in the window belong to the chosen item or the select set. click to display properties by categories. Consequently. you can choose single items from that set by using the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window. Display properties alphabetically or by categories by clicking the corresponding display mode button on the Properties window toolbar. 3. When you point to a button on the Properties window toolbar and pause over it. Click to display properties alphabetically. 6. Tip For more information on opening the Properties window. see Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off. A single item chosen in a select set this way is highlighted in a different color in the Drawing view. a ToolTip displays the name of the corresponding command. Whenever you have constructed a select set. Related Topics • Properties Window Toolbar. Open the Properties window. 2. empty property values for a select set do not necessarily mean that no value has been assigned for any of the items in the set. For the select set. page 83 86 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and only common values are displayed for those properties. Display a null character in empty property cells by clicking Display Null Note • . page 85. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. . Display only brief properties by clicking Show Brief Properties 5.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize the Properties Window 1.

page 271 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 87 . Select the item or items whose properties you want to review. For formatted properties. 2. Or you can right-click an item. you can enter free text into a formatted property and no units of measurement are assigned. '. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Use a single quote. Enter or edit information in the cell next to the appropriate property. 3. • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Tips • You can also display the Properties window by right-clicking the empty area of the main toolbar and then selecting Properties from the shortcut menu. Click Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. too. • • Or you can click View > Toolbars and select Properties. page 144 • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. In this way. and select Properties from the shortcut menu. or you can select an item by clicking the icon in the left-most column and then edit its properties in the Properties window. Or you can click View > Display > Properties Window on the main menu bar. such as estimated length or maximum operating temperature. • Tips • You can review and edit item properties in the Engineering Data Editor. you can enter a value without a format. at the beginning of your entry. You can edit the contents of some cells directly in the table if the corresponding property is not read-only or generated strictly by validation.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Review and Edit Item Properties 1.

Then modify the plant group name in the Plant Group Name property box. • Related Topics Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Not all item types support the plant group property. In the Properties window. page 91 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. 3. 2. your item can already be associated with the plant group type of unit. For instance. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. see Paste Bulk Properties. For more information. page 83 88 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • Tip It is possible that you do not want to modify the plant group type. but you want simply to associate it with a different unit. Go to the last step if this is the case. Select the item that you want to associate with a different plant group. In the Design window or Engineering Data Editor. 2.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Associate an Item with a Plant Group 1. Click Copy Bulk Properties Tip • . but you can change those properties specified as bulk in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. page 89. select the item whose bulk properties you want to copy. Note • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. page 215 • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. Tips • The default plant group is the node in the plant hierarchy immediately under which the drawing resides. select the plant group type in the Plant Group Type property box. You can now paste these properties onto another item. page 258 • Copy Bulk Properties 1.

For more information. 3. page 84 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Note • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. page 86 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. and is not the same as a zero value. page 15 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. Select the item or items that you want to paste bulk properties onto. page 88. but you can change bulk properties in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Properties Window Toolbar. Null means that the property is not defined. On the Properties window toolbar. You must first have copied the bulk properties of a different item in order to paste them onto your current selection. 2. Right-click and select Properties. Select an item in your drawing. see Copy Bulk Properties. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 89 . Click the null button Note • to display a null value in blank properties. page 144 Paste Bulk Properties 1. or is empty. 2. Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Null Values in the Properties Window 1. click Paste Bulk Properties Tip • .

click the Show Case Data button Tip • . page 86 • Properties Window Toolbar. page 83 Show Case Data • On the Properties window toolbar. page 83 90 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The software includes a default set of brief properties. or instruments. Notes • If the Properties window is not displayed. page 90 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window. • Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window. Case data includes both process cases and control cases. but you can change that set on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. To see the case data that appears for corresponding items. look in Data Dictionary Manager.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show Brief Properties On the Properties window toolbar. which are displayed for equipment. case data remains displayed for the current design session. Once you display case data in the Properties window. click the Show Brief Properties button Note • . page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. pipe runs. page 86 • Show Brief Properties. you can select an item and click Edit > Properties. according to relevance.

you click Tools > Customize. Or. you can click the Menu or Toolbars tab and click the options that you want. You can view the type library with the type library browser of Visual Basic or the browser for an OLE-aware programming application. Some macros also are delivered with the software. You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. From there. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 91 .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing the Software: An Overview Customization allows you to modify and enhance the software to meet your specific needs. Visual C++ Delphi. The Previous View button is listed on the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box. Visual Basic. Several ways to customize the software are available: Customizing with Built-In Commands You can add commands to a menu or a menu command to a toolbar. The Tools > Customize command allows you to add macros to the standard menus and toolbars in the software. see a list by using the Tools > Custom Commands command. you can start by clicking View > Toolbars. methods. To add a button to a toolbar or a command to a menu. If you want to create a new toolbar that does not exist in the software. Click Help > Programming with SmartPlant P&ID to access the SmartPlant P&ID Programming User's Guide. properties. and methods available with the product. You then click New and type the name of the new toolbar on the New Toolbar dialog box. The software includes a type library. you can run the macros directly by clicking Tools > Custom Commands and selecting the macro. the Customize dialog box automatically appears so that you can add buttons to the new toolbar. You can use standard Windows programming tools and languages that are OLE-aware. and so forth. which provides a complete reference to the objects. and properties. if you frequently use the View > Previous command. Customizing with Macros Not only can you add built-in commands or buttons to the software. which contains all the objects. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications. For example. but you can also create your own macros and add them to menus and toolbars in the same manner. such as Microsoft® Visual Basic®. After you click OK. you could add the Previous View button to the main toolbar.

page 80 Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 71 Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. or you can create new toolbars and menus. creating filter tabs. Some customization options include displaying small or large icons. page 91 92 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing Interface Elements You can customize many of the various ways of interfacing with the software. For more information about some of these options. creating shortcut buttons to access your most commonly used items. page 95 • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. which allows you to customize toolbars or menus to fit your workflow. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. page 27 • Run a Macro. page 138 Customize the Properties Window. You can add commands to toolbars or menus. and so forth. page 27 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu. Related Topics • Create a New Menu. page 78 Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. see these examples Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. page 80 • Create a New Menu. page 86 Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. page 101 Customize Command Tools > Customize Opens the Customize dialog box.

If you add a menu to an existing menu. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar.Places a menu at the level currently open on the menu tree. When you add a menu with this option.Allows you to specify the command that you want to add to the menu.Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box. Descriptions do not appear for macros.Allows you to specify the category that you want to select a command or macro from.Displays a description of the command that you selected before you add it to a menu. Add Menu . Macros . you can select a macro from the Macros list. Commands . This dialog box opens when you click Tools > Customize on the main menu bar. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. the Macros list displays the macros for the folder that you selected. When you select the title of a group of commands in this box. page 95 • Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Adds or removes commands from menus or the main menu bar. Categories . The Browse button appears only when you choose Macros in the Categories list. If you select a macro.Lists the menus and their associated commands or macros. page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. double-click a menu name or click the "+" next to the SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 93 . Related Topics Add a Button to a Toolbar. When you select a folder and click OK. After you click this button. you create a cascading menu. you can type the name that you want in the tree view and then enter it by clicking any other location on the dialog box. page 95 • Create a New Menu. page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu. you can click Browse to change the folder for macros. Or you can add a single command to the main menu bar. Add Command . Description . you can add commands to the new menu later. Menu Tree . You can add a command to an existing menu or build a custom menu with the commands that you want. you can click the title of a command in the Commands list. This button is available only when you select a command or macro in the Commands box or Macros box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize Dialog Box Changes the display of toolbar buttons and menus according to your needs. To see all the commands on a menu. Then you can add the command or macro to the menu or main menu bar. When you select Macros in the Categories list. Browse .Allows you to specify the macro that you want to add to the menu.Places a command on a menu.

Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview menu name. page 27 • Remove a Command From a Menu. Reset All . page 28 • Toolbars Dialog Box. Remove .Removes the command or menu that you selected in the menu tree.Describes the button selected in the Buttons area. page 95 • Create a New Toolbar. Choose one and the corresponding buttons appear in the Buttons area. Place Into Selected Menu . the changes show up on the menu tree.Overrides the default placement and places a command or macro on the menu that is currently selected in the menu tree. Add Menu. Also. or menus are added at the level that is currently open in the menu tree. page 95 • Create a New Menu. Description . page 26 94 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 96 • Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Adds or removes commands from toolbars. Categories . page 96 • Create a New Toolbar.Lists the categories of the toolbars that you can customize.Lists the buttons available in the active category. If you do not set this option.Restores all menus and the main menu bar to the original settings. or Remove. page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu. Buttons . Related Topics Add a Command to a Menu. commands. When you click Add Command. page 95 • Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings. You can drag a button from this area onto a toolbar. then the macros. you edit menu and command names in this view.

On the Menu tab. Click the name of an existing menu or command that you want to remove from the main menu bar or the existing menu. Click Tools > Customize. 3. In the Categories list on the Menu tab. This dialog box opens when you drag a macro from the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box to the toolbar. double-click the name of the existing menu that you want to add a command to. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 95 . 3. Buttons .Specifies the icon for your button and closes the dialog box.Opens the Select Bitmap File dialog box. select the command category that you want. Click Remove. which allows you to look for an icon on your local computer or on the network.Displays the available icons. 2. Tip If you choose Macros from the Categories list. page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. In the Commands or Macros box. • 4. 4. In the menu tree. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu 1. page 91 Add a Command to a Menu 1. • Related Topics Customizing the Software: An Overview. click the name of the command that you want to add. then the Macros box is displayed. page 28 • Create a New Toolbar. Click Tools > Customize. Assign . double-click a menu in the menu tree. Related Topics Add a Button to a Toolbar. the view contains the Commands box. Browse . Tip The menu tree expands to show the commands on the existing menu.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Custom Button Dialog Box Allows you to assign an toolbar button icon to a macro. otherwise. 2.

• 6. 2. 4. Click Tools > Customize. click the Reset All button. Notes • If you remove Customize from the Tools menu. Click Add Command. Tip If you want to add the new command to the main menu bar. page 91 Create a New Menu 1. 3. you can restore the command. On the menu tree. The software places the new command on the main menu bar after the existing menu that you select in the menu tree. clear the Place Into Selected Menu option. page 91 Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings 1. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. 5. Click Tools > Customize. Right-click the empty area of the main toolbar and click Customize on the shortcut menu in order to open the Customize dialog box. On the Menu tab. Select the Place Into Selected Menu option. • Related Topics Customizing the Software: An Overview. Click the name of the command that you want the new command to appear after. Click the Add Menu button. click the name of an existing menu. In the Categories box on the Menu tab. 7. Tips • The new menu is added after the existing menu that you selected in step 3.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Tip The menu tree nodes expand to show the commands on the existing menus. 2. click the command category that you want. 96 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

page 96 Custom Commands Command Tools > Custom Commands Opens the Custom Commands dialog box. On the menu tree. see Add a Command to a Menu. select the Place Into Selected Menu option before you click the Add Menu button. page 13 • Run a Macro. Related Topics • Customize Dialog Box. click anywhere away from the name. type the name of the menu. To enter the new menu. Note • After you create a new menu. page 93 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. thereby creating a cascading menu. Some macros are delivered with the software. • 6. page 91 • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. page 95. page 91 • Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings. page 101 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 97 . For more information. you can add commands to it. generally in the C:\Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program directory. 5. You can choose a macro and run it. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview If you want to add a menu to an existing menu. You can also record your own macros and store them wherever you want to.

Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items.Fixes the reference to the mated OPC that you have selected in the OPC list. Model Items . Gaps . For more information.Cleans orphaned records from the plant database. You can choose OPCs to repair or delete from the plant database. Fix .Opens the Repair OPCs dialog box.Corrects gaps with the wrong representation in the database.Deletes the non-repairable OPC pair that you have chosen in the OPC list. OPCs . Delete .Allows you to choose to list either the repairable or the non-repairable OPC pairs that have lost links to their partner OPCs either one-way or both ways. You use this utility to delete obsolete model items from the database. This dialog box is part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility. which allows you to fix or delete OPC pairs with incomplete reference information. Clean DB . This dialog box is part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility. page 100 98 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . see Related Topics.dll. page 100 Repair OPCs Dialog Box Opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands to run DelOrpModItems.dll and click OPCs. which allows you to delete obsolete model items.Opens the Delete Orphan Model Items dialog box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Clean Data Dialog Box This utility opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands and run the DelOrpModItems. OPC Types . Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items.

and you are given the option to delete them. The utility works on an item type basis and repairs the following model item types: Vessel. Piping Component. This need occurs only in rare instances. You can choose the orphan model items that you want to delete from the plant database. Instrument. then the OPCs are considered non-repairable. Find and delete any model item in the database that does not have a corresponding entry in the T_Representation table. However. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 99 . If one OPC has lost the identity of its mated OPC. You need to perform this operation if you have gapping problems in your drawings. Update gaps in the representation record with the proper item type. Pipe Run. if both the OPC and its mated OPC have lost the identities of each other. Mechanical.Allows you to choose the type of orphaned model items that you want to display in the Item list. you can select any or all of the items and choose to delete them. Equipment Component. then the OPC is considered repairable. Equipment: Other. Once the orphan model items for an item type are found. but the mated OPC still has the identity of the first OPC. Part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility. and OPC.dll and then click Model Items. Exchanger. • • Item Type Names . Signal Run. Area Break.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete Orphan Model Items Dialog Box Opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands and run DelOrpModItems. • • Clean orphaned records from the plant database.Removes the orphan items selected in the Item list from the plant database. Delete . Find and repair off-page connectors (OPCs) that have lost their associations with the OPC that they were originally paired with. this dialog box can be used to accomplish the following tasks. Nozzle. the utility updates the identity information for the first OPC. To repair the OPC.

On the Delete Orphan Model Items dialog box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete All . T_Representation and T_ModelItem. It is very important that you perform the steps in the sequence that they are presented. choose the model item type from the Item Type Names list. 3. Non-repairable OPC pairs retain neither link. In the list view. 6. • 8. choose either repairable or non-repairable from the OPC Type list. Click OPCs. click Clean DB. Tip You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program. and click Fix if it is a repairable pair or Delete if it is non-repairable. 5. select the model orphan items to delete and click Delete. Choose the OPC pair that you are interested in from the OPC list. For information on setting table permissions. Tip Repairable OPC pairs retain one link out of two between the mates. page 100 Delete Orphan Model Items Important • Verify that the plant user has full permissions to the tables. • 10. On the Clean Data dialog box. • 4. Open a drawing. • 2. refer to your database documentation.Selects and deletes all the orphan model items of the type specified in the Item Type Names list. Click Model Items. The buttons on the utility are arranged appropriately. On the Repair OPCs dialog box. Browse the drawing software program directory and open DelOrpModItems. and click Tools > Custom Commands to open the Custom Commands dialog box. Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items. 100 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 1. Click Gaps to find and repair gaps that do not have the correct representation in the database.dll. 7. 9. Tip You can also click Delete All to select and delete all the items in the list view.

3. Log messages generated when orphaned records are deleted from the plant database are written to the DBCleanup. 2. On the Custom Commands dialog box. Note • You can create macros with any programming tool that supports OLE automation. • • Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. select the macro that you want to run. Click Run. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. such as Visual Basic.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Tip Follow the prompts on message boxes if you see any. Click Close to return to the design software. Log messages are placed in SPDelOrpModItems. Click Tools > Custom Commands. page 127 Run a Macro 1. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 101 .log file in the directory assigned to the Temp environment variable.txt file in the directory assigned to the Temp environment variable. 11. • Notes • The Delete Orphan Model Item Utility must be run from within the drawing environment. The log file contains information about deleted items including the item type and sp_id.

You can save drawings in different formats. the drawing is displayed in a Drawing view in the Design window. 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . .cgm for CGM Metafile.dxf for AutoCAD®. A component is any piece of equipment. Using Templates as a Starting Point You use a template as a starting point for creating the drawing. including . and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch.pid for SmartPlant.dgn for MicroStation®. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template. dimensions. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. You can use the commands on toolbars and in menus to add information to your drawing. Any changes that you make to the drawing data are automatically saved in the database. instrumentation. use Intergraph SmartSketch. A plant model consists of components. formats. If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. as well as the additional custom properties that you need to manage your drawings. Symbols represent components in Catalog Explorer and Engineering Data Editor. You cannot save a drawing as a template. When you create and open a drawing. A template is a file that provides tools such as text. You can then embed your border file in the new templates you create in SmartPlant P&ID. If you link a border file. units of measurement. instead of embedding it. piping.Working with Drawings: An Overview Working with Drawings: An Overview An administrator uses Drawing Manager to create a new drawing on a pre-formatted template. or other item used to create a plant model. geometry. and styles used to produce a new drawing. Your plant administrator can edit the property set of the template to include default values for some of the properties. In the Properties window. You select symbols from Catalog Explorer and then select the appropriate placement location in the drawing. Several standard templates are delivered with SmartPlant P&ID. and you can use edit commands to modify the information in your drawing. The only way to use a template is to have a plant administrator select a template at drawing creation in Drawing Manager. you enter appropriate values into the database for each property of the component. and you can create new templates in SmartPlant P&ID. and .dwg and . . The template that your plant administrator selects depends on the type of information that is wanted in the drawing. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. Drawings are graphical representations of plant models using standard symbols and conventions.

page 87 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. The drawing information is stored in a database associated with the drawings in a plant. page 108 • Review and Edit Item Properties. You can use the Cut. With the Properties command on the File menu. and you can change the name of a drawing in Drawing Manager. page 125 • Set Document Properties. Copy. and keywords that identify important information. you can view. page 116 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 111 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 103 . However. These drawings appear at the bottom of the File menu. and Paste commands to move or copy information between the drawings or within one open drawing. edit. You can change the size of a drawing by using the Page Setup command on the File menu. The Options command on the Tools menu allows you to set the number of entries displayed in that list. You can use commands on the Window menu to arrange all the open drawings and views so that you can see them easily. Related Topics • Embed a New Object. Note • Renaming a drawing file in Windows allows the drawing to be opened with all graphics pointing to the database.Working with Drawings: An Overview Opening Existing Drawings The Open command on the File menu opens existing drawings. You can also change databases by using this command so that you can open drawings in other plants. Working with Several Open Drawings Several drawings can remain open in the same session but only if they all belong to the same plant. Drawing properties can include the title. you can select it from that list. To open one of these drawings. These properties include drawing statistics. the software updates statistics automatically. The software keeps track of the drawings that you worked on last. and save properties for a drawing. Each drawing can have more than one view. Setting Up Properties for a Drawing An administrator sets up drawing properties such as units of measure in Options Manager and Format Manager. such as drawing size and the date that a drawing was created and last modified. the author. page 277 • Open an Existing Drawing. too. renaming a drawing file in Windows does not update the drawing table in the plant schema where the drawing name is stored.

Cancel Filter . Using the detailed view allows you to view and sort drawings by several attributes. Pause over a toolbar button in order to display a ToolTip. You cannot open two drawings from different databases at the same time. see Filter . The list view only displays one property for each drawing.Opens the Filter dialog box.Opens the Open Plant Structure dialog box. Related Topics Customize the Open Dialog Box. Open Database . and allows you to open a drawing and to choose the database that you access. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing.Displays in the right-hand view of the Open dialog box all the drawings and node names that reside in the currently selected node. page 102 • Open Dialog Box Displays the active plant hierarchy and lists its drawings. which allows you to specify the drawings that are displayed in the list or detailed view. page 111 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.Displays a detailed view in the right-hand window.Displays the list view in the right-hand window. List . which names the corresponding command. This dialog box appears when you click File > Open on the main menu bar. You can specify that descriptor by clicking Customize View. page 108 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. which allows you to specify a different SmartPlant initialization file so that you can work in a different database. For more information on the toolbar commands.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open Command File > Open Opens the Open dialog box. Details . which lists existing plants and their drawings. The detailed view displays all the properties specified in the Selected Properties list of the Customize Current View dialog box. An administrator creates the hierarchy of plants and projects in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Include Subnodes . 104 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the first item in the Selected Properties list is the descriptor that appears in the list view.Deactivates any ad hoc filter you have applied to the list of drawings that appears in the list view of the Open dialog box.

The Open command also checks to make sure you have the correct access privileges for the selected plant structure and passes your access information back to the software. page 109 • Open an Existing Drawing. allowing you to select a SmartPlant initialization file from local and network directories. page 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 105 . Application Type . page 108 • Open Command.Lists those plant structures found on the network. Related Topics • Open a Drawing in a Different Database. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing. Open .Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize View . Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box. You can select only one item from this list view at a time. page 111 Open Plant Structure Dialog Box Sets options for connecting to a site and plant structure and passes user access information to the application. Site Server . This dialog box opens when you click Open Database on the Open dialog box. page 72 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 108 • Open Command.Opens the Customize Current View dialog box. which allows you to specify the information about each drawing that is displayed in the report or list view of the Open dialog box. Available plant structure .Allows you to specify the application that you want to associate with this plant structure. Plant structures that correspond to the initialization file that you choose are subsequently displayed in the list of available plant structures.Opens the Open Site Server dialog box.Connects you to the selected database.

you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. and so forth. Value . greater than.Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. Delete .Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. %. Match all .Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. not equal to.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. *. <>. page 108 • Open Command. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. To add to or modify the definition list. This dialog box opens when you click Filter Add . You can type a percent sign. Do not use an asterisk. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. box. Match any is the default matching method. Examples of properties include revision number and name. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list. Match any .Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter. Edit . >.Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. Property . page 72 106 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . for example. Operator . or choose null. an operator. ?.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Dialog Box Sets options for the display of drawings in the list or report view of the Open dialog on the Open dialog box. equal to. Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box. =. which can be free text. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing. you must type a value. Relationships include. in the Value box. or type a question mark. and a value. as a wildcard character for a single character. Definition .Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value.

page 110 • Open a Drawing in a Different Database. Add .Displays the properties that are currently available for the detailed view in the Open dialog box.Lists the properties that are available to be displayed in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. page 108 • Open Command. Selected properties .Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize Current View Dialog Box Allows you to specify what drawing property or properties are displayed in the list view of the Open dialog box.Moves the chosen items in the Selected properties list back into the Drawing properties list so that they are no longer available in the detailed view. Remove . Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box.Moves the selected items in the Drawing properties list into the Selected properties list so that those properties are available in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Customize View on the Open dialog box. page 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 107 . page 109 • Open an Existing Drawing. Move Up . which changes the order of the display in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. Move Down . Drawing properties .Moves the selected property down in order in the list. which changes the order of display in the detailed view of the Open dialog box.Moves the selected property up in order in the list.

For more information. Notes • You can open one of the last edited drawings by selecting it from the list of recently opened files at the bottom of the File menu on the main menu bar. Double-click the drawing that you want to open. Your plant administrator has set the plant hierarchy and has identified user names and tasks for those plants and related drawings. click Open . • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Tip • If you do not see the drawing that you want to open. see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. page 109. page 102 108 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. You need to have the correct permissions to open or save certain drawings.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open an Existing Drawing 1. confirm that the plant hierarchy is correct. On the main toolbar. User roles are assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. You can change the database you are working in.

Select the correct plant on the Open Plant Structure dialog box and click Open. click Open Database Tip The Open Database command is not available if you already have a drawing open because you cannot open drawings from different databases during the same P&ID session. Navigate to the correct drawing in the Open dialog box and double-click it. select the correct SmartPlant .ini initialization file and click OK. On the Open Plant Structure dialog box. • Related Topics • Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview. page 141 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. click Site Server. On the Open dialog box. 3. On the Open Site Server dialog box.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open a Drawing in a Different Database 1. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 109 . click File > Open. • . 4. Tip The Open command checks to make sure that you have the correct access privileges for the selected plant structure and passes your access information back to the software. 5. On the main menu bar. 2. 6.

3.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize the Open Dialog Box 1. Using the detailed view allows you to view and sort drawings by several attributes. click Include Subnodes . click Filter . the first item in the Selected Properties list is the descriptor that appears in the list view. • Tip • On the Customize Current View dialog box. click Customize View . The detailed view displays all the properties specified in the Selected Properties list of the Customize Current View dialog box. To cancel a filter that you have already applied to the Open dialog box. 4. define your ad hoc filter criteria. To display a list view in the right-hand window. click List Tip The list view displays only one property for each drawing. On the Filter dialog box. To cancel the display of subnodes. you can see Drawing Manager Help for more information. To display a detailed view in the right-hand window. . click Details Tip • . To further manipulate the properties that are available to view in the right-hand window. page 102 110 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. You can specify that descriptor by clicking Customize View. To display all the drawings and node names that reside in the currently selected node. click Include Subnodes again. 5. you can add and remove drawing properties from the display. click Clear Filter . Note • Because the Open dialog box is similar in nature to the Drawing Manager interface. To apply a filter to the drawings displayed in the right-hand view of the Open dialog box. and you can change the order that drawing properties appear in. 2. 8. 7. 6.

Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 111 . page 111 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. The view then appears on top of other open views. You can change the number of files listed on the menu by using the Tools > Options command. Or. if you cannot see any portion of the drawing or view. Select the drawing from the list of recently opened drawings. page 102 Access a Recently Open Drawing 1. page 102 Switch to Another Open Drawing or View If you can see a portion of the drawing or view that you want to switch to.Working with Drawings: An Overview Recent Drawings File > Recent Drawings Opens one of the drawings that you worked on most recently. 2. Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. select the view that you want to work in from the list. Click File on the main menu bar. Related Topics • Access a Recently Open Drawing. on the Window menu. The file names are listed near the bottom of the File menu. click its window.

which displays general information about the current drawing. Modified . Created . page 102 File Properties Dialog Box Tracks information about the properties of a drawing. page 116 • View Document Properties. page 115 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.Displays the date and time that the document was last modified.Displays the directory containing the document. MS-DOS Name . Accessed . The type is based on the application used to create the document.Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied. Type . page 112 • Set Document Properties. Open this dialog box by clicking File > Properties on the main menu bar. 112 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Working with Drawings: An Overview File Properties Command File > Properties Opens the File Properties dialog box. kilobytes.Displays the type of document. page 115 General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays general information about the current document. Related Topics • Set Document Properties. Related Topics • File Properties Command. Size . You can review and edit the drawing summary and statistics.Displays the size of the document in bytes. Location . page 116 • View Document Properties.Displays the name of the document as it would appear in a Windows file naming system. Note • You must save the drawing before you can access the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box.Displays the date and time that the document was created or copied. and megabytes.

Keywords . Read-Only . page 116 • View Document Properties. The software generates the author and template information when you create. System .Displays a list of words that identify the document when you browse or search documents. if available. Subject . Title .Displays the properties of the current document.Indicates that the document is a hidden document. page 112 • Set Document Properties. Comments .Gives a general description of the current document. Hidden . with the exception of the template. You cannot open a read-only file for writing. You usually cannot see this document in the Windows. unless the document is write-protected. page 112 • Set Document Properties. Archive .Specifies the current drawing template. You cannot create a file with the same name as a read-only file. You usually cannot see this document unless you change the view options in Windows Explorer. Note • If some of the above information is not available.Specifies the title of the current document. the dialog box displays Unknown.Specifies comments about the current document. You can edit these properties. page 116 • View Document Properties.Shows that the document is a system document.Working with Drawings: An Overview Attributes . along with keywords and comments for the current document. page 115 Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays the title and author. page 115 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 113 . These settings are readonly. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box.Indicates that the document is read-only. save.Displays the name of the person who created the document. Template . or print the document. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box.Shows that the document is an archive document. Author .

1056 inches long. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. Creating Application . Modified .Displays the name of the application that created the document.Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the angle values in a document. Currently Opened By .Displays the date and time the document was last modified.Displays the name of the person who last saved the document. page 112 • Set Document Properties. page 115 Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Sets up units of measure and precision readout for the length.Working with Drawings: An Overview Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays detailed information about the current document. Angle Readout .106 inches. page 116 • View Document Properties. or angle values in a drawing.123 and you draw a line that is 2. The precision readout sets the number of significant figures to appear.Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the area values in a document. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. It represents the accuracy of the unit readout value.Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied. Created . save. For example. The software automatically generates these properties when you create.Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the length values in a document.Displays the name of the application that most recently saved the document. or print the document. 114 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Area Readout .Displays the name of the person who has the document open. if the precision readout is . Saving Application . area. then the line value length is rounded up to 2. Length Readout . Accessed .Displays the date and time the document was created or copied. The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you type into a property. only the display of the numbers. Last Saved By .

increase the precision. you can convert centimeters to meters and back and retain the originally entered value of centimeters with no round-off loss. you must save the document to update the property information. All delivered labels use plant default units. click the tab that contains the information that you want. SmartPlant supports round-trip conversion of units without loss of precision. of the larger unit through Format Manager. page 112 • Set Document Properties. which are defined in the Options Manager. Note • The File Properties dialog box displays information about the current condition of the active document. Change the Unit definition in the SmartText Editor dialog box in Catalog Manager to see a different unit of measure in a label. Tip • You must save the document before you can view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 115 . • • Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. Click File > Properties. that is. and so labels do not always display the units selected in the Properties window.Working with Drawings: An Overview Notes • To avoid loss of precision in units when switching between small and large types of a particular unit. increase decimal places. That is. page 115 View Document Properties 1. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. 2. On the File Properties dialog box. page 116 • View Document Properties. If the document has unsaved changes.

you must save the document . set the options that you want. On the File Properties dialog box. Notes • Before you can set or view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box. see Set up a Page Layout. 2. page 102 116 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click File > Properties. such as summary information or keywords. You can also change the size for an existing drawing.Working with Drawings: An Overview Set Document Properties 1. page 370 • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. For more information.

Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Related Topics • Close an Active Drawing. page 117 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 117 . Note • Any changes are automatically saved upon closing. page 102 Close an Active Drawing Click File > Close. The software saves your changes automatically.Working with Drawings: An Overview Close Command File > Close Closes the active drawing.

page 118 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Related Topics • Close the Program. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. The software checks for unsaved changes when you close the software. page 102 Close the Program Click File > Exit.Working with Drawings: An Overview Exit Command File > Exit Closes the active drawing and the program. Note • The software saves any changes since the last time you saved your changes. page 124 118 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Any changes are automatically saved.

This task is accomplished inside the design software by using commands on the File menu.igr B Wide (17in x 11in) C Wide (22in x 17in) E Wide (44in x 34in) D-Wide. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. you can also create a new title block label that fits the title block of your template correctly and that contains the appropriate information. You usually create a new drawing based on one of these existing templates.igr A3 Wide (420mm x 297mm) A4border.igr E-Wide. save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation.igr A Wide (11in x 8.igr C-Wide.pid A1-Size. The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager.pid A3-Size. If you create a new template. The software also includes a set of title block labels that fit the delivered drawing templates.Working with Drawings: An Overview Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview The software includes several standard drawing templates.pid E-Size. If you link a border file.pid A4-Size.pid A2-Size.igr A4 Wide (297mm x 210mm) A5border. it is possible to customize a drawing template to meet your particular needs.pid A5-Size. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. Standard Template Size Information Template file Border file A0-Size.5in) B-Wide.pid A-Wide.pid D-Size. If you create a new template.igr A1 Wide (841mm x 594mm) A2border.igr A0 Wide (1189mm x 841mm) A1border. You can then embed your border file in the new templates you create in SmartPlant P&ID.pid C-Size. You create labels in Catalog Manager. The pre-defined size choices for a new template are extensive.igr A5 Wide (210mm x 148mm) Template file Border file Page size A-Size. If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. however. instead of embedding it.pid Page size A0border. use Intergraph SmartSketch.igr D Wide (34in x 225in) SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 119 .pid B-Size.igr A2 Wide (594mm x 420mm) A3border.

page 116 • Set up a Page Layout. page 370 New Template Command File > New Template Creates a new blank template. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. page 278 • Set up a Page Layout. page 102 120 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 370 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Caution • Templates created at the user level instead of the plant level are not available to other users or to Drawing Manager for creating subsequent drawings. The path to the plant-level drawing templates is defined in Options Manager. For more information about creating new drawings. page 121 • Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border. page 121 • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. page 119 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. Related Topics • Create a Drawing Template.Working with Drawings: An Overview Related Topics • Create a Drawing Template. page 125 • Set Document Properties. You can specify properties for the new template and embed border files. see Drawing Manager Help. an administrator uses Drawing Manager. page 122 • Embed a New Object. To create new drawings.

12. You can also add general identifying information on the Summary tab. and click Open. find the border file.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Drawing Template Important • Before you can edit one of the standard templates included with SmartPlant software. Tip If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. 14. choose a standard size or define a custom size for this template. On the Insert Object dialog box. a . see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. On the Units tab of the File Properties dialog box. Click OK. Click OK. 6. Tip The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager. • Notes • To create a new drawing using a plant template. 10. In the Sheet size box on the Page Setup dialog box. and Area readout boxes in order to define default units of measurement. Click File > Properties. you must verify that you are connected to the correct database and that you do not have any drawings open. click New Template 2. Quit the design software. 7. For more information about connecting to a database. page 109. 8. specify the unit in the Length. Click Edit > Insert > Object. Click File > Page Setup. Save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation. . Angle. 5. On the main toolbar. 3.igr file. 11. an administrator uses Drawing Manager. Type the path to the border file. Click OK. or click Browse. make sure that the Link option is selected. in the Create from file box. Click File > Save As and specify a name for your template on the Save As dialog box. 1. 4. • 13. use Intergraph SmartSketch. 9. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 121 .

make sure that the Link option is selected. a . or click Browse. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change.igr file. 1. Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. Select the existing border file and click Delete while the pointer is in the Drawing view. in the Create from file box. for the plant. 122 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. • 4. page 119 • Embed a New Object. use Intergraph SmartSketch. Tip • If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. Type the path to the border file. 2. and click Open. Once you embed a border file into a template and a drawing is created using that template. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. page 109. metric or English. For more information about connecting to a database. Click Edit > Insert > Object. page 277 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. 6. In Windows Explorer. • Tip Be sure to select a template that matches not only the page size requirements for drawings but also the units of measurement. • Tip You can do this by opening the product from the Start menu or by closing all open documents in the design software if it is already running. find the border file. 3. you must verify that you are connected to the correct database and that you do not have any drawings open. Open the design application. On the Insert Object dialog box. find the template you want to edit and drag it into the Design window. instead of embedding it. but do not open a drawing. If you link a border file. see Open a Drawing in a Different Database.Working with Drawings: An Overview • You can also embed your border file in the drawing template if you want to. page 102 Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border Important Before you can edit one of the standard templates included with SmartPlant software. 5.

page 119 • Embed a New Object. page 277 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 121 • Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. Once you embed a border file into a template and a drawing is created using that template. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. Click OK. Click File > Save. see Create a Drawing Template. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch.Working with Drawings: An Overview 7. Quit the design software. • Notes • You can also embed your border file in the drawing template if you want to. If you link a border file. instead of embedding it. For more information about editing other properties of a drawing template or creating a new template. 8. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 123 . Save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation. 9. Tip The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager.

allowing quick access to information outside the drawing. Closing Drawings You can close a drawing without saving your work.pid.Working with Drawings: An Overview Saving Drawings: An Overview Whenever you save a drawing using File > Save. page 126 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. and has the ability to zoom and achieve more detail.cgm Format The Computer Graphics Metafile (.cgm) format provides an efficient way to make information available on the Internet. or you can use File > Exit to close the drawing and quit the software. However. Saving Assemblies You can save a group of items in a drawing as an assembly. renders quickly. Related Topics • Save a Drawing in a Different Format. You can retrieve assemblies from Catalog Explorer to place in a drawing. page 111 124 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Saving Drawings to .cgm format. page 125 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. the changes that you make to the drawing appear on your screen. These types of drawings can contain embedded hyperlinks. you can place the graphics on a Web page and view them with a browser. When you open an existing drawing. These changes are saved in the database automatically. You can use File > Close to close the drawing and clear it from your screen. the software uses the name and folder location specified in Drawing Manager during drawing creation. because changes to the drawing post to the database as you make them. the software copies the drawing from the disk or network and displays it on the screen. Then. If you want to save the drawing in a format other than . you probably feel more comfortable saving it at least once yourself. You can use the Save As command to save drawings in . use the Save As command. As you work. CGM is an efficient format for publishing 2D vector drawings on the Web because it uses little storage space. You can save your drawing by clicking Save on the toolbar. Assemblies are saved in a specific folder specified in Options Manager. it remains displayed on the screen. After you have saved a drawing.

your parametric symbols should not be scaled. You can type a name and choose a format and location for your template. Plant location and paths are set in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and Options Manager. You cannot open an existing drawing and then decide to save it as a template. page 124 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 125 . Related Topics • Save a Drawing in a Different Format. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. the Save As dialog box opens. Note When using AutoCAD. • If you have not named a template before clicking Save. • Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. An administrator must click File > New Template to create a new template. If you have not already named a template. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. the Save As dialog box appears.Working with Drawings: An Overview Save Command File > Save Stores the active drawing or template. You can save the active document to a new format. page 126 • Saving Drawings: An Overview. The graphics will display incorrectly. page 124 Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template • Click Save Notes on the main toolbar. page 102 Save As Command File > Save As Opens the Save As dialog box.

Click File > Save As. In the design software click Tools > Custom Commands.dll macro. The location of this Microsoft Excel workbook is specified in Options Manager. a message appears that tells you if all items were assigned layers successfully or if any items lacked the appropriate layer specification. type a new name for the drawing. Assign level or layer numbers between 10 and 63 to ensure that graphics appear in the designated levels or layers. 9. page 124 126 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This macro is delivered in \Program Files\SmartPlant\P&ID Workstation\Program. select the document format that you want to use.xls. 2. In Microsoft Excel. On the Save As dialog box. select the drive and folder for the new drawing. If you save your drawing to the AutoCAD format. Save ExportLayer. 8. In the Save As Type box. you can name layers with any combination of alphanumeric characters. • 7. 5. Tip When the macro finishes running. 6. In the File Name box. When the Custom Commands dialog box opens. You can edit the Microsoft Excel workbook again if you need to add filters and layers. Related Topics • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. open ExportLayer. 3. run the ExportLayer.xls. page 125 • Saving Drawings: An Overview.Working with Drawings: An Overview Save a Drawing in a Different Format 1. Tips • You can choose more filters for the Filter column of this worksheet from filters in Filter Manager. • 4.

You can check this file for irregularities that occur during the re-create process. Occasionally.Working with Drawings: An Overview Re-creating Drawings: An Overview The software continually updates the database as you edit a drawing. the software can end in an abnormal way (for example. the software does not update the drawing file until you actually save the file (for example. the software reinitializes your drawing and displays the message Re-create drawing is complete. Also. Click OK to re-create the drawing from the database. is created in your Temp folder. but the drawing file reflects the status when you last saved the drawing. Caution • Do not interfere with the re-create process once started because the drawing can become unusable. After the re-create process is completed. however. During the re-create process. the database is up-to-date with changes that you posted to the drawing. the status bar at the bottom of the main window keeps you informed about the particular elements currently reconciling with the database. When you re-open the drawing. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 127 . a log file. As a result. Recreate-DrawingName. due to power outage). the software recognizes that the drawing file is different from the database. when you click File > Save or when you quit the program). The software displays a message box that states One or more items in this drawing are inconsistent with the database.

The heavy orange line segment is the error condition.Working with Drawings: An Overview If a section of the drawing could not re-create successfully an error condition appears on your drawing. page 129 128 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and the symbology is a heavy orange line segment. Related Topics • Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition. Then re-route your runs and replace connections and components as required. Delete the heavy orange line segment and components connected directly to it. Error conditions are always associated with a pipe or signal run. This portion of the drawing must be updated manually.

7. For more information about recreating drawings. 3. Right-click an empty space on your Windows taskbar. and then click Task Manager. Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. click draft. Click End Process.exe. 5. 6. Delete the heavy orange lines that make up the error itself. Tip Keep property breaks in mind as you re-route your lines.Working with Drawings: An Overview Recreate a Drawing 1. 2. page 127 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 129 . Save the drawing. Open the drawing that you want to recreate. In SmartPlant P&ID. Re-route your pipe or signal run. 4. 2. see the Re-creating Drawings section in the SmartPlant P&ID Installation and Upgrade Guide. page 127 Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition 1. 8. Place an item in the drawing. Click the Processes tab. 10. In the list. click OK to recreate the drawing from the database. 9. 4. Notes • Normally SmartPlant P&ID recreates drawings automatically when it detects a discrepancy between the drawing and the database. Delete all connectors and components that are directly connected to the error condition. • Note • Error conditions are not required items and therefore do not move to the stockpile when you delete them. Delete the item that you placed in step 2. Replace connectors and components that you deleted in step 1. When the software prompts you that a recreate is necessary. 3. • Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. open the drawing that you opened in step 1.

Note • If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. You can create filters to control the display of hierarchy items in Drawing Manager. you could filter all pumps in a Drawing view. For example. page 138 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. or an under construction design. And you can use filters to find and replace items. For example. You can show all items added after a certain date or after a certain revision number. Filters can help you show different views of the same drawing and can make your workflow more efficient. page 52 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 357 130 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . That same filter applied to the Engineering Data Editor displays a list of pumps and their characteristics in a tabular format. You can use filters in Rule Manager to define how items interact within a view. These filters are not saved to any folder in Filter Manager. you see all pumps in the drawing as graphical symbols. However. for example. You can then select all the pumps and edit their properties one-by-one or as a select set in the Properties window. Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. You can apply filters to either Drawing views or the Engineering Data Editor. where you can edit the properties of the pumps also. You can associate filters with the source or target properties in rules. you want to delete items of a certain type. you can use a filter to display an operational design. do not create Project Filters at a satellite site. You can use filters when you create report templates to display particular items on a report. but the methods of creating these filters are the same as those for creating filters saved in Filter Manager. After applying the filter. You can use filters if. you can always create My Filters in the Filter Manager or Select Filter dialog box environment.Working with Drawings: An Overview Using Filters: An Overview You can use filters in many ways throughout the software and its stand-alone applications and utilities.

which contains a subset of the commands in Filter Manager.Allows you to edit the properties of the selected filter. select the individual simple filters that compose a compound filter and click Properties to view the Filter Properties dialog box for those simple filters. or reports or to search for items using definitions associated with a filter. you can create a new filter or modify an existing filter. which allows you to specify a new simple or new compound filter. page 138 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 357 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. page 226 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters. This command displays the Select Filter dialog box. page 138 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. to choose item types for tables. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. This button displays the Filter Properties dialog box or the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. Using this dialog box. Choose Filter in the Find what list on the Find tab of the Find and Replace dialog box. Access this dialog box using one of the methods described below: • Click Browse on the Add Filter Tab dialog box when you want to add a filter to the Drawing view. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. If you create a compound filter. page 230 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 131 . Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. • • New .Working with Drawings: An Overview Add Filter Command View > Add Filter Adds a filter tab to the drawings in the Design window. page 15 Select Filter Dialog Box Allows you to associate different filters with tabs in the different views.Displays the New Filter dialog box. Click Browse on the Filter tab of the Define Report Items dialog box when you are choosing your report item type. Properties . depending on your selection in the filter list.

You can name the new filter appropriately. Filter .Returns a collection of items based on the filter definition and criteria of a single filter. In order for the alternate symbology to take effect in your drawing. This information is read-only.Opens the Select Filter dialog box. page 138 New Filter Dialog Box Allows you to specify compound or simple filter when you create a new filter.Working with Drawings: An Overview Add Filter Tab Dialog Box Opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view and select Add Filter from the shortcut menu. Alternate symbology . Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. You can modify the properties of the filter that you choose from the Select Filter dialog box.Allows you to specify the color of the filtered items. Related Topics • Add Filter Command. you must right-click the drawing filter tab and select Use Alternate Symbology. Color .Combines two or more simple filters to return a collection of items based on the criteria of the combination of simple filters. Scroll down the list to choose a line width. You specify the name of the filter when you choose or create it. Properties .Contains information about how the software displays the filtered items in your Drawing view. page 52 132 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Contains information about the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. This dialog box allows you to specify a filter for your drawing. Filter Name . page 138 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. which allows you to choose or create a filter for your Drawing view. You can activate this dialog box by clicking New on the Select Filter dialog box.Displays the name of the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. Browse .Opens the Filter Properties dialog box. Width . Compound filter . page 131 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Simple filter .Allows you to specify the line width for your filtered items. Scroll down the list to choose a color.

Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. Instr. including the name.A phrase or sentence about the filter. The name can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. Match any . To add to or modify the definition list. description.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. and a value. Match all . Examples of properties include revision number and name. and so forth. Name . You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property. the criteria that you enter on the Filter tab on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box are combined with the base filter that you select. Edit . for example. >. not equal to. This name appears as the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. respectively. Examples of item types are Equipment.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter. Filter for . Match any is the default matching method. and PipeRun. Add . Operator . and the other properties that you want to filter for. Instrument. Property .Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Properties Dialog Box Specifies properties of a filter.Contains the top-level items from the data dictionary.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. The description appears as a ToolTip when you point to the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. This button is active only when you select a criterion in the definition list. Delete . equal to. Each item type owns a set of properties.Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list.Loop Item Tag. greater than. Filter names within a project must be unique. Description . and Estimated Length. Specifies available properties in the Definition grid. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group.Specifies the filter name. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 133 . Definition . Relationships include. The description can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. <>. =. an operator. and examples of properties for these item types are Equipment Type. If you are defining the Engineering Data Editor.

If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Select the date you want and click OK. or choose null. in the Value box. Dates . page 136 • 134 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you must type a value. *. or type a question mark. as a wildcard character for a single character. Do not use an asterisk. which can be free text.Allows you to specify the date of the month. Month . page 138 Calendar Dialog Box Use this dialog box to specify a date in Value on the Filter Properties dialog box.Working with Drawings: An Overview Value .Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. Related Topics Create a Simple Filter. The option of choosing a date for Value is available only for those properties that are date formatted. which is specified in Data Dictionary Manager.Allows you to choose the correct year.Allows you to choose the correct month. Year . you can view only pumps whose Revision Approval Timestamp is after a particular date. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. ?. %. For example. You can type a percent sign.

Compound filters apply only to homogeneous item types.Specifies the filter name. The description can be any combination of characters and has no length limit.Allows you to choose either Match all or Match any. Related Topics • Add Filter Command. This name appears as the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. Filter names within a plant must be unique. including the name. Match all . The name can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. description. The description appears as a ToolTip when you point to the filter name on the Filter Manager interface.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. The simple filters are added to the compound filter by dragging the simple filter or by creating new simple filters under the compound filter in the filter hierarchy. Match any is the default matching method.Working with Drawings: An Overview Compound Filter Properties Dialog Box A compound filter consists of more than one simple filter. This dialog box specifies properties of a compound filter. Match any . Name . Filter Method . page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 135 . page 131 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.Specifies a phrase or sentence about the filter. and whether to match all or any of the simple filter criteria.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Description .

click either Match all or Match any. • Related Topics • Create a Compound Filter. If you have the Select Filter dialog box open. operator. Notes • If you select a date-formatted property. • Tip The type in the Filter for box determines the properties that are available in the Edit area. Match any means that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass. Tip • You can click Delete to remove a filter definition if it is currently selected. Click the ellipses in the Value box in the Edit group and select a date on the calendar. if needed. select the filter property. 7. 4. 5. On the New Filter dialog box. page 130 136 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In the Definition area. • Tip Match all means that only those items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Simple Filter 1. this filter description displays as a ToolTip. page 137 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Click Add to add a line for another filter definition. 3. Tip When you point to the name of a filter in the tree view on the Select Filter dialog box. and click OK. On the Filter Properties dialog box. and click New. • 8. select Simple filter. Click the Filter for drop-down list and specify the item type for the new filter. type a name for the new filter. In the Edit area. and corresponding value for the first filter criterion. page 91 • Using Filters: An Overview. you can specify a date for that property. Open the Select Filter dialog box. and repeat step 6. do not open Filter Manager and make changes to filters in that utility also. Type a description in the Description box. 6. 2.

You set the filter description in the Description box in the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. Click OK. if wanted. On the New Filter dialog box. of course. To add filter criteria to the compound filter. Tip Match all means that only those items matching ALL of the filtering criteria specified are returned. Type a description in the Description box. On the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. Tips • All of the filters that make up the new compound filter need to be of the same item type. if you create a new filter under that compound filter. all of the simple filters making up a compound filter can be of type Equipment: Mechanical. page 91 • Using Filters: An Overview. Match any means that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria return. 6. Select either Match all or Match any. drag one or more simple filters into the compound filter. the Filter for property is specified and you cannot change it. This is. because all of the simple filters under one compound filter must be of the same item type. type a name for the new compound filter in the Name box. Once one simple filter has been assigned to a compound filter. • 7. select Compound filter. page 136 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. • Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. Or you can select the compound filter and create a new simple filter under it. For example. the filter description displays in a ToolTip. 3. and click OK. page 130 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 137 . Match Any is the default. do not open Filter Manager and make changes to filters in that utility also. 5. If you have the Select Filter dialog box open. 4. Open the Select Filter dialog box. • Note • When you point to the name of a compound filter in the tree view in Filter Manager. and click New. 2. You cannot mix Equipment: Mechanical with Equipment: Heat Transfer or any other item type. which displays in the Filter for list on the Filter Properties dialog box.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Compound Filter 1.

• Notes • To define a new filter. Click OK. The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. Note • You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. You can see the properties of a filter by selecting it in the Select Filter dialog box and clicking Properties. page 91 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 137.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View 1. 2. You can choose alternate symbology on this dialog box. 4. the Cut command allows you to remove a filter tab from the Drawing view and place it on the Clipboard. click New on the Select Filter dialog box. 3. From the shortcut menu. page 83 Filter Tab Cut Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. Tips • If you click Browse. page 136 or Create a Compound Filter. you must right-click the filter tab area and select Use Alternate Symbology. see Create a Simple Filter. In order for your alternate symbology to affect the Drawing view. On the Add Filter Tab dialog box. Right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view. For more information. too. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. As long as the cut filter tab remains on the Clipboard you can reapply the filter by using the Paste command on the shortcut menu. type a filter name. You can create and then select that filter for the view. select Add Filter. you can choose a filter from the Select Filter dialog box. page 138 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Click OK to apply the filter to the Drawing view.

Note • You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. As long as the copied filter tab remains on the Clipboard you can reapply the filter by using the Paste command on the shortcut menu. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Tab Copy Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. You must have placed a filter tab on the Clipboard in order for this command to be available. page 138 Filter Tab Paste Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. the Paste command allows you to place a filter tab from the Clipboard onto the Drawing view. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 138 Filter Tab Delete Command Allows you to remove a filter tab from the Drawing view. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 139 . the Copy command allows you to place a filter tab from the Drawing view onto the Clipboard.

page 138 Filter Tab Properties Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. page 138 140 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. which allows you to edit the options for the selected drawing filter.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Tab Use Alternate Symbology Command Applies any alternate symbology you defined for a filter tab on the Add Filter or Properties dialog box. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. this command opens the Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view.

A view can be a schematic drawing.log is Error Problem:Common::GetDatabasePathAndServerLocS:\SmartPid\bin\ SmartPlant. unified data structure that represents the plant model. solve the error by making sure your internet options are set to allow internet access using a proxy server and also to bypass the proxy server for intranet addresses. you can generate order lists for the components in the drawing. Options Manager or Rules Manager.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview With SmartPlant® P&ID. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model. Assemblies appear as symbols in the Catalog Explorer list view so that you can place them exactly as you place other symbols in your drawing. By manipulating model views. you can easily perform the tasks required to create a detailed plant model. or a report. for example. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 141 . You can print the drawing. You can resolve inconsistencies using solutions from the Consistency Check dialog box. and instrumentation from Catalog Explorer or the stockpile into graphical representations of your plant model in the drawing. The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. cannot establish a connection with the database on the server. including all plant components and their relationships. These indicators appear in your drawing as soon as an inconsistency occurs in the design. SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. Format Manager. In the Properties window. You can place components such as equipment. As you work on your drawing. Note • When SmartPlant P&ID or any associated stand-alone application. Also. piping. One key feature of SmartPlant P&ID is using catalogs to create instances of components within the plant model. you can annotate your drawing with labels as you design the drawing. for example Filter Manager. If you repeatedly place particular groups of items. you can save the group of items as an assembly. The standard modeling environment lets you place items from the catalog into the appropriate model views. Also. too. you can monitor any inconsistencies in your design by reviewing the inconsistency indicators. a table. you can generate reports to help you keep track of information in the drawing. After you finish the drawing. you can add values for various properties of each item after you place it in your drawing. and the error message in SPError. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data.ini.

page 35 • Print a Drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Create an Assembly. page 365 • Review an Inconsistency. page 317 142 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 51 • Generate a Report. page 286 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 334 • Open a New Drawing View.

History records can pertain to either a drawing or the model.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Understanding Database Constraints The following database constraints improve the integrity of the data associated with your design. This constraint is similar to the Foreign Key constraint described above. Either of these objects can be null. exists in the table referenced by the foreign key.Used for more complex data integrity controls.Enforce all subclass and one-toone relationships. Foreign Key in conjunction with Not Null . but does not allow null values to persist. already exists in the database or is created during your transaction. For example. • Check . but not both of them. For example. Foreign Key with Not Null and Unique . • • The constraints so far described serve to enforce relationship integrity. Another candidate for a Check constraint is the enforcement of certain values for one or more items. the constraints are satisfied without changing the scope of your transaction. invalid null or zeroes assigned to properties are tested against Check constraints. but does not allow null values to persist and requires that all values be unique. such as monitoring conditions on multiple items. the object and the foreign key it points to. unless it is null. such as the case to model item relationship. • Foreign Key . Since the relationship. such as the plant item to plant group relationship. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 143 . such as the pairing of OPCs. This type of constraint is used to enforce logical relationships.Insures that the corresponding value. This constraint is similar to the Foreign Key constraint described above.Enforces group relationships. A Check constraint is defined to enforce this condition by using comparisons and exclusions.

If you select multiple items in the Engineering Data Editor. and so forth. As you pause on items in a drawing. Many manipulation commands. Selecting Single Items To select an item. like Delete. You can also select drawing items by first selecting them in the Engineering Data Editor. you can click to select it. the items change to the selection color. and you can select item groups. the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone . valves. Although you can select more than one item at a time. Move. When you select an individual item. click the Select Tool on the main toolbar. When you click the Select Tool. such as end points and center points. you can use the Select Tool on the main toolbar. You can use the Select Tool ribbon to choose if you want to select only items completely enclosed by the fence or any item that is partly enclosed by the fence. When an item is highlighted. Or. labels. and Rotate. Copy. 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can select pipe routes.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview To select an item. • • When you select multiple items or grouped items. The handles of the item appear if the item has handles. You can change the selection color with the Options command on the Tools menu. selecting it allows you to double-click it for editing. Handles are solid squares at significant positions on a selected item. assemblies. you can click the Select Tool and then drag to fence items. the following things happen: • The item changes to the selection color. The corresponding items are selected in the Drawing view if they reside in the active drawing. such as dragging a handle to change the shape of the item. can act upon all items in the select set. or embedded or linked objects. You can construct a select set using the Engineering Data Editor in this way. if they reside there. Handles allow you to directly modify the item. equipment. these items are also selected in the active drawing. Selecting Multiple Items and then You can select more than one item at a time by clicking Select Tool holding Shift or Ctrl as you click the items that you want to select. If the item is linked or embedded into the current drawing. only one item can have handles at a time. the items appear in the indicator at the end: highlight color.

the Select Tool ribbon is displayed. you select it in Catalog Explorer or the stockpile. you can choose single items from that set by using the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window. page 218 • Select an Item. You cannot select more than one item for placement in a drawing at a time. Related Topics • Move an Item With the Select Tool. and manipulate items. page 218 • Select an Item. The circle at the end of the pointer arrow is the locate zone. page 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 145 . you can click any empty point on the drawing. Then you click to select the position in the drawing to place the item. page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. After placement. While the Select Tool is active. Or. you can select another item or press Esc to quit placement mode. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. page 248 • Move an Item With the Select Tool. Selecting Items for Placement To place an item in a drawing. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. A single item chosen in a select set this way is highlighted in a different color in the Drawing view. modify.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Whenever you have constructed a select set. page 254 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. page 147 Select Tool Command Changes the pointer to the arrow-shaped selection pointer so that you can select. Canceling the Selection of Items To cancel selection of an item or group of items.

Specifies that items inside the fence are selected.Specifies that symbols are recognized in the locate zone as opposed to individual elements in a symbol. if it is available for the selected item. page 149 146 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . such as check valves or flow arrows or other inline items.Specifies that individual elements. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Tool Ribbon Appears when nothing is selected. when you are placing them. Inside . the Select Tool ribbon is replaced with a ribbon for editing the selected item. Note • To find out the name of an option on the ribbon. Top Down . pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip. Overlapping . are recognized in the locate zone as opposed to the whole symbol. Pausing after you drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing activates the Configuration tool. After you select an item. page 145 Configuration (PickQuick) Tool In addition to using the manipulation handles to orient an item after you place it. Bottom Up . you can use PickQuick to select the orientation of some items. page 264 • Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. page 248 • Move an Item With the Select Tool. page 218 • Select an Item.Specifies that items both overlapped by the fence and inside the fence are selected. page 194 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. page 66 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. which make up symbols. page 254 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. Related Topics • Place a Flow Arrow. page 147 • Select Tool Command. and allows you to select the proper orientation for the item.

To clear the selection of one item and leave other items selected. to accomplish the same thing. When the item that you want to select is highlighted. click the item while holding Shift or Ctrl. page 144 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 147 . • • • Related Topics Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. click it. press Ctrl + A or click Edit > Select All. To select all items in a drawing. you can select items in the Engineering Data Editor. To select more than one item. To clear the selection of an item or items. do one of the following: • • • • Click in an empty portion of the drawing. You can build up a select set using this method. click the Select Tool: 2. To select more than one item at once. selectable items are highlighted as you pass the pointer over them. use PickQuick. page 148 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Do one of the following: • • • • . Right-click in an empty portion of the drawing. 3. To select one item. Click Tools > Options to change the item highlight and selection colors and locate and break-away tolerances. they are selected in the Engineering Data Editor. drag to fence the objects. To select one of several overlapping items. click to select it. too.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select an Item 1. If they reside in the active drawing. right-click a blank area in the drawing and click Select All on the shortcut menu. On the main toolbar. Select another item without holding Shift or Ctrl. or. Notes • When the Select Tool is active. hold Shift or Ctrl and click each item. Also.

PickQuick also helps you place items when multiple possible placement configurations exist. page 149 Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. The second item is highlighted. 2. to highlight the corresponding items. Note • PickQuick helps you to select items that overlap each other. Pause the pointer over the item that you want to select. page 144 148 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool 1. click the corresponding button on the PickQuick toolbar. When the pointer appears with ellipses. move the pointer over the numbered PickQuick buttons. On the PickQuick toolbar. For more information. 3. see Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. When the item that you want to select is highlighted. which appears near the pointer. 4. without clicking. The first item is highlighted. click.

page 146 • Navigating in the Software: An Overview. click the corresponding button on the Configuration toolbar to place the item in that orientation. 3. Pause until ellipses appear beside the pointer: . or you can close it by clicking X in the upper right corner of the toolbar. 2. page 14 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 149 . Note • You can right-click in an empty portion of the drawing or press Esc to close the Configuration toolbar. 5. Drag the item to the appropriate position on the line or equipment. Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. Click to display the Configuration toolbar near the pointer. 4. When the appropriate orientation is displayed.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool 1. Move the pointer over each toolbar button to preview the available orientations.

You can view the grid by clicking View > Show grid. they do not appear when you print the drawing. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. page 33 Show Grid Command View > Show Grid Displays a grid so that you can place items with precision. The grid is not considered part of the drawing and does not print. To view grid lines at a finer level. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. When you click View > Snap grid. which opens when you click View > Properties. Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview The grid and its grid lines allow you to place items in the drawing by aligning them with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. or coarse levels. page 150 • Set Document Properties. The grid is an set of imaginary lines in the drawing. medium. page 115 150 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. solid grid lines. Note • You can change the grid display from static to dynamic by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. page 116 • View Document Properties. You can change the display of the grid from static to dynamic by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. Note • You do not have to display the grid in order to snap items to it. You can specify the increment settings on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. You can set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine. set the style to dynamic and adjust the density. You can use the grid if you want the items to line up at regular intervals in the drawing. The grid lines appear at common major measurement increments. The grid lines for a dynamic grid move as you zoom in or out in a view.

Note • You can change the grid display by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Snap Grid Command View > Snap Grid Aligns items with the grid. page 150 • Set Document Properties. Grid lines do not print. The grid is a set of lines in the drawing background that helps you align items. page 115 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 151 . which opens when you click View > Properties. page 116 • View Document Properties. To view grid lines at a finer level. When you set the Snap grid option. set the style to Dynamic and adjust the grid line width with the Density control. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines.

and nozzles can be flagged for placement outside the piece of equipment. creating an equipment group. The software includes a standard group of equipment and equipment component symbols. boilers. page 153 • Place Multiple Representations. heat exchangers. Equipment components are items associated with pieces of equipment. the software automatically creates a group relationship between the equipment and the component. specific trays can be flagged for placement inside the piece of equipment. such as towers. you or your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols as needed for your plant. Depending on the rules defined for the equipment or equipment component. However. You also place equipment components in drawings. For example. page 164 • Place Equipment. and reactors. such as nozzles and trays. As a group. you can only associate an equipment component with a single piece of equipment. the components move when you move the equipment. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. the component is associated with the last selected or highlighted piece of equipment. As you place equipment components. When you place an equipment component. you can have limits to the possible placements for the equipment. page 154 152 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Equipment: An Overview You can place various types of equipment in your drawing. However. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation.

approach the tank from the right when placing the nozzle. Or. Drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing. page 244 Move an Item Using the Move Button. Position the item and release to place it. Tip In addition. page 242 Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle. see Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. 2. page 219 • If the Properties window is not displayed. In the Catalog Explorer list view. the opening of the nozzle will be placed in the direction that you approach the tank during placement. Flanged Nozzle-Internal. For more information. You can use the same steps for placing equipment. Nozzle-Internal. enter values for the equipment properties in the appropriate rows in the table. and Pump Nozzle-Internal can all be placed internally (for example. you can click the item in the Catalog Explorer list view and then click the appropriate point in the drawing to place the item. or move most items using their component handles. you can mirror. 4. 3. In other words. click the equipment that you want to place. For internal placement of equipment. If you want the nozzle opening facing to the right. For more information. in a tank). Press Esc to quit placement mode. • Tip • You can assign heat tracing to equipment. you can display it by selecting the item and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. you drag the nozzle to the interior of a tank and place it. rotate. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 153 . In the Properties window. see Assign Heat Tracing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place Equipment 1. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. Notes • After you place items.

1. Attach the nozzle to the equipment that you want it related to. Tip A multiple representation allows the depiction of an item from another drawing in a detailed or alternate view.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • If you need to place a nozzle so that it is associated with equipment but not attached to it. drag the nozzle an arbitrary distance away from the equipment. Equipment . 2.Vessels). While holding down the Alt key. Open a drawing and place an item of equipment. Open the drawing that is a target for your multiple representation (parent-child representations) of an item. Select a filter that best describes the type of item you want to represent (for example. 154 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Be sure the drawing used in step 1 is closed. You can choose a filter from the list using the Engineering Data Editor. Save your work and exit the drawing. Related Topics Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. Display the parent item in the Engineering Data Editor. page 408 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. 3. page 152 • Place Multiple Representations 1. • Tips • You can find the parent item in the Engineering Data Editor by clicking the Other Drawings button . Select the nozzle. page 215 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. You can think of a multiple representation as a child item associated with the parent item that already exists in another drawing. 2. you can do the following. 3. 4.

In the Engineering Data Editor. • 6. Select Place Multiple Representation from the shortcut menu. If you are working in a project. • • Related Topics • Placing Equipment: An Overview. Click the location in the drawing where you need to place the multiple representation. You are permitted only a single representation of an item in any one drawing. Equipment SubClass. Notes • You can use the Replace command or the Find and Replace dialog box to replace a multiple representation symbol providing the definition attributes for the source (parent) and target (child) are identical. 7. 5. The definition attributes are Equipment Class. page 152 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. right-click the icon at the far left of the parent item. be aware that multiple representations are constrained because of claiming and moving drawings between projects and the Plant.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview You can also open a tabular view of your target drawing in the Design window by clicking Window > New > Engineering Data Editor. and Equipment Type. page 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 155 .

The software places handles. At the time that the connection is made. The software also provides a shortcut menu associated with lines. the properties of the surviving pipe run are retained and the others are lost. The Break Run command is still available for this purpose. use the commands on the Line Routing ribbon to help construct or modify the line. Of course when two pipe runs with differing properties are joined into one. they are not automatically joined together. Similarly. or connect lines. When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at a component that belongs to an existing pipe run. You use this menu to break runs or join runs. The zero length pipe run that gets created when one inline component is placed directly up against another inline component is automatically joined to the existing pipe run. you can manipulate all lines by using the same basic procedures. You can add vertices to add segments to the line using the commands on the Line Routing ribbon. reroute. the new pipe run is automatically joined with the existing pipe run. then the pipe run must be broken. represented by black squares or dots. Lines consist of a series of line segments. Line Connectivity When a new pipe run is placed such that it connects to existing pipe runs at either end. Right-click a line and choose from several commands. the Join Runs command is still available for this purpose. the two pipe runs are joined and the new connector is actually merged with the existing connector. When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at the endpoint of an existing connector. If two pipe runs have different properties.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Routing Lines: An Overview Whether you are routing pipe or signal lines. If they pass the property criteria. You can use these vertex handles to move. You can also use this menu to construct select sets of pipe runs. the properties for pipe runs with zero length connectors need not match. 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . if you must define two different properties for two parts of a single pipe run. Pipe runs that only have zero length connectors are aggressively joined up with the pipe runs they attach to. at each segment vertex along the line route. the two pipe runs are tested for compatibility. they are automatically joined together. If you want them joined together. After you select a type of line route from the Catalog Explorer list view. The pipe run created in this way has a zero length connector that attaches the two symbols. too. those pipe runs are automatically joined together if they have the same properties. The automatic joining takes place in the same way for both placement and modification of connectors. The symbol placement command creates a new line when an inline component is placed directly up against an existing nozzle or other inline component.

Causes the software to insert line segments instead of routing new lines or instead of moving existing lines. Placing a new pipe run that connects to a reducer does not cause the pipe runs to be joined. but you can use it for any line routing. page 160 • Start a Line in Free Space. instead of the usual constraint of horizontal or vertical line routing. page 161 • Move a Line. page 220 • Start a Line from a Connect Point. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Pipe runs always consist of a linear sequence of members and never include any branches. page 161 • Move a Line. page 165 • Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. Insert Segment . page 164 • Branch to an Existing Line. This procedure is usually popular with signal and utility lines. Placing a pipe run that branches off of an existing pipe run does not cause them to be joined together. Related Topics Branch from an Existing Line. page 159 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 157 . Alter Segment .Allows you to route lines in any direction. page 159 Line Routing Ribbon Appears when you select a line element from the Catalog Explorer list view or the Engineering Data Editor or when you select an existing line in a drawing. page 162 • Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. page 162 • Break a Pipe Run. Note • All of the above information about pipe runs also applies to signal runs. page 220 • Start a Line in Free Space. Reducers are always located at the end of a pipe run and never in the middle. You can dock the Line Routing ribbon in the main toolbar. it remains there for the current design session unless you move it again.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Route a Line 1. When the line is complete. 2. Click to place the vertex at the next point in the line. 5. page 156 158 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Tips • This action displays the Line Routing ribbon and starts line placement mode. In the Catalog Explorer list view select the line that you want to place. 3. Tip • You can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times. Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. Continue clicking to place the vertices of the line in the drawing. too. • 4. Click a connect point on an item in the drawing. • Tip You can click an empty point in the drawing to start the line. right-click to confirm the placement.

Tip • If you want to route the line to a connect point of an existing item. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 159 . 2. 4. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties. click the connect point of the appropriate item to place the line. Notes • You can define values for the properties of a line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. In the Catalog Explorer list view or the Engineering Data Editor. click the starting point for the line route. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. If the Properties window does not appear. In the drawing. Click the location for each vertex of the line. Tip Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction. • 3. click the line that you want to place.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Start a Line in Free Space 1. When you complete the line route. including the termination point. right-click to place the line.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Start a Line from a Connect Point 1. • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. right-click to place the line. Click the location for each vertex of the line route. When you complete the line route. You can define values for the properties of a line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. 3. page 156 160 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the final right-click in the last step above. If the Properties window is not displayed. press Esc to quit line placement mode. 2. Notes • To stop placing lines in the drawing. 4. Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. click the type of line that you want to place. In the Catalog Explorer list view. click the connect point from which you want to start routing your line. In the drawing. Or.

3. page 156 Insert a Vertex into an Existing Line 1. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 161 . In the drawing. press Alt and drag the new vertex You can also insert line segments into an existing line. Notes • The line remains selected until you click another item or command. You can also break a line at a point. You can join two pipe runs that have different property values. For more information. The resulting pipe run has the properties of the pipe run that you selected first. 2. select the existing line that you want to insert a segment into. For more information. click Insert Segment Tip Instead of clicking Insert Segment. • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. • . Drag the selected line to the new position. If the Properties window is not displayed. 2. Notes • . you can hold Shift while moving a line to insert segments. Press Esc to stop adding segments. page 161. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. On the Line Routing ribbon. Select the line that you want to add a vertex to. page 165. see Break a Pipe Run. When the pointer turns into a double arrow to the appropriate location. You can change values for properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. see Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. Point near the center of the line where you want the new vertex. 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line 1.

Notes • Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. click the starting point for the branch. Or. click a point on the existing line where you want to end the branch. In the drawing. click a point on an existing line route to begin placing the branch. 2. In the Catalog Explorer list view. 4. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the final right-click in the last step above. In the drawing. To complete the line route. 3. In the Catalog Explorer list view. click the type of line that you want to place. If the Properties window is not displayed. • • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. When you complete the line. 4. you can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the last step above. To stop placing lines in the drawing. 3. Or. a point on an existing line. 2. Notes • The starting point for a branch can be a point in free space. press Esc to quit line placement mode. page 156 Branch to an Existing Line 1. Click to place each vertex of the line branch. click the type of line that you want to place. You can extend a line to an existing line to create another branch point. To stop placing lines in the drawing. right-click to place it. or a connect point on an item in the drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Branch from an Existing Line 1. press Esc to quit line placement mode. Click to place each vertex of the line branch. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. • • 162 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can display it by selecting the line and then clicking Edit > Properties on the main menu bar.

2. If the Properties window is not displayed. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Then on the same line. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 163 . page 269 • Routing Lines: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. click the position for the other side of the gap. click the position for one side of the gap. page 156 Add a Manual Gap to a Line 1. 3. see Scale a Parametric Item. Note • Gaps are parametric symbols. page 239. For more information on resizing parametric symbols. You can resize the gap by dragging the parametric handles. Select the appropriate gap from the Catalog Explorer. Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. On the line. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar.

or instrument that you want to specify heat tracing for. • • Related Topics Assign Heat Tracing. pipe run. Select the equipment.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign Heat Tracing 1. Tips • If you have already specified insulation properties for the item. specify values for the HT Medium. 2. page 152 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. Select list values are defined in Data Dictionary Manager. page 258 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. page 164 • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. In the Properties window. Format Manager contains definitions for temperature units. piping component. your choices of insulation properties and specifications are restricted. You choose the HT Medium and HT Requirement properties from select lists. You choose the units for the HT Medium Temp property when you assign the temperature value. then you cannot subsequently assign heat tracing properties. page 156 • 164 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . If you assign heat tracing to an item before you assign insulation properties. page 174 • Routing Lines: An Overview. HT Medium Temp. and HT Requirement properties.

right-click the pipe run that you want to break. In the drawing. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 165 . 3. Tip • The software breaks the selected pipe run into two separate runs at the selected point. page 156 • Break a Pipe Run 1. • Related Topics • Join Pipe Runs. page 165 • Routing Lines: An Overview. If the Properties window is not displayed. then you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties. 2. After selecting this command from the Line shortcut menu. page 166 • Routing Lines: An Overview. In the drawing. Notes • You can change values for the properties of the new run by clicking it and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. On the shortcut menu. click Break Runs. click the line at the point you want the break it. Related Topics Break a Pipe Run.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break Run Command Line Shortcut Menu > Break Run Enables you to break a pipe run at an arbitrary location. click the point where you want to break the run.

right-click the first pipe run that you want to join. • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 165. Related Topics • Join Pipe Runs. For information about breaking runs. You can change values for the properties of the new run by clicking the pipe run and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. In the drawing. the resulting pipe run has the properties of the pipe run that you selected first. 3. 2. In the drawing. see Break a Pipe Run. Notes • If you join two pipe runs with different properties. click the second pipe run to join the two runs. page 166 • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 156 166 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . click on the line that you want to join to the selected line. After selecting this command from the Line shortcut menu. On the shortcut menu. If the Properties window does not appear.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Join Runs Command Line Shortcut Menu > Join Runs Enables you to join two lines together into one pipe run. click Join Runs. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. page 156 Join Pipe Runs 1.

Generally. page 164 • Place a Piping Component. the valve automatically orients itself vertically.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using Piping Components: An Overview Piping components are graphic elements that represent processes or functions within a particular piping segment. flanges. The software includes a standard group of piping component symbols. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 167 . piping components automatically orient themselves when you drag them near an existing pipe segment. to review the possible placements for the component and select a final orientation for the item. the software automatically creates a relationship between the pipe route and the component to create a pipe run. page 167 Place a Piping Component 1. In the Catalog Explorer list view. 3. if you drag a horizontal valve to a vertical pipe. Position the item and release. and strainers. 2. In the Properties window. Piping components include valves. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. piping components are connected with lines. 4. As you place piping components. In drawings. or PickQuick. click the piping component that you want to place. For example. reducers. Drag the item to the appropriate pipe run in the drawing. you can use the Configuration tool. the pipe route and the associated piping components both move. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols in Catalog Manager as needed. you can display it by selecting the component and then selecting Edit > Properties. Tip • If the Properties window does not appear. When you move the pipe run. However. Your plant administrator can modify the relationships between piping components and piping in Rule Manager. enter values for the properties of the piping component in the appropriate rows in the table. If several possible orientations exist for the piping component.

Place the first component in the line. you must drag one off of the segment to disconnect it and then move it back to get the connect points attached. drag one component along the line away from the other leaving the desired distance between the two. Place the second component into the line and connected to the connect point of the first component on the end that you want to attach to. the piping component is placed in free space if the placement rules allow the action.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • As you drag piping components over a pipe run. the pipe run is highlighted. you can use the Alt key as you drag the component. If you want to be able to place two inline components an arbitrary distance apart. the line routes itself so as to preserve its connection to the component. regardless of minimum distance settings in Options Manager. or the pointer passes over runs while you are in placement mode. page 156 • Using Piping Components: An Overview. do the following. If the components are already close to each other but not connected at coincident connect points. 1. Then even if you drag the component away from the line. you can use the Configuration tool. You can see that the connect points are actually joined by the black rectangle in the Drawing view: • • 3. • If you want to move a piping component but preserve its connection to the pipe run. page 167 168 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . While holding down the Alt key. If you place a piping component when a pipe segment is not highlighted. or PickQuick to select the appropriate placement for the item. 2. If the item that you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview.

dll. pressures. which is activated by assigned settings in Options Manager. The database tables and library files in the 3D product provide source information for the validation and search. and alternate operating cases.us_pjstb. pdpjsx. and diameters assigned to the pipe run and to search commodity codes and fabrication categories for piping components. starts the Piping Specification utility and triggers the commodity code and fabrication category lookups when a nominal diameter is changed.pdtable_102 table ra schema . us_pjstb. see Options Manager Help.l. The Service Limits validation requires at least one complete temperature-pressure pair from among design. see Data Dictionary Manager Help. If any temperature-pressure pair violates the service limits of the selected Piping Materials Class.l. alternate design. the ValidateNomDiam. In Data Dictionary Manager. a warning displays the appropriate pairs. For more information about assigning program IDs. PDS 3D Files Used For PipeSpec • • • • pd schema . operating.pdtable_201 and pdtable_202 tables library files . and ValidateServiceLimits. and us_pjstb.dll Performing Service Limits Validation The Piping Specification utility verifies that the temperatures and pressures assigned to a pipe run comply with the service limits associated with the selected Piping Materials Class. this verification occurs each time that you modify either the Piping Materials Class or a temperature – pressure pair in the process case data of the pipe run.r.dll files . For more information about modifying the PipeSpec settings. which is assigned to the Nominal Diameter property. This warning appears in the design software by appending an error string to the name of the PMC. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 169 .ForeignCalc program ID.dll.l.PipeSpec.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview The Piping Specification utility works with PDS 3D or SmartPlant 3D to validate the piping materials class with the temperatures. The service limits validation and automatic commodity code lookup can be disabled simultaneously using a switch in Options Manager.t . pdpjs.dll. In continuous validation mode.

A relationship between the fabrication category and the commodity name can be defined in the 3D databases. If multiple records are obtained in the lookup. this lookup occurs each time the Piping Materials Class or any of the four case Max temperatures (Design. this unique name is the AABBCC Code property. a value of -9999 for maximum temperature in pdtable_202 indicates a null value. and that the nominal diameter of the piping component must be specified. an error is recorded in the error-log file with the appropriate message. but if the modification occurs on a property of a pipe run. The Commodity Name is a unique name for every symbol. If the modification occurs on a property of a piping component. then the Commodity Code property displays an error message. 170 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In the continuous validation mode. then the lookup insures this value is larger than all of the process case temperatures assigned to the pipe run in which the piping component resides. then a value of zero Deg-K is assumed for each of the unspecified temperatures. in PDS 3D. and Alternate Operating) are modified on the pipe run. Alternate Design. The Fabrication Category property of inline piping components is a select-listed property in SmartPlant P&ID. then the lookup is restricted to that particular component. The minimum requirements to cause a lookup are that the piping component must be in a pipe run. Validation also occurs each time the Option Code or Nominal Diameter of the component is modified. Note • The units for the PDS 3D maximum temperature are those specified in Options Manager. Operating.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Performing Commodity Code and Fabrication Category Look Up The Piping Specification utility looks up the Commodity Code and Fabrication Category properties of inline piping components. and the process case temperatures on the pipe run are ignored for the lookup. In PDS 3D. If not. If any temperature values for the pipe run are unspecified. If a maximum temperature exists for that component. then the lookup encompasses every piping component on that run. For example. If the PMC is assigned but does not comply with the service limits. The PipeSpec utility uses process case temperatures of the run during the commodity code lookup only if the code for that component has a maximum temperature limit value in the 3D database. that the PMC of the pipe run must be populated and comply with service limits. then the utility returns a commodity code only if all of the records have the same code value. SmartPlant symbols are assigned the same AABBCC Code properties in Catalog Manager.

For example.log file in the directory assigned to the TEMP environment variable. This can include checking service limits. Short Value for the Option Code select list contains the PDS 3D indices corresponding to the appropriate Option Code text in SmartPlant P&ID. page 172 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 171 . the missing properties are listed in the log file. and depending on the settings in Options Manager. This functionality is not available unless the proper settings are defined in Options Manager and the applicable Program IDs are assigned in Data Dictionary Manager. you can refer to the SmartPlant P&ID Installation Guide by clicking Help > Printable Guides. The PipeSpec utility uses the entries in the Short Value box of the Option Code list to obtain the Option Code used in the PDS 3D database tables. For more information about Piping Specification configuration. and allows you to choose a PMC from a piping specification. Choose one. Error messages help you identify the cause of failure when the utility does not complete the tasks as expected. Note • Error messages are placed in the PipeSpecError.Lists the PMCs in your piping specification.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Similarly. page 172 Piping Specifications Dialog Box Opens when you click the Calc button for the Piping Materials Class property (PMC) for a pipe run in the Properties window. while it is a set of code numbers or indices in PDS 3D. Related Topics • Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. the Option Code property is a select list of text values in SmartPlant P&ID. page 173 • Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. page 173 • Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. property validation for piping segments and inline components is run. Related Topics • Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. if minimum requirements are not met for the lookup. Piping materials class .

• • Related Topics • Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview. Notes • If you subsequently assign nominal diameters to inline valves or other components. Maximum Design Pressure. 1. For more information. then the commodity code property becomes Not In Spec. For more information. you can manually assign commodity codes to inline components. page 173. On the Piping Specifications dialog box. If you choose temperature-pressure limits for process cases that do not agree with the assigned PMC. including inline components. Select the Piping Materials Class property for the pipe run in the Properties window. and so forth. that does not exist for the assigned PMC. Maximum Design Temperature. and the PipeSpec utility looks up accepted diameters and validates the assignment. Click the Calc button . choose the appropriate PMC from the list and click OK. page 169 172 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . for instance. Select the pipe run. then the error Service Limits Error is added to the PMC for the run. Given the appropriate settings in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. such as Nominal Diameter. SmartPlant P&ID assigns commodity codes and fabrication categories to them that correspond to the PMC of the pipe run and the specifications in your 3D databases. 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec Important The PipeSpec utility is not available unless the appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. 4. If you choose a diameter. see Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. • 2. Tip • Based on the chosen PMC and other assigned properties. respectively. the PipeSpec utility copies properties and checks limits in the entire run. see those Help files.

respectively. • 2. • • • Related Topics • Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview. page 169 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 173 . or you can open the error log. see those Help files. PipeSpecError. you can still click the Calc button for the Commodity Code property and choose a code. but so it the Fabrication Category property for the inline components. In the Properties window. see Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. given that the relationship exists in the 3D databases. not only is the commodity code defined automatically. if properties have not been assigned as expected. However this does not verify that the component agrees with a piping specification. click Related Topics. define the Nominal Piping Diameter property for the component. Tip • You can verify that a commodity code and fabrication category have been assigned in the Properties window. if the relationship is defined in your 3D database. Select an inline component that belongs to a pipe run whose piping material class has been defined. 1. For more information about the error log.log. page 172. Adding or changing the option code can change the commodity code.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec Important The PipeSpec utility is not available unless the appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. For more information. With continuous validation. then a pipe run with temperature-pressure limits that do not agree with its PMC produces the error Error in PMC in the commodity code for an inline component. For more information on assigning a PMC. For information about the settings required for continuous service limits validation. If continuous validation is not activated but other appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned. Notes • If continuous validation is turned on for the PipeSpec utility. see Options Manager Help.

or electrical switches. and pressure regulators. such as flow or temperature. the pipe segment appears selected. computing devices. flow indicators. and system functions such as digital control stations or computers. Instruments loops are a group of one or more instruments or control functions arranged so that signals can transfer from one function to the next to measure and control a process variable. and piping. flow controllers.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Instrumentation: An Overview You can place various types of instrumentation in your drawing. and other instrument components. page 175 • Place an Offline Instrument. Instrument Loops You can create instrument loops containing any combination of inline and offline instruments. the instrument is placed in free space. inline instruments. such as orifice plates. page 180 • 174 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Offline Instruments Offline instruments are components that you do not insert into a piping segment. such as orifice plates. Instruments can be items such as flow control elements. If you place an inline instrument when a pipe segment is not selected. Inline Instruments Inline instruments are components that you can insert into a piping segment. As you drag inline instruments over a pipe segment. Instruments are devices used directly or indirectly to measure or control a variable. flow controllers. these instruments monitor and control inline instruments. The software includes a standard group of instrument and instrument loop symbols. Signal lines are intelligent line strings that connect offline instruments. such as pressure regulator valves. level gauges. Two types of instruments exist: inline instruments and offline instruments. Inline instruments include instrument valves. page 164 • Place an Inline Instrument. Offline instruments include flow controllers. however. your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols as your plant requires. Typically. Related Topics Add Instruments to a Loop. in a plant process. page 177 • Remove an Instrument from a Loop. page 178 • Assign Heat Tracing.

or PickQuick. simply type %. Search for . In the Properties window. Notes • As you drag inline instruments over a pipe run. In the Catalog Explorer list view or the stockpile. page 180 Place an Inline Instrument 1. you can use the Configuration tool.Finds and displays the loop tags that match the criteria in the Search for box. page 177 • Remove an Instrument from a Loop. This dialog box opens when you click the ellipses (.. 3. click the inline instrument that you want to place. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 175 . page 175 • Place an Offline Instrument. Drag the item to the appropriate line in the drawing. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. 4. Tip • If the Properties window is not visible.. to select the appropriate placement for the item.Allows you to type in descriptors to display the available loop tags. specify properties of the inline instrument in the appropriate rows in the table. %. Search Now . limited by parameters that you enter here. If you want to display all available loop tags. If you place an inline instrument when a pipe segment is not selected. 2. Position the item and release it. If the item you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. The percent character. page 178 • Place an Inline Instrument. if you want to list only loop tags that contain the letter F.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window) Allows you to search for and specify the loop tag for the item whose properties currently appear in the Properties window. is a wildcard. you could type %F% in the Search for box.) button next to the loop tag cell. For example. the pipe run appears selected. You can choose a tag from the main window and click OK in order to assign the tag to the item whose properties currently appear in the Properties window. you can display it by selecting the instrument and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. the instrument is placed in free space if rules defined in Rule Manager allow such a placement.

page 156 176 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • While placing an inline instrument on a pipe run with associated heat tracing. Validation takes place between the pipe run and the inline components on that pipe run with the result that you may see some properties values being copied from the pipe run to the inline component. You can use Data Dictionary Manager to sort the properties by Validation ID using the Piperun table.ForeignCalc in the Validation ID field for the PipeRun Property. MaterialOfConstClass. This copying behavior is based upon the pipe run properties that should have their values copied to the in-line components. if the pointer is below the pipe run. you can decide the orientation for the heat tracing on the inline instrument at placement time. Nominal diameter is also included although it does not have that particular Validation ID specified. You may determine which properties should be copied. • Related Topics • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. Notice the only attributes that are delivered with this validation ID. page 174 • Routing Lines: An Overview. They are CleaningReqmts. This is configurable by adding the ProgID called UpdInlineCompProp. then an update to the pipe run will update the inline component. If the values were different.ForeignCalc is not delivered as part of our sample validation. By keeping the pointer either above or below the piping. CoatingReqmts. and ScheduleOrThickness. then the heat tracing appears above the instrument and vice versa – regardless of the heat tracing orientation on the piping. You must specify that particular validation id in order to use the functionality. When a value for one of the affected attributes changes on the pipe run. Also. The way this works with the attributes that have that ID is that the software is watching the pipe run and the inline components. and it was previously equivalent to the value on the inline component. the routine UpdInlineCompProp. It has the one involved in the pipe spec access. updating the pipe run will not affect the inline component.

Or. Position the item and release to place it. too. • Notes • If you place an offline instrument over an existing signal line. 2. • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. enter values for the properties of the instrument in the appropriate rows in the table. or move them. page 164. For more information. you can mirror. After you place items. the software inserts the offline instrument in the signal line. click the offline instrument that you want to place. You can assign heat tracing to offline instruments.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Offline Instrument 1. page 174 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 177 . page 215 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. In the Properties window. 4. Tip You can click an item from Catalog Explorer and then place it by clicking the appropriate location in your drawing. just as piping components are inserted into pipe runs. you can connect them to piping segments or inline instruments using signal lines. see Assign Heat Tracing. then you can display it by selecting the instrument and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. rotate. In the Catalog Explorer list view. After you place offline instruments. • Tips • If the Properties window is not visible. you can escape placement mode by rightclicking. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing. 3.

2. Or you can open the Engineering Data Editor to display elements of the loop. On the Loop Tag dialog box. The software automatically generates a unique item tag for the instrument. Instead. Notes • Selecting the item tag of the loop for an instrument triggers the Item Tag Validation program. you can create a customized loop report to generate lists of items in specific loops in your drawing or plant. right-click the instrument loop that you want to place. enter characters in the Search for box in order to display the available loop tags. You can assign the Loop Tag qualifier to instruments that you have already placed in your drawing or that reside in the stockpile. clear selection of the instrument and then select it again. and you can either place instruments then create the loop or create the loop and assign instruments to it as you place them. 7.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Add Instruments to a Loop 1. For more information about moving plant item groups from one stockpile to another. Instrument loops normally reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. you do not need to place the loop symbol in the drawing itself to create an occurrence. Select Send to Drawing Stockpile or Send to Stockpile from the shortcut menu. or you can click the Calculation button next to the Loop Tag box in the Properties window. 5. After you create instrument loops. The software automatically generates an item tag when you enter a tag suffix. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. • • • • • • 178 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 8. Select the item that you want to associate with the instrument loop. From the Catalog Explorer tree view Loops node. Moving the instrument loop itself to another stockpile has special limitations. Since loops are logical collections of instruments rather than physical groupings. 3. Click Search Now. Choose the appropriate loop from the resulting list. 6. You can assign a group of instruments and other elements to a loop by creating a select set of them and assigning the correct loop tag for the set. Define properties for the loop by entering values in the Properties window. page 265. Select the item tag of the loop from the Loop Tag select list in the Properties window. placing the loop in the stockpile adds the loop to the model. If you need to refresh the instrument Loop Tag Suffix display in the Properties window. 4.

page 175 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 83 • Updating Associated Instruments with Loop Properties (Properties Window) 1.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • If the Properties window is not visible. page 38 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. page 174 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 175 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. you can display it by selecting the instrument or loop and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. Related Topics Generating Reports: An Overview. page 331 • Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window). 2. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 174 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Click in a checkbox to select and update the instrument associated to the displayed loop. page 38 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 179 . page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 331 • Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window). Click OK.

select the item or items that you want to remove from the loop.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Remove an Instrument from a Loop 1. page 174 180 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. too. The Delete command is not carried out if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. You can remove an instrument from a loop by deleting the item from the model. validation automatically creates an instrument item tag. 2. If the Properties window is not visible. select the item or items in the drawing. • • • Related Topics • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. the instrument item tag remains the same until the instrument is assigned to a new loop. In the drawing. In the Properties window. you can display it by selecting the item and then clicking Edit > Properties. remove the value for the Loop Tag property for the selection. You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items from the drawing. Notes • When an instrument is assigned to a loop. If you remove the loop tag property. First.

Whenever you select a label. Break Labeled Item Type Placement Type Leader Line Terminator Type Offset Distance Offset Source Behavior Area Break Title Block Yes 1-Point Flow Arrow Yes 1-Point Component Yes 1. Note If you enter text with a recognized unit of measure using a quotes or double-quotes. Different labels have different label properties. When placing a label later. Nonetheless. A label always reflects the current property values of the item that it labels. the predefined property value in the label overwrites the current property value on the item that it labels. these properties perform their function in the background and are invisible to you. you can place free text in an item note.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Labeling: An Overview Your main tool to add or edit text content that appears in a label is the Properties window. the software parses the UOM and ignores the double-quotes (or tick marks). you have an easier method to find to the label properties. the corresponding labeled properties for its item appear in the Properties window. Labels that do not overwrite the property at placement are called driven labels. In other words.or 2-Point Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Yes Fit Graphics to Text Yes SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 181 . The same properties appear in the long list of properties when you select the item itself. these properties dictate label placement behavior. Labels that populate a property at placement are called driving labels. you are entering data into the database. At label creation time. By adding or editing text. you cannot edit text such as OLL= on the OLL Elevation Equipment label. Since only the label properties appear when the label is selected. You do not see label properties while using the design software. After the creation of a label. the plant administrator can define text content inside the label with the SmartText editor in Catalog Manager. Labels are defined as driven or driving in Catalog Manager. The following table identifies some of the label properties that are defined during label creation in Catalog Manager.

empty labels display a question mark so that you can find them more easily and not unnecessarily repeat work. flow arrow. and break) appear in columns. First. the first click also identifies the end of the leader. Since there is no symbology associated with this type of label. However. You can add a leader line to a label by right-clicking on the label and choosing Leader line display. If you place such a label. Labels can have two-point placement or one-point placement. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. but the properties that normally appear have not been entered yet. Afterwards. Labels can be moved by selecting the label and dragging the black square at the center of the label. like 1. 182 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you have an empty label. If you place a leader line with the label. Special notes. that is. Drag the label to the location that you want it to occupy in the drawing. Label properties appear in rows. page 188 • Place an Annotation. indicate that the property applies under certain conditions. you cannot change the placement type in the design software. You set the placement type of a label at its creation in Catalog Manager. the Short Description label for Equipment). • • • Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line. it would be essentially invisible on the drawing. Not applicable indicates that the property does not apply to that type of label. Yes indicates that the property applies to that type of label. page 211 Placing Labels: An Overview You can place a label in a few basic steps.Point for one-point placement. You use two-point placement when you need one click to identify the item to label and a second click to indicate a different location for the label. You use one-point placement when a single point in the drawing identifies both the item to label and the location of the label. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. you select the label that you want from Catalog Explorer and then identify the item in the drawing that you want to label. Some labels have no symbology associated with them. they contain text only (for example. component.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Table notes: • The four types of labels (title block.

you break the pipe run. A label and its assigned leader line follow when you move a line. All delivered labels use plant default units. the software automatically creates and stores a matching connector in either a plant or project stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing. The matching connector receives the value. the software stops the sharing of data between segments of pipe. When you place a property break label. Change units in the SmartText Editor dialog in Catalog Manager to specify a different unit of measure in a label. • • • • Related Topics Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. for example. A line label follows a line when you change its angle. You must replace those labels individually to see the change whether those labels use the plant default setting or have the value set uniquely. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. When you place an off-page connector (OPC). changing temperature from K to °C) does not change labels that are already placed in drawings. for example. When you recalculate a line. In other words.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • Changing default label formats in Options Manager (for example. for example). where the number corresponds to the drawing. the software does not delete the label but repositions it in an associated location on the line. the software automatically updates the matching connector in the original drawing (To Drawing 122. and so labels do not always display the units selected in the Properties window. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. After you place the matching connector from the stockpile into the related drawing. page 188 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 183 . which are defined in Options Manager. changing from horizontal to vertical. From Drawing 123.

This valve received a label with one-point placement. You can edit the database properties for the labeled item after you have placed the label. and an Offset Source value of local. 2. the software places the component label. Properties include an Offset Distance value of . page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview. When you click the valve. • Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement. Notes • Labels are a special class of item in Catalog Explorer. If the properties of the label require two-point placement. 3. 184 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You point to the valve. If the label is designed for two-point placement.5 inch. These properties are set in Catalog Manager during label creation. click again to place the label where you want it in relation to other items in the drawing. page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. a Cursor Location value of above midpoint. An example of onepoint placement is placing an ID label on a valve. you must use item placement mode instead of the drag method. Depending on the definition of the label.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Label from Catalog Explorer 1. Click the item in the drawing that you want to label. An example of twopoint placement is placing an equipment label on a pump. you place labels with one-point or two-point placement. and it is highlighted indicating that you can place a label. Select the label that you want from the Catalog Explorer list view. consider placement of a Tag ID label on a valve. page 187 One-Point Label Placement To illustrate placing a label with this placement method. no leader line.

For a pipe run. the local origin. The center of the bounding box is (0. The property for offset source also affects label placement. Pointer position determines if you place the label above or below the component. The alignment axis is perpendicular to the line at this point. Offset is always a positive value. that value overrides the Options Manager setting. A value of Zero offset distance aligns the bounding boxes. the software aligns the center of the label at the center of the item receiving the label. page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. If the pointer appears above the center (that is. This y-axis alignment line crosses the center of the labeled item. The label remains in dynamics (you can move the label to a different location before you place it) so you can confirm correct placement. the y coordinate is a positive value) you are placing the label above the item. the label immediately moves to this position. the center is the point where the pointer touches the line. Label Offset options can be universally applied by inputting a value in the Distances option in Options Manager. These midpoints always align when you place a label with one-point placement. If the pointer appears below the center (that is. The dots represent the center of the bounding box. page 188 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 185 . if a label offset is designated for the label during creation in Catalog Manager. The tolerance for the Select command determines the distance above and below the pipe run.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview The dots on the valve and label are not part of these drawing items. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. the software uses the default offset distance. When you point to locations in the drawing and locate a valid target. the y coordinate is a negative value) you are placing the label below the item. In this example. page 21 • Manipulate a Leader Line. Midpoints align at the y-axis of the local coordinate system of the symbol with the label. however. designated in Options Manager. If the value for offset source is None. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. This action allows you to place labels on a line and at the center of symbols.0).

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a One-Point Label
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the label that you want to place. 2. Drag the label to the appropriate place in the drawing. 3. Release the label when the target is highlighted. Tips

When you drag a label over an appropriate target, the target is highlighted.

The pointer position, in relation to the item when you place the label, determines if you place the label above or below the item in the drawing. 4. In the Properties window, select or type values for the properties of the label in the appropriate rows in the table, if needed.

Notes

Title blocks, flow arrows, off-page connectors, and some component labels use one-point placement. A label display always reflects the values of the item with which it is associated. Labels that populate the item values at placement time are called driving labels. In other words, the predefined properties in the label overwrite current item properties when the label is placed. Labels that do not overwrite the item properties are called driven labels. Labels are defined as driven or driving in Catalog Manager. If you place flow arrow labels on a pipe run, the direction of the arrow changes depending on the flow direction of the pipe run. If the pipe run has no direction defined for it, the direction of the flow arrow label defines the flow direction of the pipe run. You can use the Configuration Tool, or PickQuick, to select the direction of a flow arrow as you place it. If you place an off-page connector on a pipe in the drawing, the software fills in the connector number and automatically adds a second off-page connector to either the Stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing. When you place the second connector in a drawing, the software automatically updates the number and name of the drawings in both offpage connectors. To display a leader line for the label, right-click the label, and then select Leader line display on the shortcut menu. If the Properties window is not visible, you can display it by selecting a label and then clicking Edit > Properties on the main menu bar.

186 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool, page 146 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

Two-Point Label Placement
To illustrate placing a label with this placement method consider placement of an Equipment ID label on a pump. When you point to the pump, it is highlighted, indicating that you can place the label. When you click the pump, the software recognizes the pump as a target for the label. That action is the first point of two-point placement. At the location on the drawing that you want actually to place the label, click again. That action is the second point of two-point placement. After the first click, the pointer changes from a northwest arrow, , to a four-headed arrow, , until you place the label with your second click. During the time between the first and second clicks, the label is attached to the pointer.

This pump received a label by using two-point placement. (1) and (2) illustrate the two pointer positions and clicks required to place this label. Properties include a Rotation value of false and a Leader line value of true. These properties are set through Catalog Manager during label creation. With two-point placement, the software does not use properties for offset distance or pointer location. You can place the first point anywhere on the item to receive the label. The leader line points to this location. Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a Two-Point Label, page 188

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 187

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a Two-Point Label
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the label that you want to place. 2. In the drawing click the item that you want to label. Tip As the pointer passes over an appropriate target item for the label, the software highlights the item. To label the item, click the item when the software highlights it. 3. Click the location in the drawing for the label.

4. Quit label placement mode by pressing Esc. Tip Or, you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. 5. In the Properties window, specify the properties of the label in the appropriate rows.

Tip

If the Properties window is not displayed, you can display it by selecting the label and then clicking Edit > Properties.

Notes

After you place a label, you can move it and manipulate its leader line. For more information, see Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190

Property break labels and various types of component labels require twopoint placement.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Place a Break Label, page 196 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement, page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

188 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Copy Labels
1. In the Drawing view, select the label that you want to copy. 2. Right-click the label and select Place New from the shortcut menu. 3. Associate the new label icon that appears at the end of the pointer with the new item by highlighting the item and clicking. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview, page 253 • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182

Align Labels
1. In the Drawing view, select the labels that you want to align. Tip In order to align labels, you must be sure not to select any drawing items other than labels. You can remove an item from a select set by pressing Ctrl and clicking the item. 2. Click the appropriate alignment button on the main toolbar:
• • • • • • •

Align labels so that their bottom lines match Align labels so that their center points agree on a vertical line Align labels so that their center points agree on a horizontal line Align labels so that their left-most lines match Align labels so that their right-most lines match Align labels so that their top lines match

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 189

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Manipulate a Leader Line
1. Display the handles of the leader line by clicking the label that it belongs to. Tip In order to manipulate a leader line, you must display it. Right-click the label and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu. 2. Click a handle and drag the line to a new location.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182

Update Label Settings
1. Click Tools > Custom Commands. 2. On the Custom Commands dialog box, double-click UpdateLabelsCmd.dll. Tip

You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program.

Note

The UpdateLabelsCmd.dll refreshes the value of the currently placed label properties as displayed on the drawing. The command does not update the label based on modifications made to the label using Catalog Manager. To update the label if changes have been made using Catalog Manager, the label must be replaced in the drawing using Edit > Replace.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181

190 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Using the Types of Labels: An Overview
The type of label that you place determines the workflow that you follow. You define the label type when you create a label in Catalog Manager. As defined in Rule Manager, rules apply when you are placing a label. The following four types of labels are Title Block, Flow Arrow, Component, and Break. Title Block The title block label is unique among label types because you do not have to identify the item to receive the label. The title block usually displays general information about a drawing. After you select the label in the list view, you can drag it to the location in the drawing where you want to assign the label. You cannot modify label properties for a title block. The different template files, which create new drawing files, contain different title blocks. Therefore, you can automatically place standard title blocks in standard drawings, which are built on standard templates. Or, you can create custom title block labels to fit your custom templates.

Flow Arrow You place flow arrows in process piping lines. When you place the label, the arrow orients itself with the flow in the pipe run if you have already defined flow direction. If you have not specified a flow direction, then the direction you place the flow arrow defines it for you (that is, a flow arrow is a driving label). As you drag the label from the list view of Catalog Explorer, pipe runs in the Drawing view are highlighted when you pause over them. Click a highlighted pipe run to place the label. Flow arrows require only one click to place them.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 191

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview After placing the label, you can change the flow direction of the pipe run in the Properties window, and the flow arrow reorients itself accordingly. You cannot change label properties that appear in the Properties window for a flow arrow.

Component This type of label identifies physical commodities in the model. A typical example is an Equipment ID label. Properties assigned to the label affect its behavior. Component labels have a unique property: Label Behavior. The values are defined in a select list in Data Dictionary Manager and are chosen in Catalog Manager when you create a label. The default value is Follow. Values for this property can include the following:

Follow (no rotate) - The label does move but does not rotate, corresponding to changes to the labeled item. Follow - The label does move and rotate, corresponding to changes to the labeled item. Fixed - The label does not move if you move the labeled item.

This illustration shows component labels that you use to label vessels, nozzles, and piping components. It also depicts both fixed and rotated orientations of labels.

192 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break A break label, or property break label, graphically shows that a change occurs or can occur in a property at some point in the process. This label indicates to the software that an inconsistency for that property is acceptable. As a result, the software does not issue a warning, or an existing inconsistency resolves itself when you place the break. Break labels do not set properties but note that a value change is acceptable for the property at the indicated point. Text included in the label reflects the property at that point. You can associate multiple property breaks with one point on the drawing.

You place property break labels, in the Segment Breaks node of Catalog Explorer, with two-point placement. Notes

You can turn on or off the Is Leader Visible property in Catalog Manager. After you place the label, you can right-click the label, and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu to control the display of the leader line in the drawing software. Use care when you assign leader lines. You can place several break labels at one point, and multiple leader lines can be confusing.

Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 193

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a Title Block
1. Find the title block that corresponds to your drawing template in the Catalog Explorer List view. 2. Click the label and position it over the pre-defined title area on the drawing so that the elements of the label fall within the cells of the title area. 3. Click to place the title block. 4. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Tips

You can review the properties of the title block label in the Properties window, but for title blocks, you cannot modify those properties. If you want to modify drawing properties, which are displayed in the title block label, you can do so in Drawing Manager. For more information, see Drawing Manager Help. You can move the title block if you need to position it more carefully within the title area of the drawing. For more information, see Move an Item With the Select Tool, page 218.

Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement, page 184 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

Place a Flow Arrow
1. Find the flow arrow in the list view of Catalog Explorer and select it. 2. Position your pointer over the process line that you want to label. 3. If a flow direction has not been specified, then choose an orientation for the arrow so that it reflects the correct direction. Tips

If a flow direction has already been specified for the line, then the flow arrow orients itself so that it reflects that property.

If you pause over a line whose flow direction has not been defined, you can use PickQuick to position the flow arrow. 4. Click to place the flow arrow on the process line.

5. Continue placing flow arrows, or click Esc to quit placement mode. Note

You must change the flow direction of a line by changing the property in the Properties window. Do not rotate a flow arrow by using the Rotate command or the rotate handle in order to change the flow direction; flow direction is a property.

194 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

3. page 182 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. page 191 Place a Component Label 1. see Place a One-Point Label. Place the pointer over the component that you want to label. page 188. page 191 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 195 . Continue placing the same label or click Esc to quit placement mode. page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. From the list view in Catalog Explorer. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview. choose the label that you want to place. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Labeled Item Type. page 197 • One-Point Label Placement. depending on the label. page 186 and Place a Two-Point Label. page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. Related Topics • Labeled Item Type. 4. page 197 • One-Point Label Placement. 2. For more information. Place the label using either one-point or two-point placement methods.

Use care when you assign leader lines. After you place the label. Notes • You can turn on or off the Is Leader Visible property in Catalog Manager. page 191 196 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The first click (1) specifies the junction in the process line. page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. you can right-click the label. 2. Continue placing the same break label at other junctions in the drawing. select the break label that you want to place. From the List view in Catalog Explorer. • 3. and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu to control the display of the leader line in the drawing software. • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 313 • Placing Labels: An Overview. Place the break label using two-point placement. or press Esc to quit placement mode.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Break Label 1. page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. You can place several break labels at one point. Tip The Catalog Explorer Tree view node where break labels are located is called Segment Breaks. the second click (2) designates the location for the break label itself. and multiple leader lines can be confusing.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Label Properties: An Overview
The following label properties are available for specifying your labels.

Labeled Item Type
This property defines the type of item that your label is used with. When you create a label in Catalog Manager, you must specify this property; you cannot change it in the design software. The property must be defined correctly to allow you to place labels. When you create a label in Catalog Manager, you choose the labeled item type from the Item list in the SmartText Editor. That list is defined in Data Dictionary Manager, where all the valid item types are defined and stored. Examples of labeled item types include pipe run, instrument, piping component, equipment, and so forth. If you specify that the labeled item type is a pipe run, then you can place your label on a pipe run and not on any other type of item in your drawing. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Offset Distance
This property defines the distance from the labeled item to the label. Offset distance applies for labels that are defined with one-point placement. This property also applies for two-point label placement if the property for offset source is set to Local. The property must be defined correctly in Catalog Manager to allow you to place your label. The actual plant-wide offset distance is specified in Options Manager. The software measures the distance from the bounding box of the item to receive the label and the bounding box of the label itself. Consider the offset as the clearance distance between the bounding boxes. Notes

The bounding box in SmartPlant P&ID differs from the SmartSketch definition of range. SmartSketch (A) uses the x-y coordinate range around an item. SmartPlant P&ID (B) uses a rectangular area.

For a line segment, the bounding box is the line itself.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 197

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Offset Source
This property specifies the origin for the offset distance. The possible values for offset sources are None - The label does not have an offset. This value indicates placement at the center of the labeled item. Project Settings - Plant-level parameters determine the offset distance. You can use Options Manager to define the plant settings distance. Local - The label does have an offset, and the value for the Offset Distance property, which is specified in Catalog Manager, defines the offset to use. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Afterwards, you cannot change the offset source property in the drawing software. Likewise, you set the local offset distance when you create a label, and you cannot change the property in the drawing software. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Is Mirrorable
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that you can mirror the item. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that you cannot create a reverse image. You define this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Disable Flip Text
This value allows you to rotate or orient text for readability. By default, the software displays text in a readable manner and will not allow it to display upside down. For example, if you move a label in a direction that would effect the readability of the text, the software automatically flips the text so that it can still be read. Using Catalog Manager, you can disable this option and allow the text to display upside down if needed. Related Topics • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview, page 83

198 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Is Rotatable
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that you can rotate the item. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that you cannot change the angular orientation. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Is Fit To Text
The value of this property is set to True if the label graphics must fit around the text when you place the label. The value of this property is set to False if the label graphics do not need to fit around text. You can change the designation in Catalog Manager. You can set the value to True only for enclosures that are circles, ellipses, rectangles, or parametrics. You set the Is Fit To Text property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. The following illustration is an example of a label with the Is Fit To Text property set to False. The rectangle appears at the same size when you created it:

This illustration is an example of a label with the Is Fit To Text property set to True. The rectangle resizes to fit around the text:

Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label, page 188 • Place an Annotation, page 211

Is Leader Visible
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that the label includes a leader line. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that the label does not include a leader line. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. You can turn on or off the display of the leader line after you place the label.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 199

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Note

To turn on or turn off the display of the leader line, right-click the label, and click Leader line display.

Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Label Terminator Styles
The Terminator Style property specifies the terminator, if any, to place at the end of a leader line. Choices include None, Arrow, Solid Dot, and so forth. This property applies only to labels whose value of the Leader Line property is set to True. You specify these properties when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Afterwards, you cannot change the terminator type property in the design software. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

200 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview
A connector is not actually a label but more like a component that includes a label. Placement behavior for a connector is very similar to a standard piping component label. OPCs, utility connectors, and piping components are inserted into a line. The drawing needs a connector when a line run continues on another drawing. The minimum information in the label portion is the drawing name to which the connector points and the connector number. Connectors do not have a property for flow direction, although most connectors use an arrowhead to indicate direction. When you place a connector, it does not set or respond to flow direction. The connector represents continuation, not connectivity or flow. During document creation, when you place the first connector of the pair, the software places the partner in either the Stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing of your choice. The default placement for the partner is into the Stockpile. When you create a connector and place it in a drawing, the property for the drawing name is not defined. The partner in the stockpile reflects the drawing name in which its match was located. When you place the partner from the stockpile, the first connector is updated to reflect the drawing name where you placed the partner connector. As a result, you never need to type a drawing name, and the software guarantees a valid match. OPC pairs have a to and from orientation. The software does not use the graphical to and from distinctions, but reading the drawing is easier for you with this differentiation.

1. The OPC is a to connector if its connected point appears at the finish end of the connector. 2. The OPC is a from connector if its connected point appears at the start end of the connector. In order to switch between to and from orientations, you must disconnect the OPC from the line and then rotate or mirror it. Then you can reconnect the line to the other end of the OPC. At the time of placement, you can pause when placing the OPC and wait for the PickQuick toolbar in order to choose the correct orientation.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 201

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview You can delete a connector from the drawing, and the software moves it to a stockpile and updates the properties of its partner. To delete a connector from a stockpile, both must reside there, and you delete both from a stockpile. After you delete a connector, you cannot reuse the same number. You cannot change the connector number or drawing name in these labels. However, you can change other properties. If you copy a connector, the software must generate new connector numbers and add a partner to a stockpile. The property for drawing name changes to Null or Undefined for the copy. These properties exist for connectors:
• • •

Offset source is set to None. Rotation is set to True. Leader line is set to False.

In Catalog Explorer, Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs are available for instruments. Two types of connectors are available for process lines: Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs or Utility Connectors. The correct symbology differentiates OPCs. You define symbology with Options Manager. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Place an OPC or Utility Connector, page 202 • Store a Partner Connector, page 204

Place an OPC or Utility Connector
1. From the list view in Catalog Explorer or from a stockpile, select the connector that you want to place. Tip In Catalog Explorer, Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs are available for instruments. Two types of connectors are available for process lines: Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs or Utility Connectors. The correct symbology (for example, line weight and color) differentiates OPCs. You define symbology with Options Manager. 2. Click the location in the drawing where you want to place the connector.

Tips

You can place a connector in free space on the drawing and route a line to it, or you can place it at the end of a line that already is drawn. If you are placing a connector in free space, rotate or mirror the OPC after placement in order to get the correct orientation. Then route the line to it.

202 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If you are placing a connector at the end of an existing line, you can wait for the PickQuick toolbar so that you can choose the correct orientation. 3. Modify the properties of the connector in the Properties window.

Tip

If you placed a new connector from Catalog Explorer, you can display and select the partner in the Engineering Data Editor and modify its properties, too.

Notes

Utility connectors support only one-to-one relationships. In other words, they come in pairs only. When you place a utility connector and its partner goes to a stockpile, that partner connector is of the same type as the first connector you placed. In order to change the partner connector to the other type of utility connector, you must place the partner in its drawing and then replace the symbol. For more information on replacing symbols, see Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233.

Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement, page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

ToFromText Dialog Box (Properties Window)
Opens when you click To / From in the Properties window when an OPC or other connector is selected, and allows you to enter a text value to be displayed in the connector. Click the ellipses to open the ToFromText dialog box. Description - Allows you to enter to or from information for the connector. You can enter drawing names or numbers or other pertinent information about the connected drawing or the direction of flow. Related Topics Properties Window Command, page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties, page 87

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 203

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector
1. Click Tools > Options. 2. Go to the Placement tab. 3. Select or clear the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option. Note

If the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option is not selected, the Set Stockpile Location for Partner OPC dialog box appears whenever you place a connector. This dialog box allows you to place each partner OPC in the stockpile of a specific drawing.

Related Topics Place an OPC or Utility Connector, page 202 • Store a Partner Connector, page 204

Store a Partner Connector
1. Place a connector in a drawing. 2. On the Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box, choose the stockpile in which you want the partner stored. Tip

If you have not deactivated the default storage for connectors, this dialog box does not appear because the partner connector is placed directly into the Stockpile. However, you can change the default storage location. For more information, see Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204

Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move a Connector to Another Stockpile
1. In the Engineering Data Editor, select the connector that you want to move. 2. On the Engineering Data Editor toolbar, click File > Move to Different Stockpile. Tip

If you select a connector that you do not have write privileges for, then the Move to Different Stockpile command is not available. That is, you cannot move a connector that belongs to a different drawing, for instance.

204 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview 3. On the Move to Different Stockpile dialog box, select the plant hierarchy element that contains the drawing whose stockpile you want to assign the connector to. Tip If you do not want to place the connector in a stockpile of a specific drawing, you can select Stockpile at the bottom of the Plant hierarchy tree. 4. In the Drawing list area, select the drawing whose stockpile you want to add the partner to.

Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move Partner OPC Command
Connector Shortcut Menu > Move Partner OPC Opens the Move Partner OPC dialog box, from which you can move the selected connector to the stockpile of any drawing in the active plant. This command is available only when the partner connector is located in the Stockpile. Related Topics • Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile, page 206 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move Partner OPC Dialog Box
Opens when you click Move Partner OPC on the Connector shortcut menu. This dialog box allows you to move a partner connector from the Stockpile into the stockpile of a specific drawing, or vice versa. Plant Hierarchy - Displays the hierarchical tree representation of the plant. When you select a node, the drawings associated with that node appear in Drawing list. Drawing list - Displays all the drawings associated with the selected node on the Plant Hierarchy tree. Related Topics Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile, page 206 • Move Partner OPC Command, page 205

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 205

4. you can use the Open Partner Drawing command on the shortcut menu to open the other drawing and move the connector from its stockpile. see Open a Continuation Drawing. Related Topics • Open a Continuation Drawing. On the Move Partner OPC dialog box. Tip If you select a connector that you do not have write privileges for. then the Move Partner OPC command is not available. However. right-click the connector whose partner you want to move. you cannot move it. For more information about opening the partner drawing. if the partner connector belongs to another drawing. From the shortcut menu. page 207. click Move Partner OPC. for instance. select the plant hierarchy element that contains the drawing whose stockpile you want to assign the connector to. That is. • Note • If the partner connector is in a stockpile and is displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. page 204.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile 1. you can select Stockpile at the bottom of the Plant hierarchy tree. page 201 Open Continuation Drawing Command Connector Shortcut Menu > Open Continuation Drawing Opens the connected drawing when the partner of the selected off-page or utility connector is in a drawing or a drawing stockpile. see Move a Connector to Another Stockpile. In the Drawing view. you can move it from there. • Tip If you do not want to place the connector in a stockpile of a specific drawing. 3. For more information. page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. page 201 206 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This command is not available if the partner connector is not located in the drawing stockpile. select the drawing whose stockpile you want to add the partner to. 2. In the Drawing list area.

Right-click the connector.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Open a Continuation Drawing 1. From the shortcut menu. Related Topics • Open Continuation Drawing Command. Right-click the connector that you want to remove from the model. the command is not available unless the partner connector is in the Stockpile. page 206 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. click Open Continuation Drawing. In the case of the connector. page 201 Delete a Connector From the Model 1. 2. Select the OPC or utility connector whose connected drawing you want to open. click Delete From Model. 3. • Related Topics • Delete a Connector From the Model. Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. • Note • The selected connector and its partner in the Stockpile are removed from the model. page 201 Delete From Model Command Connector Shortcut Menu > Delete From Model Deletes the selected item from the database. then its partner is deleted from the stockpile as well. if you are deleting a connector. which moves the selected item to the Stockpile. If you want to move the connector to the Stockpile instead of deleting it completely from the database. click Delete on the shortcut menu. From the shortcut menu. 2. Tips • This command is available only when the partner of the selected connector is stored in the Stockpile. Notes • Unlike the standard Delete command. page 201 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 207 . this command removes the selected items or connector and its partner from the model completely.

equipment components. connect to process. Legend Italics: Required for checking item tag uniqueness. but can be generated automatically. Calculation can be triggered by the Item Tag property for any of the items shown in the tables below. pipe runs.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Calling Item Tag Validation The ItemTag project performs calculations and validations for unique tag checking. This project disregards all other item types. and the database tables and column names where modifications trigger calculation and validation. Instrument Item Tag Structure Format Instrument Type Modifier Measured Variable Code Tag Sequence Number Loop Tag Suffix Tag Suffix (Instrument Type Modifier)(Measured Variable Code)-(Tag Sequence Number) Loop Tag Suffix(Tag Suffix) Instrument Loop Item Tag Structure Format Instrument Loop Function Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix (Instrument Loop Function)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Pipe Run Item Tag Structure Format Unit Code Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix Fluid Code (Unit Code)(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix)-(Operating Fluid Code) 208 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Property validation is triggered when any property that comprises the Item Tag value is added or modified. and so forth). The ItemTag project deals specifically with the following item types: instrument loops. instruments. This project generates unique Item Tag values and maintains consistency between the Item Tag value and the properties used in its calculation. The following tables list item types that are validated or calculated by the ItemTag project. and equipment (other equipment. and tag reformatting. Bold Italics: Required for the item tag. signal runs with a plant item type pipe run (hydraulic. automatic tag generation. mechanical equipment. exchangers. and vessels).

Item Tag cells for these item types are read-only except for those of signal runs.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Equipment Item Tag Structure Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix Format (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Equipment Component Item Tag Structure Format Nozzle Item Tag Structure Item Tag Signal Runs (Plant Item Type Pipe Run) Item Tag Structure Format Unit Code Operating Fluid Code Tag Sequence NumberTag Suffix Unit Code(Operating Fluid Code)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Notes • To refresh the instrument loop tag suffix in the Properties window. page 268 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 209 . clear the selection of the instrument and then select it again. and Item Tag properties for instruments are not read-only so that implied instruments can have item tags that are assigned manually. page 178 • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. page 13 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile. see the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide or click Related Topics. For information on customizing the software. • • Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. including item tag formats.

There are several design labels of different formats available in Catalog Explorer. and other information that you need to effectively annotate your drawings. Opening and saving a . there is one item in the Labels folder with an annotation point built into it. often you can resize them to fit your needs. and other information to your drawing. Caution • You cannot annotate drawings by opening them in SmartSketch and adding dumb graphics to the drawing. on a drawing. Most of these labels require placing an annotation point or other design graphic on the drawing first and then attaching a label to the graphic. Annotation point 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using Annotations: An Overview Annotations are model items used to add notes. The plain annotation point is located in the Graphics folder under the Annotation node. remarks.pid file in SmartSketch can corrupt the file. Because annotations are frequently parametric. you can then place a label on the item note. page 214 • Place an Annotation. page 211 210 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and it looks like this: 1. These labels allow you to enter the remarks. however. Item note Related Topics • Place a Revision Cloud. which has an item type of item note. Placing annotations works like placing any other component in a drawing. notes. Note • Annotations are a way to place free remarks in a drawing. It is called Item Note & Label. When you place an annotation. Annotations include everything from geometric shapes to extension and dimension lines. making the drawing unusable. You can use annotations to include any type of information previously inserted into a drawing using primitive commands.

Most of these labels require placing an annotation point or other design graphic on the drawing first and then attaching a label to the graphic. see Scale a Parametric Item. however. Note • You can resize annotations by dragging their parametric handles. Press Esc to quit placement mode. and it looks like this: • 1. The symbol is called Item Note & Label. page 188 and Place a One-Point Label. The plain annotation point is located in the Graphics folder under the Annotation node. 2. There are several design labels of different formats available in Catalog Explorer. select the annotation that you want to place from the Graphics folder. page 210 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 211 . Annotation point 2. page 182 • Using Annotations: An Overview. To add text to the annotation. Tip • You can also assign text to the graphic in the Note Text property box for the graphic. place a design label on the annotation. and when you add a label. For more information. page 239. page 186. 5. For more information. 3. it automatically displays that text.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Annotation 1. 4. In the Catalog Explorer list view. as in the procedure above. there is one item in the Labels folder with an annotation point built into it. Item note Related Topics • Placing Labels: An Overview. Click to place the annotation at the appropriate place in the drawing. Assign text to the annotation in the Note Text property box in the Properties window. see Place a Two-Point Label.

2. Tips • You can place a rectangular area break by dragging the pointer in the Drawing view. Select the area break in Catalog Explorer in the Design node. specify the properties for the select set. 5. page 83 212 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can designate a portion as Supply By Contractor and a smaller portion as Supply By Owner. Create a select set of the items that you want to include in the area break. for a group of items. In the Properties window. 3. Press Esc to quit placement mode. like fencing items with the Select Tool. You can place area breaks that do not have common properties within or overlapping other area breaks. Notes • • An area break is a logical grouping of design items. For example. including the area break shape itself. • Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Area Break 1. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. You can nest area breaks that have different values for the same property with one restriction: one area break must completely enclose the other area break. Or you can place a multi-sided area break by clicking at a starting point and then clicking for each vertex of the shape. Place the area break shape around items in the Drawing view for which this area break applies. The value for the inside area break overrides the value for the outside area. • 4.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Package 1. page 265. choose Select Set from the Properties box. In the Properties window. Right-click the package symbol in Catalog Explorer in the Design node. 5. Do not include those items in your select set because the package item tag does not appear in the Properties window if any member of the select set does not possess that property. enter a value for the Item Tag property. 8. 3. In the Properties window. click in the Pkg Item Tag box and select the appropriate value displayed list. you can display it by selecting an item and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. Press Esc to quit placement mode. In the Properties window. In the Drawing view. 7. whichever is appropriate. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 213 . 6. Notes • Packages normally reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. For more information about moving plant item groups from one stockpile to another. select items to be part of the package. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. Moving the package itself to another stockpile has special limitations. 2. Select the package in the stockpile. • Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. From the shortcut menu. select either Send to Stockpile or Send to Drawing Stockpile. Tip • Some catalog items do not possess the Pkg Item Tag property. 4. If the Properties window is not visible.

3. select the Symbols > Design > Revision Cloud nodes. Using the Catalog Explorer tree. continue clicking to place vertices on the revision cloud. the line width and line style using the Symbology option in Options Manager. 5. 4. Click the starting point in the drawing for the revision cloud area.Large or Cloud . page 210 214 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Revision Cloud 1.Small. Right-click to complete the revision cloud. Related Topics • Using Annotations: An Overview. Set the Area Break Style property to either a Cloud . 2. In a clockwise direction. Notes • You can change the symbology.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview After you place items in a drawing. such as the length of its sides. you can delete the item. you can move items or groups of items from one location to another in the drawing. You can permanently remove required items from the plant model using the Delete from Model command. You can modify the properties of each item by selecting the item and changing individual properties in the Properties window. while it allows modification of other characteristics of the item. If the Properties window is not open. If the plant model requires the deleted item. as well as as you place them. Also you can edit some item properties in the Engineering Data Editor in the Design window by selecting a table cell and filling in the appropriate information. specific trays can be flagged for placement inside a piece of equipment. and you can only move these inside the equipment. You can select a entire row by clicking on the corresponding row number to the left of the table and then viewing the properties in the Properties window and editing them there. too. and can be resized by using their scale handles. the item appears in the stockpile for later placement. you can modify the items in several ways. The fluid code list displays only codes beginning with the first letter of any previously selected fluid code for that line. you select a fluid code from the select list. such as angles between elements of the symbol. If the plant model does not require the item. and then the complete list of fluid code values appears. Many items are now scalable. it disappears from the drawing completely. You can also move groups of items to another open drawing in the same plant hierarchy. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 215 . limits exist for possible placements. If you want to remove an item from a drawing. Resizing parametric items maintains certain characteristics of the item. you can mirror and rotate most items. delete the property for the fluid system. If you want to change the orientation of items. Obviously. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. For example. Notes • When modifying the fluid code properties of a line. To redisplay a complete list of available fluid code values. The software processes rules defined for items as you move them. Depending on the rules defined for particular items in the drawing. You can resize or scale parametric items by using their parametric handles. you can display it by selecting an item and then selecting Edit > Properties.

Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. however. The undo list is cleared if you perform any of the following actions: • Change the properties of the Drawing view on the View Properties dialog box Turn the display of inconsistency indicators off or on by clicking View > Show Inconsistencies Add a filter tab to the Drawing view Click File > Save Open a different drawing or toggle to another open drawing Open a new Drawing view or new Engineering Data Editor (EDE) Using commands in the EDE or on the Connector shortcut menu. Modifying item properties is an action.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. page 87 • Scale a Drawing Item. too. and you can undo them by repeated use of the Undo command. and for multiple items selected in the EDE. modifying the properties of a select set is one action in and of itself. move a connector to another drawing stockpile Changing or viewing the claim status of drawing objects • • • • • • • An undoable action is defined in several ways. page 239 • Scale a Parametric Item. This definition of an action holds true for select sets. the View > Previous command is still available for that purpose. page 239 Undo Command Edit > Undo Allows you to reject the last action that you completed. page 215 • Undo Your Last Action. Up to ten operations are saved in the undo list. The Undo command does not reverse view manipulations. not one action for each member of the set. page 241 • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. Running a command is usually an action. page 217 216 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . That is. and the action ends when another item is selected. page 223 • Move an Item Using the Move Button. page 219 • Review and Edit Item Properties.

and you can move select sets. The Undo command stores up to 10 actions making this command available repeatedly. however. When you finish manipulating the view. Note • • The Undo command does not reverse view manipulations. such as Zoom. the software returns you to the Move command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. while you are using the Move command. the trays and nozzles move with the vessel. You can move one or multiple items at a time. the View > Previous command is still available for that purpose. the owned items move also. You can access this command from the Edit menu or the main toolbar. and you can no longer undo your last action.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Undo Your Last Action Click Undo Tips • • . • • Related Topics • Move an Item Using the Move Button. and Pan. move it to the Stockpile. You can specify the locations by clicking the drawing sheet or by entering relative values in the Move ribbon. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. You can use other view manipulation commands. Notes • If you want to move an item to another drawing. page 216 Move Command Edit > Move Moves items from one location to another. If you move an item that owns other items. If the Undo button is not available. Fit. if you move a vessel that owns trays and nozzles. For example. page 219 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 217 . open the second drawing and place the item from the stockpile. then the undo list has been cleared. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Pressing Ctrl + Z also undoes your last action. page 144 • Undo Command.

or you can simply observe the value as you drag the object. 0. page 238 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview.5.75. For example. Drag the item to its new position. On the main toolbar. Copy . Drag the item to its new position. 3. Related Topics • Move an Item Using the Move Button. page 219 • Move Command. 2. • Move an item with precision 1. Position the pointer over the item but not over any of the handles of the item. Position the pointer over the item that you want to move. click Select Tool. page 144 218 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 3. click the Select Tool . On the main toolbar.Allows you to enter an explicit value for the distance to move in the x-coordinate. page 217 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 144 Move an Item With the Select Tool 1. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Tip Dragging a handle modifies the item instead of moving it.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move Ribbon Specifies the from point and to point when you move items. and so forth. from 0.Allows you to enter an explicit value for the distance to move in the y-coordinate. at a location where the software recognizes a keypoint .25 to 0. Step Distance . X . • Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview. Y . 2.Increases or decreases the value in the ribbon boxes.25 and pointing away from the from point increases the distance in discrete steps.Copies the items in the select set when you move them. typing a step value of 0. Tip The pointer snaps to the keypoint thereby making it easier for you to control the exact locus of the move. or you can simply observe the value as you drag the object.

On the main toolbar. Fit. the trays and nozzles move with the vessel. if you move a vessel that owns trays and nozzles. 4. move it to the Stockpile. press Ctrl while you drag.and y-axis. page 152 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 219 . while you are using the Move command. You can drag an item without using Move. press Ctrl when you place the item. and place the item from the stockpile. such as Zoom. Click to define the to point. Select the item and then drag it to its new location. 2. If you want to copy the item. The values are relative distances along the x. and you must click in the appropriate portion of the drawing to specify to which quadrant you want to move or copy the item or items. the owned items move also. If you want to move an item to another drawing. Select one or more items. When you finish manipulating the view. If you want to copy the items. Tip • . and Pan. open the second drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move an Item Using the Move Button 1. the software returns you to the Move command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. You can use other view manipulation commands. You can use the Move ribbon to specify the to point. Click to define the from point. Notes • If you move an item that owns other items. For example. • • • • Related Topics • Placing Equipment: An Overview. click Move 3.

or press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. press Shift as you move the line. When you move a line segment. • • • Related Topics • Move a Line Using Vertex Handles. If you want to override those rules. the software changes the length of attached line segments to accommodate the move. Point near the center of the appropriate line. 2. When the pointer turns into a double arrow location and release. page 156 220 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. In the Drawing view. Press Esc at any time to stop changing the selected line. drag the segment to the new The software applies geometrical line routing rules as you move a line.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Line 1. 3. page 221 • Routing Lines: An Overview. select the line that you want to move. If the Properties window is not open. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then selecting or typing the new values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. Notes • .

you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 221 .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Line Using Vertex Handles 1. click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon or press Alt to allow the line segments to move freely at any angle. • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. 3. Click an existing line in the drawing. If the Properties window is not open. Press Esc at any time to stop changing the selected line. Drag the vertex to a new position in the drawing and release. 2. Notes • While moving the vertex handle to modify the line segment. Click the vertex handle of the line route that you want to move. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then specifying the new values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window.

page 223 • 222 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . equipment component. Title blocks are automatically removed from the select set. If there is a label in the select set and the item that it labels is not in the select set. and if the parent object that it is dependent upon is not in the select set. • The command expands the select set to include the following objects: • If there are labels that are not in the select set but are attached to objects in the select set.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move To Drawing Command Edit > Move To Drawing Allows you to move a select set of drawing items into another open drawing. or item note) not in the select set but they are dependent on objects in the select set. and neither of these drawings can be read-only. • OPCs cannot be moved from one drawing to another using this command. that label is removed. If there is a dependent object (such as a nozzle. These conditions must be met in order for this command to be available: • The source and destination drawing must be open. or item note) in the select set. these objects are automatically added to the select set. page 215 • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. The drawing objects to be moved must be selected. If there are dependent objects (such as a nozzle. these labels are automatically added to the select set. equipment component. actuator. Related Topics Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. • • • If more than one possible destination drawing is open. The selected items must not have a connection to any items outside the select set. and you can select the appropriate destination drawing. You must have the appropriate permissions to modify the items in the select set. The command removes these objects from the select set: • • • Inserted OLE objects are automatically removed from the select set. actuator. it is removed. the Move To Drawing dialog box appears. The Move To Drawing command manipulates the select set in order to make sure the selected items are appropriate items to move.

The Move to Drawing dialog box displays. • • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 223 . and open assemblies. In the Drawing view of the destination drawing. Open the destination drawing if it is not already open. While you are using a from point (or to in the destination drawing). Available drawings . and neither of these drawings can be read-only. the following conditions must be met: The source and destination drawing must be open. the pointer is a crosshair. The selected items must not have a connection to any items outside the select set. Tips • For the purposes of placement in the destination drawing. page 222 Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing 1. click Edit > Move To Drawing and click in the drawing to define the Select from point. 4. 3. Notes • In order for the Move To Drawing command to be available. • 6. In the Drawing view. open read-only drawings. the from point becomes the origin of the select set. Click Edit > Move To Drawing. Then. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move To Drawing Dialog Box Allows you to choose the destination drawing that you want to place a item(s) into.Lists the open drawings that are available to be a destination for the Move To Drawing command. Select the items that you want to move into the destination drawing. The drawing objects to be moved must be selected. Related Topics • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. This dialog box displays only when you have more than one possible destination drawing open. click the to point. click the from point. It contains a list of possible drawings that your item(s) can be moved to. open drawing templates. 5. You must also have the item(s) selected that you want to move. page 223 • Move To Drawing Command. Those drawings that are not included in the list are the source drawing. Select the drawing and click OK. If more than one possible destination drawing is open. then select the desired destination drawing from the Available Drawings list on the Move To Drawing dialog box.

then that logical group moves to the stockpile of the destination drawing. Since you have to switch to a different drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • You must have the appropriate permissions to modify the items in the select set. Logical relationships are preserved (for example. whose members are all moved to the new drawing. if a logical group such as an instrument loop. • • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. page 215 224 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Also. resides in the source drawing stockpile. OPCs cannot be moved from one drawing to another using this command. loop or package relationships or plant group relationships). the Undo command is not available for moving a select set to another drawing.

You can define search criteria based on a catalog item or an item type already in place in your drawing. You have the capability to replace a single drawing item with a comparable item. The software also searches your drawing for inconsistency indicators so that you can review and correct inconsistencies systematically. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. page 225 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 225 . Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. Related Topics Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. they are added to a select set. replace many items one-by-one. and so you can view the common properties of the select set items in the Properties window and edit them if appropriate. page 226 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. you can modify their properties or reposition them or even replace them with an item of a compatible type. the selected items are added to a select set. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. page 229 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items. page 231 Find Command Edit > Find Displays the Find and Replace dialog box. page 228 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. Replacing drawing items is straightforward. or even replace all items of one type at the same time. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. You can replace items by using the options on this dialog box. Or. you can define criteria based on a delivered filter or on a user-defined filter. The Find and Replace commands are not available in the Engineering Data Editor. As drawing items are found.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview The software has the ability to find items and inconsistency indicators in your drawing. When you find or replace drawing items. too. which allows you to search a drawing for items by using catalog items or a filter or to find inconsistencies in your drawing. page 226 • Replace a Single Drawing Item. too. page 228 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. Having found all drawing items of a certain type.

On the Select Filter dialog box. Leave the Consistency Check dialog box open. Click Find to search for and select the next item match in your drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing items that meet the selected filter. and click Find on the Find and Replace dialog box to display information on the next drawing inconsistency. On the Find and Replace dialog box. 4.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Find Drawing Inconsistencies 1. page 225 Find an Item by Using a Filter 1. 5. 4. Choose an option from the Search in list. Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when an inconsistency is selected. Click Edit > Find. 2. select <Inconsistency> from the Find what list. and click OK. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. Click Find to select the first inconsistency. select a filter to locate your drawing items. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. page 313 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. 2.. Select an option from the Search in list. right-click the selected inconsistency and click Properties. 3. • 226 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Click Edit > Find. select <Filter. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. 3. Notes • For detailed information about all your drawing inconsistencies one-byone. • 5. • • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview.> from the Find what list. Continue clicking Find to advance through the drawing inconsistencies. On the Find and Replace dialog box. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found.

All the items are in the select set. and click OK. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box. On the Find and Replace dialog box. Use the Direction options to change the order in which single drawing items are found. 3. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found. page 225 Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item 1. page 225 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 227 . • Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. Click Edit > Find 2. and you can view the common properties of the set in the Properties window. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. • Notes • Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. • Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. select <Catalog Item> from the Find what list. 5. Click Find to select the first match in the drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing. select the catalog item type to search for. Select an option from Search in.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. 4.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item
1. Select an item in your drawing. 2. Click Edit > Find. 3. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select an option from the Search in list. Tips

On the dialog box, the Find what option is automatically defined according to the drawing item you selected in the first step.

Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 4. Click Find to search for and select the next matching item in the drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing.

Notes

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Replace Command
Edit > Replace Displays the Find and Replace dialog box, which allows you to replace some or all of the drawing items that match the search criteria defined by the options on the Find tab. Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230

228 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace a Single Drawing Item
1. Select an existing item in your drawing. 2. Click Edit > Replace. 3. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Browse> from the Replace with list. 4. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the catalog item to replace the selected drawing item, and click OK. 5. Choose an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 6. Click Find to search for and select the first matching drawing item. If the selected item can be replaced with the item specified in Replace with, the Replace command is available.

7. Click Replace to replace the selected drawing item and to find and select the next matching item. Tip

Click Replace All to replace all instances of the selected drawing item with the item specified in the Replace with box.

Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is replaced.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 229

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters
1. Click Edit > Replace. 2. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Filter> from the Find what list. 3. On the Select Filter dialog box, choose the filter that you want to use to find drawing items, and click OK. 4. Select <Browse> from the Replace with list. 5. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, choose the catalog item that you want to replace the drawing items you find with your filter, and click OK. 6. Select an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 7. Click Find to search for and select the first match and to make the Replace All button available.

8. Click Replace All to replace all instances of the selected drawing item with the item defined in the Replace with box. Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231

230 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items
1. Click Edit > Replace. 2. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Catalog Item> from the Find what list. 3. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the item type from the catalog that you want to find in your drawing, and click OK. 4. On the Replace with list select <Browse>. 5. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the item type that you want to replace the found item type with, and click OK. 6. Select an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 7. Click Find to search for and select the first match and to enable the Replace All command.

8. Click Replace All to find and replace all matching items. Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found.

Related Topics Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 231

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Mode Command
Tools > Replace Mode Controls whether catalog items are placed as substitutions for existing drawing items or placed normally. When this mode is active, the software places catalog items only when they replace an existing drawing item. When this mode is not active, the software places catalog items as usual. The Replace Mode command works for like objects only. The item that you want to replace in the drawing must be of the same class: equipment class, instrument class, and so forth. For instance, you can replace a vessel with another vessel, but you cannot replace a vessel with a pump. The software also takes into consideration the connect points that are in use on the currently placed item. This stipulation means you cannot replace an angled item for a straight item when the straight item is already connected at both ends. For example, you cannot replace a Flanged Nozzle with an Angle Parametric Nozzle if the nozzle is already connected to a pipe run, likewise for angled valves. The replace mode functions very much like Edit > Replace. However, the replace mode works for only one item at a time and is not activated from inside a dialog box. The Replace Mode command copies properties of the current item onto the new item. You cannot use the replace mode for pipe runs or signal lines. You also cannot use this mode to replace items that are multiple representations. Related Topics Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Place Multiple Representations, page 154 • Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233

232 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace an Item Using Replace Mode
1. Click Tools > Replace Mode or click Replace Mode on the main toolbar. 2. In Catalog Explorer, select the item that you want to place in the drawing. Tip You cannot use this mode to replace drawing items with items from the Engineering Data Editor. 3. Move the selected catalog item over the drawing item that it is to replace.

Tips

The Replace Mode command works for like objects only. The item that you want to replace in the drawing must be of the same class: equipment class, instrument class, and so forth. For instance, you can replace a vessel with another vessel, but you cannot replace a vessel with a pump. The software also takes into consideration the connect points that are in use on the currently placed item. This stipulation means you cannot replace an angled item for a straight item when the straight item is already connected at both ends. For example, you cannot replace a Flanged Nozzle with an Angle Parametric Nozzle if the nozzle is already connected to a pipe run, likewise for angled valves. If the drawing item can be replaced with the catalog item, the replace is displayed, and the drawing item is selected. icon appears, click to replace the drawing item with the

4. When the replace icon selected catalog item.

5. Continue to replace more items with your currently selected catalog item, or press Esc to quit placement mode. 6. Click Tools > Replace Mode again to turn Replace Mode off. Notes

You cannot use the Replace Mode option for pipe runs or signal lines. You also cannot use this mode to replace items that are multiple representations. The Replace Mode command also copies properties of the current item onto the new item.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Place Multiple Representations, page 154 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 233

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Find and Replace Dialog Box
Sets options for searching for and replacing drawing items. This dialog box opens when you click either Edit > Find or Edit > Replace. Depending on your command choice, you access one of the following tabs. Related Topics Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item, page 227 • Find Command, page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies, page 226 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Command, page 228

Find Tab (Find and Replace Dialog Box)
Allows you to search the drawing for specified items. Find what - Lists search criteria, and allows you to enter new search criteria or select from a list of the five most recently used criteria. The items listed above the dashed line in the list are used to set new search criteria by searching using the Catalog Item, Filter, or Inconsistency options. Selecting the Catalog Item option opens the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Selecting the Filter option opens the Select Filter dialog box. Search in - Defines the scope of the search. You can search the active drawing or just the contents of the active window. If the Active Window option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is not available. If the Active Drawing option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is automatically set to Zoom, and you can select a preferred scroll mode. Scroll mode - Defines how the active view should be changed when a drawing item is found. If you select Zoom, the active view is zoomed to a multiple of the range of the found drawing item. If you select Pan, the active view is shifted without changing the view scale so that the center of the drawing item is in the center of the view. If Scroll Mode feature is turned off, then the active view is left unchanged. Direction - Specifies the direction of the search. Because drawing objects are stored linearly in the database, using either Next or Previous moves forward or backward through the document. Find - Initiates a search for a single item that is part of the specified search scope. Each time you click Find, the software searches for and highlights the next drawing item that matches the defined search criteria in the defined direction. Each time a item is found that matches the Find what criteria, the active view is changed based on the Scroll mode setting. Find All - Initiates a search for all items matching the search criteria and adds them to the select set. The active view is updated based on the Scroll mode setting. 234 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item, page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter, page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item, page 228 • Find Command, page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies, page 226 • Replace Command, page 228

Replace Tab (Find and Replace Dialog Box)
Sets options for searching for and replacing drawing items. This tab is on the Find and Replace dialog box. Find what - Lists search criteria, and allows you to enter new search criteria or select from a list of the five most recently used criteria. The items listed above the dashed line in the list are used to set new search criteria by searching using the Catalog Item, Filter, or Inconsistency options. Selecting the Catalog Item option opens the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Selecting the Filter option opens the Select Filter dialog box. Since you cannot replace an inconsistency, if you select the Inconsistency option from the Find what list, the Replace with option is not available. Replace with - Allows you to enter a new replacement item or select a replacement item from a list of the five most recently used items, which are listed below the dashed line. You can define a new replacement item by selecting Browse and picking a catalog item from the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Search in - Defines the scope of the search. You can search the active drawing or just the contents of the active window. If the Active Window option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is not available. If the Active Drawing option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is automatically set to Zoom, and you can select a preferred scroll mode. Scroll mode - Defines how the active view should be changed when a drawing item is found. If you select Zoom, the active view is zoomed to a multiple of the range of the found drawing item. If you select Pan, the active view is shifted without changing the view scale so that the center of the drawing item is in the center of the view. If Scroll Mode feature is turned off, then the active view is left unchanged. Direction - Specifies the direction of the search. Because drawing objects are stored linearly in the database, using either Next or Previous moves forward or backward through the document. Find - Initiates a search for a single item that is part of the specified search scope. Each time you click Find, the software searches for and highlights the next drawing item that matches the defined search criteria in the defined direction. Each time a item is found that matches the Find what criteria, the active view is changed based on the Scroll mode setting. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 235

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Replace - Replaces the item selected when you clicked Find. The Replace button is available only when the item found can be replaced by the item defined in the Replace with box. Each time you click Replace, the located item is replaced, and the Find command continues based on the Direction setting. As each drawing item is found, the active view is updated based on the Scroll mode setting. Replace All - Replaces all items that match the Find what criteria with the item defined in the Replace with box without prompting you. After all of the replacements are completed, the software reports the number of matches found and the number of replacements that were made. The active view is also updated depending on the Scroll mode setting. Related Topics Find Command, page 68 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Command, page 228 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230

236 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Related Topics Create a Simple Filter. To close a node. page 357 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. If the selected node contains any drawing symbols. page 230 • Select Catalog Item Dialog Box Allows you to select a catalog item type for the search criteria when you use the Find or Replace commands. List View . If you create a compound filter. click the minus sign to the left of the node name.Displays the symbols that are associated with the active node in the tree view. to choose item types for tables. Only the contents of one node appear. select the individual simple filters that compose a compound filter and click Properties to view the Filter Properties dialog box for those simple filters. the software displays them in the list view. page 226 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Filter Dialog Box Allows you to associate different filters with tabs in the different views. page 138 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. You can navigate through the tree view by clicking the different nodes. which allows you to specify a new simple or new compound filter. Properties .Displays a hierarchy of nodes that contain catalog items. Choose Filter in the Find what list on the Find tab of the Find and Replace dialog box. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 237 . Click Browse on the Filter tab of the Define Report Items dialog box when you are choosing your report item type.Allows you to edit the properties of the selected filter. To open a node. you can create a new filter or modify an existing filter. Navigation Bar . Access this dialog box using one of the methods described below: • Click Browse on the Add Filter Tab dialog box when you want to add a filter to the Drawing view. • • New .Allows you to see and use Catalog Explorer shortcut buttons to navigate to catalog items more quickly. click the plus sign to the left of the node name. Using this dialog box.Displays the New Filter dialog box. This dialog box is constructed much the same as the Catalog Explorer window. depending on your selection in the filter list. Tree View . or reports or to search for items using definitions associated with a filter. This button displays the Filter Properties dialog box or the Compound Filter Properties dialog box.

Note also that select sets cannot be mirrored or rotated with component handles. The rotate handle provides a mechanism for rotating components around their origin. bottom center. page 226 • Replace Command. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to mirror the item correctly. • • • Not all drawing items in can be mirrored. page 228 • Find Command. • The mirror handle allows you to mirror about the horizontal and vertical axes. You can mirror items by dragging the mirror handle in the appropriate direction.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. and the symbol scales either larger or smaller depending on the direction that you drag the handle. You can drag any one of the handles. Parametric handles can be located in four standard positions: top center. rotated. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to rotate the item correctly. and you can use component handles to scale or resize parametric items in a drawing. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to scale the item correctly. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. 238 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Parametric handles allow you to modify different parts of parametric items. Standard parametric handles represent up to four driving dimensions that have been applied to an item. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. You can rotate items by dragging the rotate handle in the appropriate direction. Catalog Manager defines these properties for items when the symbols for the items are created. A handle is displayed at each corner of the range of the symbol. Items can have several different types of component handles. Scale handles allow you to change the scale of a drawing item. defined in relation to the origin of the item. Component handles allow you to rotate or mirror a component around axes. A scalable symbol displays four solid square scale handles. and right center of the range of an item. The Mirror and Rotate commands on the toolbar can be used for select sets. page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. You can scale the item parametrically by dragging any parametric handle. left center. or scaled. page 228 Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview Many components allow you to change their shape or orientation using component handles.

Note • Certain properties of the parametric item. 2. Select the parametric drawing item that you want to resize. page 215 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 239 . depending on the direction that you drag the handle. Tips • A scalable symbol includes four solid square scale handles . in the middle of each side of the item to 3. 2. page 239 • Scale a Parametric Item. page 239 Scale a Parametric Item 1. Scalable symbols are created by setting the IsScalable property of the symbol to True in Catalog Manager. page 238 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. page 242 • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. remain the same when you resize it. Select your scalable item in the Drawing view. such as angle values. page 241 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. Drag any one of the handles to make the symbol either larger or smaller. Continue dragging the parametric handles until the item is the size that you want. Drag one of the parametric handles change the size of the item.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. page 215 Scale a Drawing Item 1. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. A handle is displayed at each corner of the range of the symbol. page 244 • Scale a Drawing Item. page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle. • Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview.

and 270 extends the axis vertically to the bottom. Related Topics • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. You can mirror without copying.or y-axis causes the item to appear mirrored about its center. Position Angle . You can also use mirror handles. Mirroring is displayed dynamically so that you can see the result of your action before you release the item to place it. 90 extends the axis vertically to the top. 180 extends the axis horizontally to the left. click Mirror on the main toolbar. Related Topics • Mirror an Item About a Mirror Axis That You Define. or mirror and copy. For example. dragging a mirror handle across an x. page 241 • Mirror Command. page 241 Mirror Ribbon Appears on the main toolbar when the Mirror command is active.Sets the angle of the mirror axis. Note • To determine the option name on the ribbon. Copy . The origin of the angle measurement is the point that you clicked for the beginning of the mirror axis. page 242 • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle.Copies the item or items when you mirror them. or you can make a copy of the item in the mirrored position. and allows you to either specify mirroring options or to observe mirroring options. The software reflects one or more selected items about that axis. To mirror an item using a defined mirror axis. page 241 • Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. You can mirror the item itself. pause over an option and read the ToolTip. page 240 240 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Setting the position angle to zero extends the axis horizontally to the right of the screen.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror Command Edit > Mirror Reflects one or more selected items about a line or axis that you define. The mirror handle appears at the upper right of the item.

you can use the Position Angle box on the Mirror ribbon. and then click. If an actuator is upside down when placed on an instrument valve. Click the mirror handle or click Mirror on the main toolbar.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle 1. hold Ctrl when you click to place your items. Tip • If you want to copy the mirrored items. 4. The software displays the mirror axis and the mirrored items dynamically (that is. as you move your pointer). page 215 Mirror an Item About a Mirror Axis That You Define 1. page 253 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Drag the mirror handle in the direction that you want to mirror the item. Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them. Define one end of the mirror axis by clicking in an appropriate empty portion of the drawing or by clicking a keypoint . while you are using the Mirror command. You can use other view manipulation commands. click Mirror . Select one or more items. the software returns you to the Mirror command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. then use Rotate or Mirror to align the actuator in the appropriate position. 3. Notes • Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically. When you finish manipulating the view. Select an item in the drawing. • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 241 . 2. 3. such as Zoom and Pan. On the main toolbar. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. 2.

hold down Ctrl when you click to place your items.0. page 215 Rotate Command Edit > Rotate Rotates one or more items a precise distance or angle about a specified point. while you are using Mirror. Select one or more items. On the main toolbar. 3. such as Zoom and Pan. The mirrored items are displayed dynamically on the other side of the mirror axis. locate a mirror axis. Second Click . you must specify two points by clicking in the drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element 1. To define the rotation axis. First Click . if the box is set to 30. you can use Mirror to align the actuator in the appropriate position. When you finish manipulating the view. • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. The software then dynamically displays a reference axis for the rotation. 2. Notes • You can use other view manipulation commands. it can take on any value. Angles are always displayed as a positive value. 4. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic. the software returns you to Mirror at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. The Rotation Angle box on the ribbon displays the angle of change between the old and new position. click Mirror . Tip • If you want to copy the mirrored items. To rotate and item.Defines the rotation handle. 242 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them. For example. If you want to define a precise location for the rotation.Defines the rotation point. By dragging the pointer over the item. If an actuator is upside down when placed on an instrument valve. You can enter increments in the Step Angle box if you want to control the increments of the rotation. you can enter values in the Rotate ribbon. that is. and then click. the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. select the item and then click Rotate.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Third Click - Completes the rotation of the item. Also, you can rotate an item about its center with the rotate component handle . Keeping the rotate component handle close to the center of an item causes the item to rotate at 90 degree increments. Dragging the rotate component handle further away from the center of the item causes the item to rotate at smaller angles. The angle increments become smaller the farther away your pointer is from the center of rotation. Related Topics • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle, page 244

Rotate Ribbon
Appears when the Rotate command is active, and allows you to either observe rotation options as you rotate an item or specify rotation options. Copy - Creates a copy of the item that you are rotating. Position Angle - Displays the angle between the horizontal axis through the center of rotation (A) and the point that you rotate from (B). Then, if you rotate the item, the position angle (C) changes to become the angle between the horizontal axis and the point to which you rotate. The position angle is always a positive value measured counter-clockwise from the axis.

Rotation Angle - Defines the rotation angle. The rotation angle is the angle between the point from which you rotate and the point to which you rotate. In the following picture, the center of rotation (A) shows the point (B) from which you rotate the item.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 243

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview The rotation angle (C) is the angle of change between the old and new positions of the rotated item. The value is always positive. Step Angle - Specifies the rotation step angle. The step angle specifies the increments, in degrees, that an item rotates on a rotation axis. You can enter increments in the Step Angle box. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic. Related Topics • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle, page 244 • Rotate Command, page 242

Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle
1. Select an item in the drawing. 2. Click the rotate handle . 3. Drag the rotate handle in the direction that you want to rotate the item. Notes

You can click the rotate handle closer to or further from the center of the item to change the step angle for the rotation. You can rotate items using the Rotate button on the main toolbar, too.

Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244

Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define
1. Select one or more items. 2. On the main toolbar, click Rotate 3. Click at the center of rotation. 4. Then, click to define the other end of the rotation axis. Tip The software dynamically displays the rotation axis and items being rotated. The location and position of the rotation axis defines the rotation from point. 5. Rotate the items into position by dragging the rotation axis.

.

6. Click to define the rotation to point.

244 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes

To rotate by arbitrary increments, type a value in the Step Angle box on the Rotate ribbon. In order to copy the rotated items into the new position, you can hold Ctrl while you click to define the to point. You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are using the Rotate command. When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to the Rotate command at the point that you were when you started manipulating the view.

Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview, page 253 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview
You can delete items from a drawing by selecting them and clicking Cut on the main toolbar or by pressing Delete on the keyboard. Clicking Cut places the selected item on the Clipboard. This action allows you to paste the item in the same location in the drawing and then move it to another location as appropriate. The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. The data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item, it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. Notes

You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a select set from the drawing. First, select the item or group of items in the drawing. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item or group of items if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. You can delete an item by selecting and right-clicking it. On the shortcut menu click Delete. If you select Delete from Model, the selected item is not only deleted from the drawing but also from the database. In other words, it is not placed in the Stockpile, regardless of its properties. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 245

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cut an Item from the Drawing, page 246 • Delete an Item from the Drawing, page 249 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265 • Remove an Item from a Drawing, page 250 • Remove an Item from the Model, page 251

Cut Command
Edit > Cut Cuts selected items from the drawing and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected items replace the previous contents of the Clipboard. When you cut items, they go to the Stockpile, given appropriate stockpile settings. Related Topics • Cut an Item from the Drawing, page 246 • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Cut an Item from the Drawing
1. Select the item. 2. Click Cut Notes

.

After you cut an item and its associated properties, they are placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste or Paste Special to paste the item and its properties into the current drawing or into other drawings or documents. The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. However, off-page and utility connectors are always placed in the Stockpile when deleted regardless of the TagReqdFlag property and settings in Options Manager. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

246 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview, page 273 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265

Paste Command
Edit > Paste Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same location that the items occupied in the source document or drawing. The command is not available if the Clipboard is empty. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Paste an Item With a Different Format, page 280 • Paste an Item, page 247

Paste an Item
1. Open the drawing in which you want to paste the contents of the Clipboard. 2. On the main toolbar, click Paste then select Paste. Notes

or right-click a blank area in the drawing and

The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use the Copy or Cut command again. Equipment components cannot be pasted back into the drawing after they have been removed using the Cut command. You cannot paste items if the Clipboard is empty (that is, if you have not previously used the Copy or Cut commands). Pasted text and items remain selected after you use the Paste command.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 247

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Select All Command
Edit > Select All Selects all visible items in a view. Note

You can access this command when you right-click a blank area in a drawing or table, too. On the shortcut menu click Select All.

Related Topics • Select an Item, page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Modify an Item With the Select Tool
1. Click the Select Tool 2. Select an item. 3. Position the pointer over one of the item handles. 4. Drag the item handle to modify the item. For example, you can rotate an item with its rotate handle, mirror an item with its mirror handle, scale an item with its scale handle, or resize an item with its parametric handle. Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview, page 238 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144 .

Delete Command
Edit > Delete Removes the selected item. You cannot paste items that you delete; however, if the item moves to the Stockpile on deletion, then you can place that item again from the stockpile. Notes

The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing.

248 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

However, off-page and utility connectors are always placed in the Stockpile when deleted regardless of the TagReqdFlag property and settings in Options Manager. Also, you can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items in a fence from the drawing. First, select the item or group of items in the drawing. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item or group of items if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Delete an Item from the Drawing, page 249 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Delete an Item from the Drawing
1. Select an item. Tip To delete a large group of similar items, use a filter to display items to delete, then select the items displayed by your filter. For more information on using display filters, see Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View, page 138. 2. Click Edit > Delete or press Delete on the keyboard.

Tip

When you use the Delete key on the keyboard to remove an item or items from the drawing, you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view.

Notes

If you want to delete the item, its location in the drawing, and its properties in the database, right-click the item and select Delete From Model from the shortcut menu. The item is not placed in the stockpile regardless of its settings or properties. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 249

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Remove an Item from a Drawing
1. Right-click the item that you want to remove. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete. Tips

You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items from the drawing, too. First, select the item or items in the drawing. Then you must place the pointer in the Drawing view and press Delete. The software does not delete the item if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. Or you can select Edit > Delete on the main menu bar after you select the items. You can also delete an item from the model when it is already in a stockpile. Select the item in the Engineering Data Editor, and click the Delete Stockpile Item command on the Stockpile menu of the Engineering Data Editor.

Notes

The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. For more information on deleting items from the model, see Remove an Item from the Model, page 251. When you delete inline components, the software automatically mends the pipe or signal run. A stockpile item that is deleted automatically goes to the Stockpile. You can move it to a drawing stockpile from the Stockpile.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265

250 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Delete From Model Command
Connector Shortcut Menu > Delete From Model Deletes the selected item from the database; if you are deleting a connector, then its partner is deleted from the stockpile as well. Notes

Unlike the standard Delete command, which moves the selected item to the Stockpile, this command removes the selected items or connector and its partner from the model completely. In the case of the connector, the command is not available unless the partner connector is in the Stockpile.

Related Topics • Delete a Connector From the Model, page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Remove an Item from the Model
1. In the Drawing view, right-click the item that you want to delete in order to display the shortcut menu. Tips

You can delete a select set from the model by choosing the items and then right-clicking on any member of the set to display the shortcut menu.

You can also delete an item from the model when it is already in a stockpile. Select the item in the Engineering Data Editor, and click the Delete Stockpile Item command on the Stockpile menu of the Engineering Data Editor. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete from Model to delete the item from the drawing and from the plant model. That is, the item is not placed in the stockpile, and when you save the drawing, no data associated with the item remains in the database.

Notes

You can only remove items from the plant model that do not share a relationship with another drawing. You can permanently remove items that are not flagged as required for the model by selecting Delete from the shortcut menu.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 251

• • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. page 265 • Remove an Item from a Drawing. When you delete inline components. the software automatically mends the pipe or signal run. which you set in Options Manager. page 215 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True. page 265. For more information. If the TagReqdFlag property is False. when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. which you set in Catalog Manager. page 250 252 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Pant Stockpile. the data associated with the item remains in the database. and is included in the StockpileItems group. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. However. cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile.

2. drag it to its new location in the drawing. page 247 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. page 244 Copy Command Edit > Copy Copies selected items to the Clipboard. page 245 Copy an Item 1. When you paste the item. it is placed on the Clipboard. page 253 • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. Select an item. click Copy Notes • . mirror. and press Ctrl as you place the item in the drawing. To see the pasted item. You can do the same with a select set. for instance. So a copied nozzle must be placed on a piece of equipment. This command replaces the previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents. On the main toolbar. After you copy an item. Remember that placement rules are in effect when you are copying an item to a new location. Select the item.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Copying Items: An Overview Copying an item makes it possible to use a drawing item that is already in place as a starting point for placing a new item. Then you can use Paste to place it on the current drawing. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 253 . You can copy an item with the Move command. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. page 280 • Paste an Item. page 254 • Copy an Item. click Move on the toolbar. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. the software frequently pastes it on top of the item that you copied. such as using the Copy button on the main toolbar or using Ctrl while you move.too. Several methods exist for doing this. page 253 • Paste an Item With a Different Format. without removing the current item from the drawing. or rotate a drawing item. just as they are when you originally place an item from a stockpile or from Catalog Explorer. page 254 • Copy an Item.

Click Select Tool 2. page 144 on the main toolbar. Hold Ctrl and drag the copy to its new location. but also lines and networks and all runs included in the drawing. it is then a simple matter to choose the select set in the Properties window and continuing editing properties for not only runs. Selecting Connected Items: An Overview You can use the Select Connected Items command to navigate the line connectivity from a selected line segment to add components and other runs to a select set based on matching properties. a nozzle. 4. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. but not over any of the handles of the item. Related Topics • Create a Select Set From a Line. for example. page 256 • Customize the Properties Window. Note • The properties that define a run are specified in Options Manager. page 253 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Select an item. Placement rules are in effect. 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. this command makes it possible to accomplish that goal. In cases where you want the software to continue constructing a select set beyond a break in a line. Once the items are selected in the drawing. page 273 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 253 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. page 147 254 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 144 Copy an Item With the Select Tool 1. page 86 • Select an Item. and so you must place the copy in an allowed position as if it were a new catalog item. Position the pointer over the item. This functionality is useful for finding branches from runs and finding all the runs and components on an entire drawing that have a common property value.

Related Topics Create a Select Set From a Line. including components.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Connected Items Command Edit > Select Connected Items Opens the Select Connected Items dialog box. one or the other or both is always active.Provides options for defining the extent of your select set. At no time can neither the Include Runs nor Include Components buttons be selected. and you can highlight items in the drawing and manipulate members of the select set while the dialog is active. even if there are breaks in a network. The Line option selects runs that are connected at end points. Scope List . and the Drawing option selects all the runs and inline components in the open drawing. The Select Connected Items command. page 156 • Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. Drawing. that is. once the dialog box is open. Scope . is available only when either a single line segment or a single component is selected.Adds inline components into the select set. and the Include Runs and Include Components buttons allow you to incorporate different items into the select set. page 256 • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 144 • Select Connected Items Dialog Box Allows you to construct a select set from lines and inline components. page 148 • Selecting Connected Items: An Overview. Include Components . you can change the selected item in the drawing and change the scope of the select set freely. Network. which appears both on the Edit menu and on the Line Shortcut menu. Notes • The Run option means that lines in a single run are selected. The Scope List allows you to choose extent.Incorporates lines into the select set. The default value for this list is Line. however. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 255 . This command is available only when either a single line segment or a single component is selected on the drawing. which allows you to create a select set that includes the active line and disconnected lines and inline components in any network. This dialog box remains open until you dismiss it.Allows you to choose from Run. The Network option adds branches. Include Runs . Line. page 254 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview.

The properties for the originally selected item are displayed by default. Properties List . 6. too. Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. page 256 • Select an Item. but the display of the Properties window itself is not updated until you click OK. Categorized . You can select more than one property in this list by using the Ctrl or Shift keys. At any time. Related Topics • Create a Select Set From a Line.Allows you to choose common properties for your select set. Preview . 2. 4.Lists properties in alphabetical order. Alphabetic . 3. select those properties from the Properties list in the Matching properties area of the dialog box. page 255 Create a Select Set From a Line 1.Highlights in the Drawing view the items that are selected according to common properties in the Properties List of this dialog box. • Tips • You can use the Ctrl or Shift buttons to select more than one property value. By default the properties are displayed categorically. Tip The properties for the new selection are displayed in the Select Connected Items dialog box.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Matching Properties . If you want to construct a select set based on common properties. by using the Include Runs and Include Components buttons. 5. You can change the scope to include inline components or exclude lines. • 256 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Edit > Select Connected Items.Displays options for defining the select set according to common properties. you can change the scope of the select set by changing the display in the Scope list. You can choose an empty property value for matching criterion.Displays properties grouped by specific categories. too. Select a single line segment or inline component in the drawing. you can select a different line segment or component in the drawing in order to change the properties displayed in the dialog box. page 147 • Select Connected Items Command. On the Select Connected Items dialog box.

click OK. see Customize the Properties Window. page 254 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 257 . page 86. The matching items are highlighted in the Drawing view. Use the Selected Items list in the Properties window to display the common properties for the select set. the Select Connected Items dialog box closes. The selected items are centered in the Drawing view. 9. page 147 • Selecting Connected Items: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If no properties are displayed in the dialog box. and the original item is selected in the drawing. 7. select a line segment or component in the drawing that already has a property value you know you are interested in. Click the Preview button to see the items that qualify according to the matching criteria chosen in the previous step. Related Topics • Select an Item. Notes • If you click Cancel. • 8. Once you have selected the items you want for your select set. For more information.

or create filters and control Drawing views so that only items with specified properties are displayed. Once you have populated the properties of an item you can. You can review and edit the properties of an item in the Properties window. items that belong to another drawing cannot be edited. page 87 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. In the Properties window you are also constrained to edit only those properties that are not read-only. page 329 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modifying Item Properties: An Overview When you use the design software to produce drawings. for instance. page 88 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. you can copy. In the Engineering Data Editor. cut. Related Topics • Copy Bulk Properties. page 83 258 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . with the same restriction. and paste properties. page 89 • Review and Edit Item Properties. too. Or you can open the Engineering Data Editor of the drawing data and edit properties in the cells of the table. page 54 • Paste Bulk Properties. run reports that display the items and their properties. it is important to be able to specify and change the properties of the items that you place in your diagram. page 248 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. or label items so that their properties are displayed graphically. You can edit the contents of some cells directly in the table if the corresponding property is not read-only or generated strictly by validation.

com.extension. Related Topics • Properties Window Command. Description .extension.Allows you to type a description for the item. Note • Very long descriptions are not displayed in their entirety in labels. This box can contain a link to a Web address.intergraph. reports. This box can contain a link to a Web address.com. page 87 Hold Status Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Hold Text calculation button text value. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 259 . formatted like this: http://www.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Description Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses next to the Description property in the Properties window.Allows you to type a description for the item. and so forth.intergraph. formatted like this http://www. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document. page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document. and allows you to enter a Description . allowing you to enter long text descriptions for items.

Lists all insulation specifications that match any already chosen values.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Note • Labels do not display very long descriptions in their entirety. page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. allowing you to specify an insulation specification for the selected item or items. Any modifications to insulation specifications are carried out in Insulation Specification Manager. Matching . You can choose a specification from either of the following lists. Related Topics • Assign an Insulation Specification. Note • The path to the plant insulation specification file is defined in Options Manager. Related Topics • Properties Window Command. All . page 261 260 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Lists all the insulation specifications in the plant insulation specification file. page 87 Insulation Spec Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses for the Insulation Spec property in the Properties window. such as Insulation Type or Insulation Purpose.

nonetheless.extension. Click the Calculation button . or purpose. formatted like this: http://www. Description . page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 261 . page 144 Note Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Note Text calculation button and allows you to enter a text value in an item note.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign an Insulation Specification 1. Related Topics • Properties Window Command. then the Matching list contains only those insulation specifications that agree with the properties already chosen.Allows you to type a description for the item. Tip • If you have already specified other insulation properties. page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. Note • If you assign a heat tracing to an item before you assign insulation properties. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document. On the InsulationSpec dialog box.com. 2. choose a specification from either the Matching or the All lists. such as the insulation temperature. your choices of insulation properties and specifications are restricted. Note • Very long descriptions are not displayed in their entirety in design labels. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. Click the Insulation Spec property box in the Properties window.intergraph. 3. Select the item that you want to add an insulation specification to. page 258 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. type. you can choose a specification from the All list. in the Properties window. This box can contain a link to a Web address. 4.

Related Topics • Place an Inline Instrument. allowing you to specify the stream number for your pipe run. Stream ID List .Specifies the file from which stream data is imported. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet.com. This box can contain a link to a Web address. Related Topics Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data.intergraph. page 87 Stream Number Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses next to the Stream Number property in the Properties window. Stream data is generally imported from an Aspen Zyqad stream data file. page 267 • 262 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Lists the values found in the text file specified in the File Name box. You can click Browse to find the file on your computer or the network. Note • Labels do not display very long descriptions in their entirety.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Revision Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Revision Text calculation button enter a text value.extension. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document. formatted like this: http://www. Browse . and allows you to Description . page 175 • Review and Edit Item Properties.Allows you to search for a file on your computer or network. File Name .Allows you to type a description for the item.

too. These commands make it possible to place or move or delete stockpile items. or click Active Drawing Stockpile to view items in the stockpile of the active drawing. page 154 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. or drawing stockpiles) from one stockpile to another. which belongs to the Plant or the active project. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. You can import items into the Stockpile. or you can place them in a drawing or delete them from the model altogether. In the EDE. page 265 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. which opens when you right-click in the EDE. by importing reports with the File > Import > Data File command on the main toolbar. Be sure that the other item buttons on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar (that is. page 267 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 263 . You have the capability to place an item from a stockpile directly onto an open drawing. You enter placement mode when you click the icon associated with a stockpile item in the left-most column of the EDE. In particular click Stockpile to view items in the Stockpile.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview You can move the items that reside in stockpiles (the Stockpile. You view the items in a stockpile in the Engineering Data Editor (EDE). the Active Drawing or Other Drawings buttons) are not active when you want to view stockpile items alone. page 264 • Place Multiple Representations. You can also access some of these commands from the Engineering Data Editor shortcut menu. the Stockpile menu contains the commands for manipulating stockpile items.

You cannot use Replace Mode mode to replace drawing items with items from the Engineering Data Editor. not a drawing item. For more information. You can enter values for properties of the placed item by selecting the item. Related Topics • Move a Connector to Another Stockpile. You can move your selected stockpile item into the drawing stockpile of another drawing. and then clicking Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. page 38 264 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In the Engineering Data Editor. page 204 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. page 265 Place an Item from the Stockpile 1.Displays a list of available drawings that can accept the selected stockpile item. List view . Click the appropriate position in the drawing for the item. you can use the Configuration tool to select the appropriate placement for the item.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move to Different Stockpile Dialog Box Opens when you right-click a stockpile item icon in the Engineering Data Editor and select Move to Different Stockpile. see Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. • • Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool.Allows you to navigate in the plant hierarchy in order to display the drawing into which stockpile you want to move the selected item. • Notes • If the item you place has multiple orientations in relation to other items. 2. page 146 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Tree view . Tip Be sure you have chosen a stockpile item in your Engineering Data Editor. click the icon in the left most column for the stockpile item that you want to place. page 149.

This action can occur at anytime. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 265 . On the Move to Different Stockpile dialog box. Valid reports are Equipment List. Note • Plant item groups. From a drawing stockpile to another drawing stockpile . Equipment Nozzle List.No constraints apply. and Pipe Run List. page 38 Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile You can use the Equipment List and the Pipe Run List to import new items into the stockpile. and then import the items back into the drawing. You must first run the report. In the left-most column of the Engineering Data Editor. such as instrument loops.Same constraint as above applies. • 3. Also. 2. choose a drawing from the list and click OK. select Move to Different Stockpile. safety classes. Both of these reports have hidden columns that store some key information that is necessary for importing this information. not a drawing item. frequently reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing 1. you can use a report to import information for items that already exist in the database. From the shortcut menu. add or edit property values for the items returned in the report. Moving the plant item group itself to another stockpile has special limitations: From a drawing stockpile to the Stockpile . Tip Be sure you have chosen a stockpile item in your Engineering Data Editor. and so forth. right-click the icon of the stockpile item that you want to move. From the Stockpile to a drawing stockpile . This capability allows you to define values for an item that does not yet exist in the database.If the plant item group contains only items in the destination drawing or does not contain items in any drawing. • • • Plant item groups are listed in Data Dictionary Manager. this action is allowed. The property values for the items are updated. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. packages.

Database Item Type. not the display name. and must be a valid format. Attribute Value . page 67 • Generate a Report. For examples of importing pumps into the database using the Equipment List.Must be in double quotes. AttributeUnits . </Identification> <ContextSpecificIdentifier ContextId <Item Attributes> <Item Attribute> Notes • The log file for import activities is called SPImport. page 268 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. • Related Topics • Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer. click Related Topics. and must have corresponding </Items> tag Defines Classification and Symbol File: Classification . page 329 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile. page 267 266 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . not the index number.log and is saved to your local Temp directory. and must be in double quotes.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview XML Tags and Descriptions Tag <?xml version="1. page 334 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. even for select-listed values.must be one of the properties listed.Path to symbol to be created in stockpile Ignored by SmartPlant P&ID. Indicates the beginning of the list of properties to be imported for the item type Imported property for the item type: AttributeName Derived from the Data Dictionary Manager property name.Specify if the property has units of measure. Symbol File .0"?> <Preamble> <Items> Description Identifies the XML file and the version used Ignored by SmartPlant P&ID Indicates beginning of the list of all item types and properties to be imported. and specify the actual value. ITEMTAG .

In addition. and Equipment Nozzle List Reports from SmartPlant to define properties of items already placed in the drawing. Items must have an assigned item tag prior to definition or modification of properties. Pipe Run List. and Heat Exchanger Equipment. Pump Equipment List. whether they remain in the stockpile or have already been placed in the drawing. Click Help > Programming with SmartPlant P&ID. Tips • The status bar at the bottom of the SmartPlant P&ID window displays the progress of the import activity. and Exchangers. See the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide Help file for more information on import code and other importing parameters. Notes • Aspen Zyqad spreadsheets in either Microsoft Excel or XML format are supported. 2. You can populate the stockpile with items from Aspen Zyqad exported spreadsheets and some SmartPlant reports. All three reports. you can click Report in order to open the log file and view notes on the import process. • Important • If a format change is made to an exported Aspen Zyqad report. Importing Aspen Zyqad XML data files allows greater flexibility when importing data into the software. Previously imported items. these reports can create occurrences of items in the stockpile.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet 1. and click Open. These spreadsheets include the Vessel Equipment List. You can use the Equipment List. On the Import Log dialog box. Browse to the location of your spreadsheet. are included in a single XML report so that only one file has to be imported. Equipment. Pumps. • • • • Related Topics • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. select it. 3. Stockpile items that come from importing Aspen Zyqad data can be easily updated by re-importing a data file. Click File > Import > Data File. too. page 265 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 267 . you must make modifications the import code to accommodate the changed report layout. are updated with data from the newly imported file. or you can click Close.

then clicking Format > Column > Unhide. 8. Run the Equipment List report. you must clear the SP_ID value. 101.tag suffix . Notes • Importing new pipe runs using the Pipe Run List report is a little different because it also includes SP_ID and Fluid Code columns. and AA display the Tag Prefix. but you must be careful with row copy and paste because the layout is a little different. and Tag Suffix properties. for example. 6. change P-100A to P-101D) by highlighting the last column in the report and the column right next to it.fluid code. page 329 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. In this example. In the resulting report. The path name of the associated symbol is available in column T. respectively. these should be updated to P. Place a pump in a drawing and assign an item tag. The method above is valid. page 334. P-100A. 2. Z. • Related Topics • Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. Click File > Close. click File > Import > Data file. Click File > Save. Tag Sequence Number. and D.tag sequence number . respectively. page 265 268 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 7. change the value in the Item Tag cell (for example.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile 1. Additionally. The delivered Item Tag format for pipe runs is unit code . For more information on generating reports. In SmartPlant P&ID. see Generate a Report. Columns Y. Browse to the Equipment List report that you just created and modified. Click Open. 3. 4. 5.

or when you save a file. Notes • Using Gap Now. and the software gaps your lines automatically as you route them. A progress indicator at the bottom of the window alerts you to avoid selecting another command while the software completes the gapping. when you print.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Gapping Lines: An Overview A gap in a drawing is a condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically in the drawing but not physically in the plant. This procedure can improve the clarity of your drawing considerably. page 270 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 269 . In order to portray this condition. page 269 • Turn AutoGap On or Off. automatic gapping is off. page 270 • Turn AutoGap On or Off. Related Topics • Perform Line Gapping in Your Drawing Now. Gapping refers to the condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the drawing but do not physically intersect in the plant. instead of turning on auto-gapping. You can either turn auto-gapping on. improves the performance of the software. When AutoGap is off. The Gap Now command does not affect the setting for AutoGap. for turning AutoGap on and • Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. page 270 AutoGap Command Tools > AutoGap Turns automatic gapping on or off in the drawing. By default. The toolbar contains an AutoGap button off. When AutoGap is on. can increase the efficiency of your design session. instead of leaving AutoGap on. the software automatically gaps drawings during the working session each time that you modify an item. or you can choose when the software performs gapping on your drawing by using the Gap Now command. you can specify that lines show a gap at these non-physical intersections. Using the Gap Now command. Symbology and priority for your line gaps is set in Options Manager. the software does not automatically gap drawings.

page 156 270 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 269 • Routing Lines: An Overview. • Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. on the entire drawing. The status bar at the bottom of the window alerts you to avoid selecting another command while the software completes the gapping. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. too. page 270 Perform Line Gapping in Your Drawing Now Click Tools > Gap Now. Tip • You can turn the automatic gapping on or off by clicking AutoGap the main toolbar. Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. page 156 Gap Now Command Tools > Gap Now Performs gapping on the current drawing. Notes • Using the Gap Now command does not affect any setting for the AutoGap command. Using Gap Now instead of leaving AutoGap on improves the performance of the software. gaps appear automatically. Gapping refers to the condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the drawing but do not physically intersect in the plant. Notes on • • When you route lines and AutoGap is on. that is. Using the Gap Now command does not affect any setting for the AutoGap command.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Turn AutoGap On or Off Click Tools > AutoGap. page 269 • Turn AutoGap On or Off.

page 272 Update Symbology Command Tools > Update Symbology Updates the line width and color symbology for your active drawing. so that the current values in Options Manager are reflected in the drawing. Notes • Any user can update drawings using these commands. However. page 138 • Update Label Settings. Related Topics Update Symbology. by using the Update Symbology command. You can force changes in Options Manager to appear in the current drawing by updating Options Manager settings. Minimum Connector Segment and Routing Self-Avoidance. check your permissions. the drawing. you can always override plant-wide symbology choices in your drawing by using drawing filters and choosing alternate symbology for items. page 271 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 271 . page 272 • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. Once you load the current plant-wide definitions into your drawing. you cannot revert to previous definitions. page 272 • Update Symbology. regardless of when the drawing was created. The ApplySettingsCmd macro also updates the line settings.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview You can force the software to redraw the graphic representation of your data. • Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. The Update Symbology command makes it possible to override this constraint. page 190 • Update Line Settings. to find out if you can make changes to the plant-wide symbology in Options Manager. Redefining symbology in Options Manager usually only affects drawings created after the change. This command refreshes the graphic symbology of symbols in your drawing based on the current settings in Options Manager. The symbology and other settings defined in Options Manager usually only take effect in those drawings that are created after those values are defined. However. which are assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

unless Options Manager symbology changes again. Click Tools > Update Symbology. 2.dll. page 271 272 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 130 • Update Line Settings 1. Open a drawing. You do not have to update symbology for this drawing again. you can always override plant-wide symbology choices in your drawing by using drawing filters and choosing alternate symbology for items. page 271 • Using Filters: An Overview. page 138. Minimum Connector Segment and Routing Self-Avoidance. even if you end your design session. The Update Symbology command makes it possible to override this constraint. You can change these settings in Options Manager. Click Tools > Custom Commands. double-click ApplySettingsCmd. On the Custom Commands dialog box. Redefining symbology in Options Manager usually only affects drawings created after the change.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Update Symbology 1. However. 2. Note • Two settings. but the new values only affect lines placed after the change. For more information. Notes • The line width and color symbology for your active drawing is changed to the most recent symbology defined in Options Manager. Once you load the current plant-wide symbology definitions into your drawing. Tip • You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program. You must run this macro for every drawing individually.dll macro applies the latest settings to all runs on the current drawing. in Options Manager control the behavior of pipe and signal runs when they are placed in a drawing or when an inline component is placed on a run. see Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Related Topics • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. The ApplySettingsCmd. you cannot revert to previous definitions. • • Related Topics Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview.

You can transfer text.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview This software is compatible with Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) software. The linked data is stored in the source document itself. The information that you move is an object. For example. the pasted data is updated either automatically or manually. This box displays the information that you pasted. When you paste the information in the destination document with the Paste Link option. or images between drawings or documents that were created with this software and other OLE applications. you can use Microsoft Word to make a comment and then display the comment in your drawing. and an Excel worksheet. Embedding copies data in one document and stores the information in another document. Linking stores data in one location and places a copy with a link in another location. a reference point or box is inserted into the destination document. You can insert information created in another application with one of many methods: • You can cut and paste an item to delete it from one location and move it to another location. When you change the original data. or you can insert a Microsoft Excel worksheet into a drawing. You can embed an entire document inside another document by inserting the information with the Insert > Object command on the Edit menu. You can copy and paste an item to duplicate it in another location. If you change the embedded object. You can insert linked information with the Paste Special command on the Edit menu. You can link an entire document to another document by inserting the information with the Insert > Object command on the Edit menu. You can edit the linked information by opening the source document. and vice versa. Embedding copies information and stores the information in another document that was created in a different application. You can even create a drawing that contains another drawing. Linking stores data in one location and places a copy and a link in another location. You can link or embed information between drawings or documents that were created with this software and OLE software. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 273 . When you change the original data. the original information does not change. notes from Microsoft Word. the copy can be updated either automatically or manually. • • • Linking or Embedding An object is data from one application that you insert in a drawing. You can move whole documents around or just parts of a document that you select. You can embed information with the Paste Special command on the Edit menu. numbers. If you change the copied data. the original information does not change and vice versa.

you could link the drawing inside the documents that contained the reports. Embedded information is also a good choice if the information does not need updating. Embedding by Cutting or Copying. The person can still view the information if it is embedded in the document. select the Create From File option and then enter the name. later. For example. not by the size of the data itself. too. If you want to link the existing object. select Link on the dialog box. then link the data to another document. Or if you want to link the object. Linking is also useful when you want to share information in many different places and set that information to update automatically.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If you want to keep the document size small. Notes • If you want to embed the existing object. select Paste Link on the dialog box. If you cannot edit the information. you could update the drawing by editing it in this software. and not remove it from its original location. • 274 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the Paste Special dialog box be sure that you select Paste and not Paste Link. Linked information increases the document size only by the size of the displayed image. If you copy or paste information into an application in which you cannot edit the information. the information appears as a static picture. make sure you have not selected Link on the dialog box. Each report would automatically display the results of the drawing updates. Embedded objects make the file size larger. Then. if you wanted to send out several drawings for review. then use embedding. or browse to the document. The entire document is embedded into the drawing. and Pasting The easiest way to embed an object is to use the Cut. • • Linking or Embedding an Object If you want to insert an existing document. if you want to display a drawing in several different reports that you created in Microsoft Word. and Paste commands on the Edit menu in any OLE software. If document size is not an important factor. press Ctrl while dragging. Copy. you can use Edit > Insert > Object. You can then edit the embedded information with the software that created it. On the dialog box. the software automatically embeds the information in the document. Notes • If you want to copy the information. Embedding is useful when the person viewing the document with the embedded information does not have access to the software that created the object. For example. you could embed each drawing into a Microsoft Word document and send the Microsoft Word document to each reviewer.

page 278 Image Command Edit > Insert > Image Opens the Insert Image dialog box. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. Notes • You can click commands on a shortcut menu to activate the software that created the object. you can correct this problem by using the CheckFilePathsCmd macro. page 283 • Edit an Embedded Object. you cannot edit the object. page 278 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. If items inadvertently point to the wrong catalog. Related Topics • Break a Link. You can edit the embedded image by double-clicking it. page 283 • Change a Link. page 282 • Embed a New Object. To get the shortcut menu. page 282 • Check Symbol Paths. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. Symbols in drawings usually point to the catalog associated with the current plant. You can type an URL with http syntax in the Description dialog box to link World Wide Web documents to an item.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Editing a Linked or Embedded Object To edit an object. Related Topics • Break a Link. page 283 • Change a Link. The menus and toolbars of the current software are temporarily replaced by the menus and toolbars of the software that just opened. right-click the embedded object. you can double-click the object to open the software that created the object. Important • • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by workshare. See Related Topics for more information. If you do not have the source software installed. You must transfer those files manually. page 282 • Embed a New Object. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 275 . where you can embed an image into a drawing.

the software updates only the copy of the object stored in the drawing. . the drawing stores information about the location of the object. page 273 Object Command Edit > Insert > Object Opens the Insert Object dialog box. When you change a linked object. When you change an embedded object. • Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. • When you link an object to a drawing. page 273 276 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the software stores a copy of the object in the drawing.avi document. all drawings that have links to that object are updated. Move the pointer to the location in the drawing where you want to place your image and click to place it. such as a . 3. Related Topics • Break a Link. On the Insert Image dialog box. Click Edit > Insert > Image. browse to the folder and image file that you want to embed in your drawing. You can edit an embedded object by double-clicking it. • The Insert Object command inserts any OLE-enabled object. such as a Microsoft Word file. 4. Click OK. page 278 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. 2. where you can insert objects into a drawing with linking or embedding. page 283 • Edit an Embedded Object. You can edit a linked object by clicking Edit > Links and selecting Open Source. The difference between linking and embedding is the method for storing and updating data.dwg drawing. Tip A box that is the size of the image appears at the end of the pointer so that you know where the image fits in the drawing. When you embed an object in a drawing. but the object itself is not stored in the drawing. page 282 • Embed a New Object. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. or CAD drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Embed an Image 1.

page 219. For more information. you cannot embed a selection in a document. On the Insert Object dialog box. 3. 6. 2. If you attempt to create a symbol source file. If you insert a document into the drawing. see Paste an Item With a Different Format. or update symbols. For more information. • • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 277 . which now includes a box the size of the object at its end. Click Edit > Insert > Object. text. at the location in the drawing where you want to insert the object. With this procedure. click the Create New option. 4. • 5. you embed an entire document.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Embed a New Object 1. click File > Exit or File > Update in the source application. choose the software in which you want to create the object and then click OK. Notes • You can move the embedded object again at any later time. For more information. • Tip The contents of the list depend on the applications that are installed on your computer and that support linking and embedding. page 280. After you create the object in its separate window. In Object Type. If the software temporarily replaces some of the menus and toolbars. Click the pointer. click the Yes button. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the drawing. click anywhere outside the embedded object. page 278. the terminators. Tip You can insert an object that already exists also. and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. Use Catalog Manager to create. Caution • Do not use these procedures to create a symbol file. You can place an object on the Clipboard and then embed it by using Edit > Paste Special. If a message appears asking if you want to update the document. serious problems result in the drawing. change. page 218 or Move an Item Using the Move Button. see Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. see Move an Item With the Select Tool. spaces.

page 121. you can type an URL with http syntax to link documents to an Internet item. at the location in the drawing where you want to insert the object. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. see Create a Drawing Template. 3. 6.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • The software creates automatic links by default. Important • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by Workshare. or click Browse to find and choose the file. click Edit > Links and specify automatic or manual update mode for each link. Caution • Do not use these procedures to change a symbol file. You must transfer those files manually. 5. If you attempt to update. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. type the name and directory path of the document that you want to include in your drawing. which now includes a box the size of the object at its end. 2. page 273 Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object 1. change. On the Insert Object dialog box. • Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. If you want to embed the object. break. Click the pointer. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. In the Description box in the Properties window. An automatic update occurs when the drawing is opened: if a change is made to the source document and the drawing is already open. select the Link box. Click OK. 4. or open the symbol source file. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. serious problems result in the drawing. the change does not appear in the drawing until it is closed and re-opened. click Create From File. 278 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click the ellipses to open the Description dialog box. do not select this option. If you want to link this object to your drawing. The software updates manual links only at the time that you indicate. In the File box. Click Edit > Insert > Object. To change the way the software updates links. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template. For more information about creating drawing templates.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. the change does not appear in the drawing until it is closed and re-opened. too. page 218 or Move an Item Using the Move Button. For more information. page 280. you can create a link only to an entire document. You can embed an OLE object. To change the way the software updates links. you cannot link to a selection in a document. see Paste an Item With a Different Format. the information is embedded. An automatic update occurs when the drawing is opened: if a change is made to the source document and the drawing is already open. click Edit > Links and specify automatic or manual update mode for each link. If you insert a document into the drawing. Important • • • • • • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by Workshare. spaces. The software creates automatic links by default. the terminators. In the Description box in the Properties window. For more information. The software updates manual links only at the time you indicate. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 279 .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • You can move the object at any time later. You can link an OLE by dragging a document from the Windows environment onto the drawing also. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the drawing. such as a Microsoft Word document or Microsoft Excel workbook. If you do not press these keys. With this procedure. You must transfer those files manually. Click the ellipses to open the Description dialog box. by dragging the file from Windows into a drawing. text. and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. You must press the Ctrl + Shift keys while dragging to link the information. you can type an URL with http syntax to link documents to an Internet item. You can place an object on the Clipboard and then embed it by using Edit > Paste Special. see Move an Item With the Select Tool. page 219.

Depending on the type of information. Choose the Paste command to embed the information or the Paste Link command to link the information. select the format that you want to use to paste the information from the list of available options. page 280 Paste an Item With a Different Format 1. Tip • The Results box gives an explanation of the outcome of your selection. Notes • The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use the Cut or Copy command again. Tip You cannot paste an item unless you have previously placed it on the Clipboard with the Copy or Cut commands. both options can be available. If you select an item for the insertion point and that item cannot be replaced. page 253 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Related Topics • Copy an Item. 2. • 3. the Clipboard contents are not pasted over the selected item.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Paste Special Command Edit > Paste Special Inserts the Clipboard contents into a drawing with the format that you select in the Paste Special dialog box. page 273 • 280 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Edit > Paste Special. page 273 • Paste an Item With a Different Format. Pasted text and items remain selected after you use the Paste Special command until you select another item or click Esc. In the As list. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. • • Related Topics Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview.

If you attempt to update. Caution • Do not use this command to change a symbol file.pid file to a MicroStation® or AutoCAD® file. Note • The software does not translate OLE objects that you have linked to your document when you export a . Click Edit > Links on the main menu bar. page 281 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. 3. 2. On the Links dialog box. • 5. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Click File > Save to save the changes in the source file. This command lets you manipulate Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) objects. page 273 Edit a Linked Object 1.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Links Command Edit > Links Edits or updates links to objects in another document. select the link that you want to edit. break or open the source file. Click the Open Source button. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 281 . page 273 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. serious problems result in the drawing. and other OLE objects. Make the changes that you want in the source file. Tip You must have the appropriate software installed on your computer in order to be able to edit the object in its source software. 4. You can change links for Microsoft Word documents. The Links dialog box opens. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. change. Excel workbooks. Related Topics • Edit a Linked Object.

click the link that you want to change. Select Edit > Links. page 273 Change a Link 1. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. In the File Name box. break. 3. 3. Click Change Source. In the Links dialog box. Caution • Do not use these procedures to change a symbol file. If you attempt to update. make sure you update all links to the new source file. 2. 4. serious problems result in the drawing. specify the file that you want to change the link to. Edit the object. Note • If you have other links to the same source file. Tip You must have the appropriate software installed on your computer in order to be able to edit the object in its source software. Tip • If you do not see the file that you want to link to. click either Exit or Update on the File menu to return to the design software. • Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Edit an Embedded Object 1. or open the symbol source file. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. change. 2. Do one of the following: • • If you are editing the object in a separate application window. click anywhere outside the embedded object to return to the design software. If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces menus and toolbars. page 273 282 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Double-click the embedded object. browse to a different drive or folder.

Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Tip • You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program.dll. Click Close. • Related Topics Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. and it creates a log file that reports all symbols missing from the current catalog. double-click CheckFilePathCmd. 2. change. Caution • Do not use this command to edit a symbol file. If you attempt to update. 4. 5. 2. Click Edit > Links. or open the symbol file. break.log.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break a Link 1. Select the link or links that you want to break. click Yes. Notes • The CheckFilePathCmd macro checks the directory paths in the file names of all symbols used in the plant. 3. page 273 Check Symbol Paths 1. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. On the Custom Commands dialog box. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 283 . When the software asks you to confirm that you want to break the link. serious problems result in the drawing. The log resides in your Temp directory and is named CheckFilePathsFor_yourplant. Click Tools > Custom Commands. Click Break Link.

you can drag the assembly into the drawing. Assemblies can save time because you do not have to keep creating commonlyoccurring groups of items. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. page 286 • Place an Assembly. When you want to place an assembly into a drawing. page 287 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Assemblies cannot be placed inline. An example of an assembly is a control valve with vents on both sides. the file structure and symbols must be identical. You can delete just one item without concern that the software deletes the entire assembly. The assembly placement quits. You must place the assembly first and then route piping to it. However. you must save the assembly where the other symbols are located. The information in each label remains intact when you place the assembly. Or. Related Topics • Create an Assembly. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. which is specified in Options Manager. an instrument loop that controls the valve. the items in the assembly are treated as separate items. The file extension for an assembly is . Instead of copying and pasting each individual item into a drawing at several locations.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Working With Assemblies: An Overview An assembly is a group of items that you can place in a drawing at one time. If you want to retrieve the assembly from the Catalog Explorer tree view. and a piping bypass around the valve.pid. Placing assemblies is like placing any other item from Catalog Explorer into a drawing. The Save As Assembly command prompts you to save the assembly in the correct directory. Note • Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. You can create an assembly by selecting several items in a drawing and saving as an assembly. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. you can place the group of items: the assembly. if required. you select the assembly from Catalog Explorer and click a location in the drawing. which is the same file extension as a drawing. After you have placed an assembly.

For example.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Save As Assembly Command File > Save As Assembly Saves selected items as an assembly. therefore. You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. This command is available only when items are selected in the drawing. signal runs. A red target appears at the end of your pointer. Related Topics • Create an Assembly. Assemblies are saved with the . and you can name the assembly and place it in the proper directory. you can use unattached ends of pipe runs. Note • The Save As Assembly command does not constitute an undoable action.pid file extension. page 287 • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. You use this target to specify the origin of the assembly for placement. you cannot use labels. or child items. however. The Save Assembly dialog box opens after you specify the origin. pipe runs. it does not appear as a step available for the Undo command. page 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 285 . page 286 • Place an Assembly.

Tips • You can select more than one item at once by dragging the pointer to fence objects. Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. page 287 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 144 • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. signal runs.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Create an Assembly 1. You can save an assembly in any directory that you want. Use the red target that appears at the end of your pointer to specify the origin of the assembly for placement. However. you can use unattached ends of pipe runs. Tip You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. then you can retrieve the assembly from Catalog Explorer. the file structure and symbols must be identical. • 5. For example. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. The assembly placement quits. Select several components in the drawing. but the default assembly path is specified in Options Manager. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. Notes • Any graphics that have been band-aided should be deleted and replaced prior to using this command. In order to save assemblies. enter the file name. or child items. you must have write permissions to the folder defined in Options Manager. The file extension for assemblies is . If you use the default folder. pipe runs.pid. 2. 4. On the Save Assembly dialog box. • 3. however. Click Save. you cannot use labels. Click File > Save As Assembly. • • • Related Topics • Place an Assembly. click it while pressing Ctrl. page 284 286 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . To remove an item from the selection.

Some assembly members also appear during placement to aid you. or you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. you cannot use labels. or child items. the file structure and symbols must be identical. then you can retrieve the assembly from Catalog Explorer. • • • Related Topics • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. 4. Press Esc to quit placement mode. In the Catalog Explorer list view. However. page 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 287 . page 244 Delete an Item from the Drawing. however. Tips • The red target is the origin of the assembly. • Move an Item Using the Move Button. Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. but the default assembly path is specified in Options Manager. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. page 249 Notes • Assemblies are stored in a specific folder. • Tip You cannot place an assembly into a line that is already routed. For example. page 219 Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. 2. you can use unattached ends of pipe runs. You can save an assembly in any directory that you want. Modify or delete individual components in the assembly as necessary. signal runs. The assembly placement quits. Assemblies. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. pipe runs. 3. Connect the pipe runs and instruments on either side of the assembly. If you use the default folder. Use the red target that appears at the end of your pointer to position the assembly appropriately. click the assembly that you want to place. in the Catalog Explorer tree view. page 242 Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Assembly 1.

drawings are created inside projects. you can claim items on a fetched drawing. actual design work is still accomplished in SmartPlant P&ID. but the claim states of objects inside drawings do have ramifications for drawing manipulation and for completing projects. such as table layouts or formats or rules. You do not need to check out a drawing to claim items on it. and check out drawings. at the project level. the Plant can no longer create drawings. All the modifications and claiming of objects is carried out in the design software.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview After enabling and creating projects in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and using Drawing Manager to manipulate the drawings. Projects and Claiming One of the main capabilities associated with using projects in SmartPlant is the ability for a project to claim a drawing object. All drawing versions in the Plant are read-only drawings when projects are enabled. unless the drawing is either fetched or checked out to a project. check in. Only the project can use the commands on the Project menu in Drawing Manager to fetch. managing and meting out that work is largely controlled from the Drawing Manager interface. However. Note • When you are using projects inside SmartPlant P&ID. remember that the reference data belongs to the Plant and is used by projects of the Plant. any drawings that might have existed in the Plant before projects were enabled remain in the Plant. When a project claims an object. the project controls modifications to that object. However. page 304 288 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You cannot change reference data. Once projects are enabled in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. page 289 • Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview. A project cannot modify objects it has not claimed. but the Plant can still delete these drawings. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview.

However. a error message will be displayed. you can delete it using the same methods that you would use in a green field plant. nor are the mirror and rotate handles available when you select an item not claimed by your project. if you break a pipe run. The simplest way to create a new item is to drag a catalog item from the Catalog Explorer and drop it onto a drawing. the piping components and the instruments in that pipe run must all be claimed before you break it. For example. After you have claimed an item. the vessel. the nozzles attached to it will be deleted and the pipe runs connected to the nozzles will be modified. labels can be added or removed without claiming anything. A new item is created in a project in the same ways it can be created in a green field plant. when an existing drawing is fetched or checked out to a project. For example.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Claiming Items: An Overview A project in the Plant frequently deals with a subset of items within a drawing. For example. Any modification that changes the meaning of the schematic design. you can modify it using the same methods that you would use in a plant that is not project enabled. Since claiming makes it possible for a project to work on an itemby-item basis. a error message will be displayed. requires that the affected items be claimed. the pipe run. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 289 . the nozzles and the pipe runs must all be claimed before you delete the vessel. A new item in a drawing is automatically claimed to the project. then those related items must also be claimed. Properties of items that are not claimed by the active project cannot be changed. Purely graphical modifications to drawing items are allowed without claiming those items. a symbol can be repositioned or the vertices of a connector can be moved. The Properties window and the Engineering Data Editor do not allow editing of properties on items that are not claimed: the properties are read-only as if the drawing is in a read-only state. Before you can modify or delete any of those items. if you delete a vessel. However. Therefore. No other explicit prompts let you know that you cannot edit an item that you have not claimed. If they are not claimed. The Claim functionality provided by SmartPlant P&ID allows you to grant control of an item to a project. If they are not claimed. claiming fosters an ability to define the scope of work as narrowly as necessary. you can manipulate the Drawing view properties so that the claim state of items is visually apparent. none of the items on that drawing are initially claimed. you must claim them. After you have claimed an item. You cannot delete items that have not been claimed. Also. Therefore. however. However. if the deletion of an item would result in related items being deleted or modified. some of the piping components and inline instruments in that pipe run will be reassigned to the new pipe run.

Invalid Claims When an item is claimed by a project. Invalidly claimed items differ from the Plant items in that you cannot modify them and check a drawing into the Plant without first establishing a valid claim. This process automatically sets the claim to valid and allows the check in to occur. Conflict resolution at check in time will be more complex. and on the Edit menu. however. and any new item created in a project is automatically claimed by that project. The Claim Mode controls how items are claimed by concurrent projects. Claim Mode The Claim Mode can be set to either Exclusive or Shared by using the Settings option in SmartPlant P&ID Options Manager. you can fetch a drawing with read/write permissions and claim its objects. With this setting. Releasing Claims From inside a project. Otherwise. You can also release a claim at any time. Invalid claiming can happen only for Plants that support Shared claiming of database items. only one project can claim an item at any given time. If the Claim Mode is set to Shared. Claims are automatically released on all drawing items when that drawing is checked into the Plant.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview You do not need to check out a drawing to claim objects. a single item can be claimed to more than one project. Claim commands appear on shortcut menus in the Drawing view. When the Plant uses Shared claim mode and a project checks in a drawing. but you cannot release the claim that is automatically created when your project creates a new item. If an invalid claim is found but the item in question matches the item in the Plant. If the Claim Mode is set to Exclusive. Invalidly claimed items can not be modified. conflict resolution at check in time is simplified. 290 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the claims made by other projects to objects on that same drawing are now invalid if the project that checked in the drawing also changed an item claimed by a different project. This setting may be required for plants that have overlapping projects. Shared mode allows concurrent projects to overlap at the object level. it must be consistent with the state of the item in the Plant. you can invoke a claim at any time to expand the scope of your project. an invalid claim exists. You can determine the validity of a claim by using the Claim Status command. Exclusive mode enforces the rule that concurrent projects do not overlap at the object level. in the Engineering Data Editor. a drawing cannot be checked in if any objects that are not claimed differ from the Plant. run Verify for Check In to resolve the situation.

see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. Claim comments can be viewed later by anyone in the Plant when the claim status is displayed. Claiming of labels is ignored. You must have full control user access permissions for P&ID Objects before you can claim objects. page 292 • Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology. Claim commands are not available when you open a fetched drawing with read-only permissions. claim is not an undoable command. Claiming items clears the Undo stack. not by a single user. Drawing Manager is the only tool for checking in. and fetching drawings. page 292 • Claiming Items: An Overview. page 302 • Release a Claim. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. The Claim dialog box opens. allowing you to confirm the "claim-ability" of the items and enter claim comments.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Notes • A list of claimed items is automatically published to The Engineering Framework. Remember that objects are claimed by the project. checking out. page 289 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 291 . • • • • • • Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. For more information about setting user access permissions. Once a project claims an item. it can be modified by anyone with the appropriate permissions in that project. page 303 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. Thus. page 301 Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Gives control of the selected items to the current active project.

select the items that you want to claim. and if the Plant uses exclusive sharing. Thus. Notes • • A newly placed item is automatically claimed by the project that placed it. this step can produce an error display on the Claim dialog box. Claiming items clears the Undo stack. On the Claim dialog box. record comments about this claim operation.Lists the items that are selected in the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor and their details. and fill in the Comments box. These are the items that you claim to your project when you click OK. Once a project claims an item. 2. 3. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. Finally the command compares the selected items against the same items in the Plant and displays a warning if an object either differs from that item in the Plant or if the object does not exist in the Plant. The Claim command checks first if your project already has a valid claim on a selected item. • Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. In the Items to be claimed list.Allows you to record comments for the claim operation that you are currently undertaking. page 292 • Claim Command. it can be modified by anyone with the appropriate permissions in that project. claim is not an undoable command. Remember that objects are claimed by the project. You can select multiple elements of this list and record comments for this claim operation. page 44 Claim a Drawing Item 1. you can also see if a selected item is already claimed or has any other claim errors or warnings associated with it. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. Next it checks if the items are claimed by another project. not by a single user.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Claim Dialog Box Opens when you select an item and click Edit > Claim on the main menu bar and displays details of the items that you select for claiming. page 289 292 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In this list. Comments . Click Edit > Claim. select the item or items that you want to add comments to. You can discover if the selected items are already claimed by your project or another project. Items to be claimed .

otherwise. In some cases. If any of the selected items are not claimed. commands simply do not allow the operation to proceed if you do not have the necessary permissions. You must have full control permissions on P&ID Objects before you can claim any drawing items. you can edit its properties through the EDE. the properties can be edited. the Properties window displays the properties of the associated pipe or signal run. The properties of unclaimed items are read-only. Engineering Data Editor (EDE) If the item has been claimed. Controlling Access Each command in the software checks your permissions for the items that it modifies. When you select an item that has not been claimed. but an error message is displayed. When you select a line segment. When possible. the software cannot prevent you from initiating a command. Properties Window When you select a claimed item. the Properties window allows the properties of that item to be viewed and modified. If the run has been claimed. the Properties window allows them to be modified. Note • Claim Mode is defined in Options Manager for the Plant and all its projects. it is claimed to your active project. the Properties window treats the whole group as read-only. such as when using the Delete command. When you claim an item. When you select multiple items. if they are all claimed. see the User Access chapter in SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. the Properties window allows the properties to be viewed but not modified. For more information. otherwise. claiming objects to your project involves many special relationships. The EDE behaves similarly to the Properties window. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 293 . the properties are read-only. the EDE treats the item properties as read-only. No items are ever claimed by the Plant. The following topics discuss some of the ways that claiming restricts your activities. Modifying Properties Claiming impacts properties modifications in the following manner.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Enforcing Claims Whether you are using shared or exclusive claiming mode.

properties can be copied from that item without any problem. it means that you can modify that model item and all of its implied items. see Placement Rules. but other times it does not have to be claimed. if it is not already set. page 294. Placing and Moving Drawing Items Sometimes the target item must be claimed. You can place a flow arrow label. however. if the flow direction is already defined. Placing Piping Components or Instruments in Pipe or Signal Runs The target run must be claimed. For a description of how Reapply Rules can interact with claiming. In some cases this results in resolving an inconsistency. such as when you place a nozzle on a vessel. the applicable rules copy property values across the relationship. The following list explains how the relationship between an object and its target effects claiming. When a relationship to an unclaimed item is created. If a model item is not claimed. the Apply button is not available.A flow-oriented component sets the flow direction of the target pipe run. In certain cases.A reducer is a "line-breaking component.The target item does not need to be claimed. the action is not allowed. The target of that zero-length line must be claimed. The Reapply Rules button executes the placement rules that copy property values across a relationship. • • • 294 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the user cannot modify any of the implied items that the model item owns. • Placing Nozzles. Placement Rules When a new relationship is created. and the properties are not copied. The target pipe run must be claimed. placing a piping component or inline instrument causes a zero-length line segment to be created and automatic line connectivity causes it to be joined to an existing run. or Instrument Components . however.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Consistency Check Dialog Box The Solutions section of the Consistency Check dialog box allows you to copy property values from one item to another. Implied Items When a drawing item is claimed. For the selected solution. Equipment Components. if the destination item is not claimed. if the rule calls for properties to be copied to an unclaimed item. An inconsistency indicator shows the inconsistency between the two related items. Placing Reducers ." The target pipe run and all of its components must be claimed. Placing Flow-Oriented Components .

If the required connected items are not all claimed. automatic line connectivity will cause an existing zero length run to be joined to the new run. as if you pressed the Alt key. • • • If the target item needs to be claimed but is not claimed. Routing Lines up to Freestanding Piping Components or Instruments . you are not allowed to connect to the target. the move operation can become a geometric move. Routing Lines up to Owned Piping Components or Instruments .The piping component or instrument does not have to be claimed. the "no place" indicator is displayed.The target connector must be claimed. as described above. Routing Lines up to Another Pipe or Signal Run . a rotation. a mirroring. and your item will not "snap" into position. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 295 .The nozzles do not have to be claimed. Routing Lines up to OPCs . then you cannot place your item onto the target. sometimes not. must be claimed before these operations are allowed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Placing OPCs on Runs . and a scale or parametric modification. The selected symbol does not have to be claimed to perform these operations. when routing a line segment up to an existing inline component. Placing and Modifying Lines Sometimes the target item must be claimed. If the target item needs to be claimed but is not claimed.The OPC does not have to be claimed. with the Alt key pressed where necessary.The target run must be claimed. The target run must be claimed. The black connection handle does not appear at the required point. the target will not highlight. freestanding placement is still allowed. Geometric Modifications Geometric operations include a geometric move. In most cases. If no type of placement is allowed at that point. None of the connected items have to be claimed either. Rotation and Mirroring of Inline Components Rotations of 180 degrees and mirroring about the local y-axis for inline components are special geometric modifications cases because the lines are disconnected before and reconnected after the operations. In certain cases. the standard claim violation message displays. If the lines are not claimed. the lines. Therefore. Rule-Based Moves All connected items must be claimed. Here is a list of the cases where claiming plays a role: • • Routing Lines up to Nozzles . but not the selected symbol.The piping component or instrument must be claimed since it will be adopted by the new run.

2. consequently. However. The selected run must be claimed. unless the flow direction is already defined for the line. For this to happen. then the following stipulations apply: 1.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Geometric Modification If you move a line segment or a line vertex that is internal to a line. Therefore.A driving label sets one or more properties on the labeled item. 3. then the run it belongs to must be claimed since the branch point is deleted and the adjacent line segments in the existing connected run are merged. modifying a driving label modifies the labeled item. you must claim the item. The entire run and all components must be claimed. 4. Both of the runs and all components in both runs must be claimed. 2. Breaking and Joining Runs The Break Run command allows you to split one piping or signal run into two pieces. The run to be broken and all components within that run must be claimed. Placing Labels on Area Breaks .Placing a label on an area break causes a dynamic property to be added to the area break. The target item may need to be claimed. If the existing connected item is a branch point for the run. The target item may need to be claimed. If a component is connected to the endpoint. • If you modify a label. the following stipulations apply: 1. claiming plays a role in the following cases: • Placing Driving Labels . you do not need to claim it. 296 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . However. the area break must be claimed. This includes flow arrow labels. Extreme End of a Run If you modify the start point of the first line segment in a run or the end point of the last line segment in a run. The target item must be claimed. The Join Runs command allows you to combine two connected piping or signal runs into a single run. it does not need to be claimed. Internal Vertex of a Run Modification of an internal vertex can result in the run being split. then the piping or signal run that owns the selected segment does not have to be claimed. Placing and Modifying Labels The target item for a label usually does not need to be claimed.

If the target is not claimed. and so no claiming is required. you must claim that item. If the target line run is not claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Placing Multiple Representations This stockpile command enables you to place an additional representation of an existing equipment item into the design in a different drawing. thus creating a multiple representation in the database. Related Topics • Place Multiple Representations. Replace Mode The claim status check takes place as you move the pointer over the target. Modifying an area break allows the shape to be changed. You must claim the selected equipment item before this command is made available on the Stockpile menu in the EDE. it is not highlighted as a valid target when you move the pointer over it. the target is not highlighted as a valid replacement target. Find and Replace Items that are not claimed can be found. but they cannot be replaced. To replace an item using these commands. page 154 Placing and Modifying Area Breaks The placement of an area break does not create any new relationships and therefore does not require any claiming. This is a purely geometric modification. The Replace button is not available if an unclaimed item is selected. Placing Gaps Placing a gap symbol into a piping or signal line implies that the target line must be claimed. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 297 . Replacing Drawing Items The Replace and Replace Mode commands replace one item representation in the design with a different representation and change the value of the "type" attribute for the design item.

If all of the selected items and all of the related items are claimed. an error message appears. If any of the items or the dependent items are not claimed. and Cut. item type by item type. Item in Select Set Equipment • • Additional items that must be claimed for Delete All nozzles. all items that are deleted along with a selected item must be claimed. functions. Delete From Model. Drawing Items Drawing items are deleted from a design using three different commands: Delete. then the delete operation proceeds normally. That is. and item notes All item notes on those equipment components and nozzles All runs with lines attached to those nozzles All item notes All runs with lines attached to the nozzle All item notes The pipe or signal run that owns the segment All components in that run All runs with lines that attach to that branch point All item notes All item notes All runs with lines that attach to that piping component All instrument components – actuators.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Deleting Items Claiming impacts item deletion in the following manner. All of these commands check if the selected items and some dependent items are claimed. The following table expands on this idea. All lines that are attached to selected items or are dependent on those items must be claimed. All dependent items must be claimed. and so forth • Nozzle • • Equipment Component Line Segment • • • Branch Point • • Piping Component • • Instrument • 298 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . equipment components.

the Delete command opens the standard claim violation message. both OPCs in a pair must be claimed before they can be deleted. Validating Properties The software uses validation functions before setting properties on items. it can be deleted from the stockpile. If the item is claimed. When an OPC is in the stockpile. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 299 . If the item is not claimed. The selected model item must be claimed before you can use this command. then the plant item group can be deleted. Moving Between Stockpiles The Move to Different Stockpile command in the Engineering Data Editor allows you to move an item from one stockpile to a different stockpile. exist in the stockpile and have relationships to member items on a drawing or in a stockpile. In a project context. If the plant item group or any of its members is not claimed. for example loops. For more information about validating properties. If the item is not claimed. The software checks the claim status before setting any values. and so forth. OPCs can be deleted from the stockpile only if both OPCs in a pair are in the stockpile and are deleted at the same time. For these items. packages. the Delete command opens the standard claim violation message. the property can not be changed. select Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID > Programming Help. Plant item groups. if the item is claimed. Refer to the Extending the Capabilities of SmartPlant P&ID and Logical Model Automation Reference topics. the property can be changed. it maintains its relationship to the partner OPC.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Item in Select Set Additional items that must be claimed for Delete • • All item notes All runs with lines that attach to the instrument All item notes All runs with lines that attach to the OPC The partner OPC must be claimed also OPC • • • Stockpile Items Most items in the stockpile do not have any relationships. If the plant item group is claimed and all of its members are claimed.

Running an update task sets or changes some properties of an existing item. Update Task . Related Topics • Deleting Items. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. The item to be deleted and possibly other related items must be claimed before the task can do its work. If all of the necessary items are not claimed.The Framework > Correlate command correlates pipe runs to the same design basis as an existing pipe run that is already correlated. they cannot be correlated. Claims must be released before projects can be completed or for other projects to be able to check in drawings with changes. Delete Task . Create Task . the task status is set to Error and a note is added to the Notes area on the General tab of the Task Properties dialog box.Running a create task creates a new item in the stockpile. The item to be updated must be claimed before it can be updated. page 301 300 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . A confirmation message is displayed so that you can confirm the release-claim action. If they are not claimed. If it is not claimed. Properties are copied from the primary pipe run to the other pipe runs.Running a delete task causes the target item to be deleted. You must claim the pipe runs to be modified.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview To Do List and Correlating Items Claiming impacts the To Do List and other TEF commands in the following manner. The new item is claimed automatically as soon as it is created. page 298 Release Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Release Claim Allows you to relinquish control by your project of the selected items. page 289 • Release a Claim. the task status is set to Error and a note is added to the Notes area on the General tab of the Task Properties dialog box. Correlate Items .

If a selected item that appears in this dialog box does not have an item tag. which displays the details of the claimed state of the selected items and enables you to claim items.Releases the claim from your project. and discover other details of the claim status. page 289 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. For more information. SP_ID. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. release the claims to items. and so forth. page 302. then the SmartPlant ID. In order to complete the claim release operation. choose Yes to release the claim. and you can claim the item and record claim comments. An item claimed by your active project is denoted by an item with an invalid claim on it is denoted by any other state remains blank. You can review the details of the claimed state of the selected items. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. select the items for which you want to release claims. Right-click the item or select set and click Release Claim. You must select the items in the Drawing view or the Engineering Data Editor before using this command. release the claims to items.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Release a Claim 1. A selected item in the list is highlighted in the design window. Release Claim . select Yes on the confirmation dialog box that opens. see Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. The actual status is displayed in the Claims column of the list. A confirmation message is displayed. is displayed in the Item Tag column. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 301 . You can also release claims on items when you display their claim status. Notes • You cannot release the claim on an item that is claimed to your project if it is a new item that was created in your project.Opens the Claim dialog box. • Claim Status Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Status Opens the Claim Status dialog box. 2. page 302 Claim Status Dialog Box Opens when you select and item or items and click Edit > Claim Status on the main menu bar. claim items. Claim .

page 302 • Release a Claim. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. page 302 Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item 1. You can discover the project that has the claim. On the Claim Status dialog box.Opens the Details dialog box. To see more detailed information about the claim status of that item. Since newly placed items are automatically claimed by the project that places them. select elements in the list and click Release Claim. Click Edit > Claim Status. 5. review the information in the list of items. Related Topics • Claim Status Command. select elements in the list and click Claim. 3. New items are automatically claimed to the project that created them. and you can discover what project has claimed the selected item. and clicking Ctrl + C makes the selected items available to paste into another document.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Details . In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. select an element in the list and click Details. 6. the user that claimed the item. page 45 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. You can select all the items in the list by using Ctrl + A. and claim comments that were entered when the claim was made. select the items for which you want to display the claim status. 2. page 301 Details Dialog Box Displays details about the claim status of the item that you selected in the Claim Status dialog box. the user who claimed it. 4. The New Item entry is automatically added to the comments for an item that is new to the drawing. the user that claimed it. To relinquish claims on those items by your project . page 292 • Claim Status Command. and any related comments. page 45 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. To claim the items to your project. and any claim comments that were entered when it was claimed. their claim comments are always "New Item". 302 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This dialog box opens when you click Details on the Claim Status dialog box. the project that has claimed the item.

not the line pattern. Notes • You define the line color and weight used to designate claim status on the Claims tab of the View Properties dialog box. • Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. then when you print the drawing.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Note • When you see the item tag listed for claimed items and an item tag is not defined for the selected items. Related Topics Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology. If you turn on the display of claim status in the drawing. GUIDs are automatically generated for every design item. Using the options on the Claims tab causes only the color and line weight to change. 2. the software displays the item tag in the Claim Status dialog box. page 303 • Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology 1. When an item tag is defined for an item. You can use this command to switch the claim symbology on and off. the software displays the GUID for that item. Click View > Show Claims again to turn off the display of claim status in the symbology of drawing items. page 289 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 303 . Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. the claim status will be plotted. page 289 Show Claims Command View > Show Claims Sets the appearance of drawing objects as it is specified in the Claims tab of the View Properties dialog box. Click View > Show Claims.

The left-hand view is the older version. if you move an item and change one of its properties). which are listed on the Change groups area of the Compare and Refresh dialog box. addition. or you can compare a version in your database to a version in the Plant or another project database. Change details displays information about selected groups in the Change groups area. Keep in mind that you can compare a drawing only against a version of itself. that is. The relationship between the two views depends on whether you are comparing two versions in your own database or comparing your version to a version in another database. or deletion of a property in the Properties window or Engineering Data Editor in SmartPlant P&ID or through automation. That is. a change. the item is moved or otherwise graphically manipulated in the drawing. Delete . described as left and right views. • • The two versions are displayed in two Drawing views. 304 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and the right-hand view is the newer version. then the highest priority category is displayed. that is. Differences between drawing versions are assigned to logical change groups. you cannot compare one drawing to another drawing.Indicates that the selected group will be added to the version displaying on the right.Indicates the selected group will be modified on the version displaying on the right. Values for the Change details include the following. they are displayed in time-order from left to right.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview When more than one version of a drawing exists. You can compare two versions from inside your own Plant or project database. Modify . Differences display in the following two categories. you can view two versions side-byside and examine their differences by using the Tools > Compare and Refresh command. that is. • Every change grouping and every changed item is assigned a category.Indicates the selected group will be removed from the version displaying on the right. and if more than one category applies (for instance. Data refers to a mismatch in the properties assigned to an item that exists in both drawings. • Two versions are in the active database . • Add . • Graphic refers to an item that has changed only in its graphical representation in the design.

The right-hand view is reserved for the version in your active Plant or project database. The differences display in what is known as a change group. You want to include these changes in your drawing so they will not be lost when you perform a check in. If you accept the changes. Available Databases .Lists all the versions of the chosen drawing in the database you named in the Available Databases list. History . You want to include these changes in your drawing so they will not be lost when you perform a check in. Be sure to refresh all of the changes that do not involve claimed items because these are the changes that have been checked in by other projects. Compare and Refresh Command Tools > Compare and Refresh Allows you to refresh the active drawing with data from another version of the drawing. you use the drawing in the plant. Compare With Dialog Box Opens when you click Tools > Compare and Refresh allowing you to select a drawing version to compare against the version that you currently have open and active. Be sure to refresh all of the changes that do not involve claimed items because these are the changes that have been checked in by other projects.Lists all the different databases that currently have a version of the drawing you chose on the Show History dialog box. Change groups are marked if it affects items you have claimed. Change groups are marked if the changes affect items you have claimed. and the left-hand view belongs to the version in another database because you cannot be assured that time-order is the logical order to display the versions.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Two versions exist in different databases . To refresh a project drawing. the drawing refreshes to display the changes. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 305 . To refresh any differences between these two versions. you must set the Action column to Refresh.

Zoom In . Show Modified .Displays the Compare Options dialog box.Displays colors in the drawings as defined using Compare Options.Enlarges the selected area where you click.Area that lists the changed items in groups. Change groups .Displays the properties in either an alphabetic list or by specific category. Zoom Area . If not selected.Allows you to move the display in any direction by dragging the pointer across the view.Displays a report in Microsoft Excel. the Default items color displays.Defines which action is to be taken involving the selected change. Number . Action . Generate Report .Displays modified properties. Print . Find in List .Prints the entire Compare and Refresh dialog box contents. Find in Drawing . Select . The report contains the details of the compared drawings.Zooms to the selected item. Zoom Out . You must first select an item in either the Change groups or Change details area.Enlarges the selected area by allowing you to draw a fence around the area. Alphabetic Categorized . A listed item contains all the items this change effects.Displays the number assigned to each change group. Checkbox column .Changes the pointer to an arrow allowing you to select an item.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Dialog Box Compare Options . You must first select an item in a drawing.Highlights the line in the Change groups and Change details areas. You can also specify to print either the right or left view by using the drop-down arrow to select either Right View or Left View. Pan . Options include: 306 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Allows you to customize the display colors for items that differ between the two drawing being compared.Reduces the display of the selected area where you click.

Indicates that a change has been made to an item in the drawing (for example.Indicates if an item is a valid or invalid claim. and No Action .Indicates that the items in the group have been claimed. Refresh .Adds the listed item to the version on the right.Indicates that the claimed item is a valid claim. a vessel has been moved). Options include: • Data . • Category .Defines the results of the compare.Applies any drawing changes to the open drawing version. Change . Change details . Result . Delete . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 307 . Graphic .Indicates that a property value has changed (for example.Area that lists the details of the item in each change group. Specific Item Type . • Claimed .Describes what action is required to make the drawing in the right frame match the drawing in the left frame.Displays the category of the change.performs no action on the selected drawing group.Displays the specific type of item. Valid Claim . a property value for a vessel). a vessel has been moved).indicates that a change has been made to an item in the drawing (for example.Validates Invalid Claims for the selected group (no drawing changes are applied).Describes the type of item.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Validate . The column indicates any differences in the two versions and which version contains the change.Removes the listed item from the version on the right.Displays the category of the change. • Claimed . • Data . Modify . Graphic .Indicates that a property value has changed (for example. Item Type . Actions include: • • • Add .Changes the listed item in the version on the right. Category . a property value for a vessel).

Displays properties grouped by specific categories. all properties are listed.Allows you to choose a color to denote that a drawing object is highlighted.Lists properties in alphabetical order. when an item is within your locate zone. Black is the default color for this option. Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. for added and deleted items. modified properties). 308 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Red is the default color for this option.Allows you to choose a color to denote items that are selected in one or both of the Drawing views.Allows you to choose a color for the display of objects that exist in the right-hand Drawing view only. Blue is the default color for this option.Toggles the display of only those properties that are different between the properties that belong to a selected drawing item.Allows you to choose a color for the display of drawing items that are identical in the two views. The active color scheme is displayed in the Compare dialog box status bar. Left-only . for instance. Highlight items . Compare Options Dialog Box Opens when you click Compare Options on the Compare dialog box toolbar and allows you to customize the colors that the various comparison states are displayed in.Allows you to choose a color for the display of objects that exist in the left-hand Drawing view only. This button only applies to modified items that exist in both versions. Different items .Allows you to choose a color for the display of items that exist in both views but differ from each other for any number of reasons (for example. Show Modified . Categorized .Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Dialog Box Properties Window Toolbar Allows you to customize the properties that are displayed in the Properties window of the Compare dialog box. Right-only . Selected items . Alphabetical . Dark green is the default color for this option. Identical items .

2. 7. Refresh. 4. Validate will display as an option only if you have an Invalid Claim. Using the drop-down list. 3. On the Compare and Refresh dialog box. or Validate. In the Change groups area. Click Tools > Compare. select a database using the Available databases drop-down list box. The version you are comparing it to displays on the left. 5. Your current drawing displays on the right side of the screen. review the information in the Change groups and Change details areas. click in the Action column. select the drawing you want to compare your current drawing with. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 309 . On the Compare With dialog box. 6. Click OK.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Drawing Versions 1. select No Action. Click OK to refresh the drawing and accept any changes or Cancel to dismiss the dialog box. In the History list box. 8.

310 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Clicking in the Action column of the Change groups allows you to take no action or refresh (accept the new property value). a jacketed tower exists in the version to be selected for the compare. The current version appears on the right and the version it is compared to appears on the left. All items in the group are valid claims. Data Example In this example. If you Refresh the version. The current version contains the same jacketed tower but a change has been made to the Cleaning Requirements property.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Examples The following examples provide details for reconciling data and graphic differences between your current drawing and a previously created version of that drawing. the property value will be modified as shown in the Change column. Change groups indicates there is only one group and a data change was located. a data change is found during the compare. When the current version is compared to the selected version. Change details indicates the compare located a different property value (Cleaning Requirement) in the current version.

When the current version is compared to the selected version. The current version contains the same jacketed tower but it has been moved to a new location. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 311 .Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Graphic Example In this example. If you Refresh the version. All items in the group are valid claims. The setting are not applied to a version until you click OK. Change details indicates the compare located a graphic modification to a vessel (Jacketed Vessel) in the current version. a graphic change is found during the compare. a jacketed tower exists in the version to be selected for the compare. the graphic modification will be accepted as shown in the Change column. The current version appears on the right and the version it is compared to appears on the left. Change groups indicates there is only one group and a graphic change was located. Clicking in the Action column of the Change groups allows you to take no action or refresh (accept the previous location of the vessel).

The current drawing appears on the right and the drawing it is compared to appears on the left. All items in the groups are valid claims. a new nozzle has been added. the action described in the Change column will be performed when you click OK. When the current drawing is compared to the selected version. and a property for the jacketed tower has been changed. 312 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The current drawing contains the same jacketed tower and nozzle. Change groups indicates there are three groups of differences. Clicking in the Action column of any of the three Change groups allows you to select either No Action or Refresh. a jacketed tower with a nozzle exists in the version to be selected for the compare. Change details indicates the compare located an existing nozzle was moved (Graphic) and a property value change (Data) in the current drawing.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Data and Graphic Example In this example. a data and graphic change is found during the compare. If you select Refresh for any of the three groups. The original nozzle has been moved.

Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency checking verifies the suitability of work that a designer performs while creating the drawing. Another solution is to reapply placement rules that normally copy properties from one side of a junction to another at the time of item placement. This illustration shows the inconsistency indicators that highlight incorrect relationships at a junction of items in a drawing. pipe runs inherit properties from nozzles. An error appears where the pipe run connects to the pump nozzle (A). and offers hints. The software includes pre-defined standard industry design propagation: for example. Using these solutions. One solution is to approve a warning and thereby remove the inconsistency from the drawing. The software displays all the inconsistencies. An approved warning accompanies the off-page connector (C). page 317 • Show Inconsistencies. page 314 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 313 . The software verifies. you can decide the best method to resolve an inconsistency. describes specific problems. A warning appears at the point where the valve and pipe run intersect (B). Related Topics • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. if the composition of a drawing and the underlying data model satisfy rules that your company has defined. in real-time. Consistency checking continuously monitors your work when you change or add items to a drawing. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. Additional consistency checking and design propagation are defined in Rule Manager. page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency.

Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. Click View > Show Inconsistencies. page 313 314 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 314 Show Inconsistencies 1. Select Show > Inconsistencies to toggle the display of inconsistencies off and on. When this option is selected. inconsistent relationship indicators appear in the drawing. The software does not mark consistent.Consistency Checking: An Overview Show Inconsistencies Command View > Show Inconsistencies Turns on or off the display of indicators that identify inconsistent relationships in the active view. error-free relationships. page 313 • Show Inconsistencies. click View > Show Inconsistencies again to clear the selection of the option. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. you can right-click in an empty portion of the drawing in order to display a shortcut menu. If you do not want the inconsistencies to appear. 2. Note • Also.

page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency. As you create a drawing. you can correct the problems by reviewing them on the Consistency Check dialog box. consistency checking monitors your drawing for design discrepancies. page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. page 317 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 315 . Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview.Consistency Checking: An Overview Properties Command Right-click an inconsistency indicator and choose Properties to display the Consistency Check dialog box. If a location in the drawing has only one or multiple inconsistencies.

When the Consistency Check dialog box first appears. their specific problem area. and alternate design pressure between a piping component and pipe run — three different problems but at the same junction.Allows the display of inconsistencies that pertain to the first item. and lists the inconsistencies. Description . all items involved in the inconsistency are selected.Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency Check Dialog Box Opens when you display the properties of an inconsistency indicator.Lists all inconsistencies that exist at the selected junction. You cannot change the inconsistency description. When you select one of the inconsistencies in the list.Displays the actual error or warning. a ToolTip appears to reveal the entire description. are listed on the Consistency Check dialog box. Other sections of the dialog box provide details that are specifically related to the selected inconsistency. all items involved in the inconsistency are selected.Allows the display of inconsistencies that pertain to the second item. Inconsistencies . 316 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . which is provided for information only. Item 2 . For a lengthy error or warning. and solutions for resolving the inconsistency. the software automatically selects the first item in the list. All inconsistencies that occur at a junction. Item 1 . When this dialog box first appears. normal operating temperature. the software displays information specific to that inconsistency in the Solutions box. You open this dialog box by right-clicking an inconsistency indicator and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu. When the Consistency Check dialog box first appears. regardless of severity. A specific example of this type can involve data inconsistencies for nominal pipe diameter.

Reapply Rules . 3. Consistency Check identifies the type of problem with these symbols: Errors.Copies properties from one side of the selected inconsistency to the other according to placement rules. Invoking the placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. page 28 • Resolve an Inconsistency. page 317 Review an Inconsistency 1. or you can click Reapply Rules to copy properties from one side of the indicator to the other according to placement rules. Approved warnings.Performs the solution you choose from the Solutions box. • • You can choose the appropriate solution in the Solutions list and click Apply in order to correct an inconsistency. and after clicking Apply.Consistency Checking: An Overview Solutions . Apply . Note • Canceling selection of Item 1or Item 2 excludes the item from the select set in the drawing and thereby affects the display in the Properties window. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. Open a drawing. Warnings. Double-click an inconsistency indicator. On the Consistency Check dialog box. 2. After selecting an inconsistency from the Inconsistencies list. The inconsistencies are then re-evaluated and the dialog box is updated. the selected solution is performed. Related Topics • Properties Command.Lists solutions for resolving the drawing inconsistency. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 317 . you can right-click an inconsistency indicator and select Properties. you can select the correct solution from this list. Tip In addition. review the list of possible problem areas at the junction. • Notes • The options for solving the inconsistency in Solutions vary depending on the type of inconsistency.

Error in the Drawing view that warrants your inspection and correction. page 313 318 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. the Drawing view offers different inconsistency indicators: Warning for suspicious construction in the Drawing view.Consistency Checking: An Overview • To alert you to possible problems.

Tips • Or you can right-click an inconsistency indicator to review its properties. Tip • An example of a solution is Copy property value Item 1 => Item 2.Consistency Checking: An Overview Resolve an Inconsistency 1. for example. Click Apply. you can select it and click Apply. Chose the appropriate solution from the Solutions list. The options in the Solutions list vary. which could involve inconsistent nominal diameters of a pipe and nozzle. 5. select the inconsistency that you want to correct in the list. • 4. If you determine that this solution is the best one. Or you can use the Properties window to change the nominal diameter of either the pipe or nozzle. depending on the type of inconsistency. This action can correct the inconsistency. Notes • Consistency Check identifies the type of problem with these symbols: Errors Warnings Approved warnings • A Drawing view also offers graphical symbols to alert you to possible problems: Warning for suspicious construction in the Drawing view Error in the Drawing view that warrants your inspection and correction SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 319 . you can click the Reapply Rules button on the Consistency Check dialog box. Open a drawing. 2. • Tip • In addition. you can choose the Reapply Rules command. When you right-click the indicator. Double-click an inconsistency indicator. On the Consistency Check dialog box. Changing the diameter confirms that the values are consistent with the information that exists in Rule Manager. 3.

page 322 • Review an Inconsistency.Consistency Checking: An Overview Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 317 320 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency.

For example. invoking the placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. if your vessel has a cleaning requirement assigned to it and you place a nozzle on the vessel. An inconsistency indicator at the junction between the vessel and the nozzle is displayed for the mismatched cleaning requirements. rather than a single inconsistency. It is possible that you still need to choose Properties from the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu to open the Consistency Check dialog box and resolve any remaining inconsistencies there. You can add the Reapply Rules command to the main toolbar. and on the Toolbars tab in the Tools category. page 322 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 321 . This button is particularly useful when you want to reapply rules to a select set. choosing Reapply Rules causes properties to be copied from one side of the inconsistency to the other according to the same rules that govern copying properties at placement. Go to Tools > Customize. Notes • The Reapply Rules button is available on the Consistency Check dialog box. then the cleaning requirement is copied to the nozzle at placement. page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. the nozzle does not inherit that property. too. however. • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. But if you place a nozzle on the vessel and then you assign a cleaning requirement to the vessel. then the rule that copies the cleaning requirement to the nozzle at placement is re-invoked and the inconsistency is resolved.Consistency Checking: An Overview Reapply Rules Command Available on the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu. That is. choose the button for Reapply Rules Then you can reapply rules with one click. this command reapplies the rules defined in Rule Manager for copying properties at placement. and drag it to the main toolbar. If you use Reapply Rules at this indicator. Frequently this command resolves the inconsistency in your drawing.

You can add the Reapply Rules command to the main toolbar. and on the Toolbars tab in the Tools category. 2. page 313 322 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . rather than a single inconsistency. too. Right-click the inconsistency indicator to display a shortcut menu.Consistency Checking: An Overview Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency 1. Go to Tools > Customize. choose the button for Reapply Rules and drag it to the main toolbar. Placement rules are defined in Rules Manager. Then you can reapply rules with one click. • • • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. This button is particularly useful when you want to reapply rules to a select set. Notes • Invoking placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. Select Reapply Rules. You can use the Reapply Rules command from the Consistency Check dialog box. It is possible that you need to choose the Properties command from the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu in order to open the Consistency Check dialog box and resolve or approve any remaining inconsistencies there.

page 267 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 323 . you can also populate or redefine pipe run properties by importing an Aspen Zyqad stream data file. you can assign the stream and its associated engineering data to the pipe run. During the import process.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Importing Drawing Data: An Overview There are several ways you can import data into SmartPlant P&ID. You can import data and items into the database using reports and other files. SmartSketch files can be imported into SmartPlant P&ID using the SmartPlant Migrator wizard. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. Also. page 13 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. Related Topics • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID.

log. Note • Relationships between items cannot be imported. which is saved to your local TEMP folder.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Import Data File Command File > Import > Data File Allows you to import data and items into the database from reports and other files. only items and their properties. Import log .Lists the results of the file importing process. These results are also available in SPImport. Related Topics • Import Data File Command. page 265 Import Log Dialog Box Shows the progress of the data importation process and allows you to review the log file. page 267 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. page 324 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile. page 267 324 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 268 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. Related Topics • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. This dialog box opens when you use the Import > Data File command on the File menu.

Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Import SmartSketch Command File > Import > SmartSketch Allows you to import data from SmartSketch into SmartPlant P&ID and starts the SmartPlant Migrator wizard. During processing. Symbols attached to stand-alone symbols 3. To account for the rules in SmartPlant P&ID. Connectors and pipes 4. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. Stand-alone symbols 2. The database does not contain any information for these unmapped objects. Related Topics • Import a SmartSketch File. Symbols attached to symbols that are attached to a connector or pipe 6. Placement Order After the SmartSketch file is scanned and all its objects are mapped to SmartPlant P&ID objects. Labels 7. Any graphics that cannot be mapped are placed in a SmartSketch file that is then placed as an inserted object in the SmartPlant P&ID file. Symbol placement is performed in this order: 1. When migrating your SmartSketch file to SmartPlant P&ID. Symbols attached to connectors or pipes 5. the Migrator looks at the SmartSketch symbols to determine what the symbols are attached to. For example. a nozzle cannot be placed unless it is attached to a piece of equipment. the Migrator maintains graphic visual fidelity. the Migrator uses rules to determine the order in which to place the resulting symbols. Certain symbols cannot be placed unless a rule has been met. the Migrator scans the SmartSketch file and maps all the objects to SmartPlant P&ID equivalent objects. page 328 Using the SmartPlant Migrator The SmartPlant Migration Wizard is a data migration tool provided by SmartPlant P&ID for converting and importing process flow diagrams (PFDs) and preliminary process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) from SmartSketch into SmartPlant P&ID. SmartSketch does not have rule sets. SmartSketch graphics that are not recognized as symbols SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 325 . In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID.

but are not connected. you must open the item in Catalog Manager.Nozzles are required for connection of piping in SmartPlant P&ID. or you can edit a symbol map file to equate the symbol names between SmartSketch and SmartPlant P&ID. These attributes are the same as the SmartPlant P&ID properties for the same items. and if that same symbol with same properties is available in SmartPlant P&ID. You can check the symbol map file. Properties .Appropriate flow direction is established based on the terminator of the connector. if given a value in SmartSketch.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Rule Considerations Because the SmartPlant Migration Wizard cannot account for all the rule possibilities that are defined in the default SmartPlant P&ID rule set or a customized rule set. SmartSketch has a default set of attributes for vessels.csv. Nozzles are required in the SmartSketch document for connections to be established when converted to SmartPlant P&ID. • Nozzles . both products have independent sets of symbols. migrate to the SmartPlant P&ID property database. for duplicate codes. and shell and tube exchangers. symbol definitions and attributes migrated from a SmartSketch file are stored as properties in the SmartPlant P&ID database. Supported Templates . You define custom properties for SmartPlant P&ID symbols by using Catalog Manager. All of those attributes. therefore. compressors. Symbols . Because SmartSketch is file-driven and SmartPlant P&ID is databasedriven.User-defined and default SmartSketch properties are mapped to an equivalent SmartPlant P&ID property. To view the code. You can add your own unique attributes to a P&ID symbol in SmartSketch. This file is created during the migration process and you can open this file by using Microsoft Excel.Delivered symbols with a matching AABBCC code are mapped intelligently to the equivalent SmartPlant P&ID symbol. Notes • The AABBCC code is not displayed in Catalog Explorer or the Properties window in SmartPlant P&ID. 326 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Intergraph Process Flow and P&ID symbols map to the SmartPlant P&ID reference data included with the software. You have to make valid connections manually in SmartPlant P&ID. SmartSketch symbol attributes are conditionally migrated. Non-Nozzle Connections . pumps.Piping linear objects not connected to nozzles are placed in SmartPlant P&ID. you must create your SmartSketch drawing with the SmartPlant P&ID rule set in mind. Flow . SymbolMap. custom SmartSketch attributes can migrate into those properties. this means that the attribute must exist as a SmartPlant P&ID property for that symbol.

1F6Y01. 1. • Unrecognized Graphics and Annotations . In the Type box. In the Name box. select the geometry that you want to migrate and copy and paste it into another file. type AABBCC_code. the symbols that were migrated. If you want to migrate only a portion of a file. do the following. Right-click the symbol page in order to open the File Properties dialog box. This rule maintains visual fidelity even if there are items that could not be mapped intelligently. which are labels that are associated with one or more object properties. and click the Symbol tab. You can determine if all the graphics in your file migrated correctly by viewing the GetSmart. Then the file you just created can migrate Notes • • In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. This file contains information about the migration such as the file that was migrated.All unrecognized graphics are inserted in the SmartPlant P&ID drawing as embedded SmartSketch graphics. Limitations .Item tags and other single property labels are maintained intelligently. SmartSketch does include a subset of the SmartPlant P&ID labels. The properties of these smart labels are passed to the symbol to which they are attached and migrate to SmartPlant P&ID. Open the P&ID label in Catalog Manager.log file in the Temp folder.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview SmartLabels . Any label placed in SmartSketch must have an equivalent label in SmartPlant P&ID before it can migrate. and any errors encountered during the migration. 5. 3. enter the appropriate AABBCC code. In order to assign an AABBCC code to a SmartPlant P&ID label so that it matches a SmartSketch label. 2. In the Value box. select Text. and most of the common labels are smart labels. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. for example. the time that the migration started and stopped. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 327 . 4.The following list shows planned limitations of the Migrator: • • • Multiple iterations are not supported Flow direction that is indicated by using symbols is not understood The primary goal is not to take fully developed P&IDs into a data-centric environment The SmartSketch Migrator converts entire files only. Notes • Labels in SmartSketch files are migrated very much like symbols.

Open the drawing that you want to import the SmartSketch objects into. Click File > Import > SmartSketch. page 325 328 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • 3. the time the migration started and stopped. Then the file you just created can migrate. Notes • The SmartSketch Migrator converts entire files only. This file contains information about the migration such as the file that was migrated. the symbols that were migrated. Tip • The Migrator allows you to browse in the file system for the SmartSketch drawing that you want to import.log file in the Temp folder. • Tip You can create a new. You can determine if all the graphics in your file migrated correctly by viewing the GetSmart. • Related Topics • Using the SmartPlant Migrator. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Related Topics • Import a SmartSketch File. Follow the instructions in the SmartSketch Migrator. and any errors encountered during the migration. page 328 Import a SmartSketch File Important In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. If you want to migrate only a portion of a file. if you want to. 2. empty drawing in Drawing Manager. 1. select the geometry that you want to migrate and copy and paste it into another file in SmartSketch.

You can easily update stockpile items that originate from importing Aspen Zyqad data by re-importing a data file. Click the Browse button and select the Aspen Zyqad stream data . page 13 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. page 267 Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data 1. Related Topics • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. Pumps. Such spreadsheets include the Vessel Equipment List. cell to display the Stream Number dialog box. Importing Aspen Zyqad XML data files allows greater flexibility when importing data into the design software. Click the Stream ID list and select a stream ID. • 3. 4. For more information. During the import process.xls. and Heat Exchanger Equipment List. Aspen Zyqad spreadsheets in either Microsoft Excel or XML format are supported. whether they remain in the stockpile or have already been placed in the drawing. Select a pipe run from the drawing to display the Properties window for the pipe run. 2. are updated with data from the newly imported file. Pump Equipment List. . modifications must be made to the import code to accommodate the changed report layout. All three reports. Vessels.xml file from the appropriate folder. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 329 . page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data You can populate or redefine pipe run properties by importing an Aspen Zyqad stream data file. Click the Calculate button next to the Stream No. Important • If a format change is made to an exported Aspen Zyqad report. see the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide. Tip If the Properties window is not open. 5.txt. are included in a single XML report so that only one file has to be imported. Click OK to populate the Properties window with the selected stream ID. you can click Edit > Properties after you select the pipe run. you can assign the stream and its associated engineering data to the pipe run. Previously imported items. and Exchangers. or .

page 265 330 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Note • Existing values in the Properties window are redefined by importing Aspen Zyqad stream data. Related Topics • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile.

if a nozzle is added as the toplevel item in the tree. If the nozzle is added as a child of Equipment: Mechanical. you can create a report. Your report definition contains one or more report items organized in a tree hierarchy. only items that have a relationship with your selected item type can be used as input. and thereby how you can map the properties that you want into your report templates. see the Properties Glossary. nozzle. When creating your report. Microsoft Excel starts. Each report consists of a Microsoft Excel workbook and a report definition. You begin your reporting process by selecting a report template from the Reports menu and then selecting items in the drawing for inclusion in your report. The relationships that exist between the various item types constitute additional available information for a report. a report based on the equipment item type contains a report item named Equipment. Examples of item types include equipment. however. a nozzle report item can be added to access data about nozzles because nozzles and equipment are related. You can define additional report items to access more properties for more item types. This report item makes the properties associated with each piece of equipment available for inclusion in your report. and then the Excel workbook opens. you do not have to include every available property in your report if it is not appropriate. however. Each report item is based on an item type. only the information about nozzles that are associated with pumps is collected. For example. The location of a report item in the tree hierarchy affects the properties that are collected for the associated item type. instrument. For example. Then the software performs the following tasks: 1. This item type serves as the starting point for collecting data for your report. 2. all nozzles in the database are collected for your report. which is included in the glossaries attached to online Help. a nozzle is related to the equipment with which it is grouped. Each report contains at least one report item to define the item type of the report. Your data is retrieved based on the report item definitions of the report template. 3.Generating Reports: An Overview Generating Reports: An Overview Reporting is the process of retrieving information from the database and displaying the information as formatted output. For example. At any time during the design creation process. Each report that you create is based on an item type. and pipe run. Your report definition is retrieved from the Excel workbook. In order to discover how items and their properties are related. Several default report templates already exist. You can create your own reports that contain the information that you want to see in a format you choose. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 331 . For example. The report template is copied to the report output folder. reports are fully customizable. which describes the data to collect and how to organize the data in the workbook.

page 349 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. • Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 348 • Generate a Report. Data prints to the Microsoft Excel workbook using the cell mapping data in your report definition. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. page 334 332 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Generating Reports: An Overview 4. The software stores the reports that you generate in your Windows directory under \Profiles\username. Notes • You must have installed Microsoft Excel on your computer to display reports. page 350 • Edit a Report Template.

This list is alphabetical. This command is available on the Reports menu on the main toolbar and also on the View menu in the Engineering Data Editor. The location of these report templates is defined in Options Manager.Produces a report containing the items currently selected in your drawing or table. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. page 331 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. If you want to run a report based on items in your Engineering Data Editor. If you want to run a report on drawing items. Selecting a plant report from this list and specifying the items that you want to report on generates the associated report in Microsoft Excel. Include items in drawing stockpile . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 333 .Produces a report containing the contents of the entire drawing. use this command from the Reports menu. If you have a drawing in the Design window and you want to report on items in that drawing. if you want to run a report on table items. page 38 Plant Reports Dialog Box Allows you to choose a report and specify what items to report on.Generating Reports: An Overview Plant Reports Command Reports > Plant Reports Opens the Plant Reports dialog box. use this command from the Engineering Data Editor View menu. Note • The Engineering Data Editor is the area where you can view stockpile items. which displays a list of all plant-level reports associated with the current plant. Entire drawing . Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview. This option is not available if no drawing or table items are selected. use the Reports menu. Current Selection .Allows you to specify whether or not you want items that reside in the drawing stockpile in your report. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. use the Engineering Data Editor View menu. This dialog box opens either when you click Reports > Plant Reports on the main toolbar or when you click View > Plant Reports on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. You cannot choose the Include items in drawing stockpile option when you choose Current Selection.

Click Reports > Plant Reports. • • Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview. verify that every line in the selection has an Item Tag. • Tip Or click Reports > My Reports to select a customized report that you defined already. Notes • You must have installed Microsoft Excel on your computer to display reports. 2. Related Topics • Generate a Report. the software gives you the option to report on all items. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. select the items that you want to include in the report. Select the report that you want to generate. 3. page 265 334 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 147 Generate a Report 1.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • A report can contain up to the default value of 255 items. In the Report using area on the Plant Reports dialog box or the My Reports dialog box. page 331 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. page 333 • Select an Item. page 334 • Plant Reports Command. The software stores the reports that you generate in your Windows directory under \Profiles\username. Using either of these options allows the software to ignore the 255 item limit. • 4. Before running the Line List report. choose the items that you want to report on. Tip If you select no items. You can include more items in your report by selecting Entire drawing.

access this command from the Reports menu on the main toolbar. The options that appear in this area depend on the view. Entire drawing . This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. You cannot choose the Include items in drawing stockpile option when you choose Current Selection. access this command from the View menu on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Related Topics • Edit a Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview My Reports Command Reports > My Reports Opens the My Reports dialog box which lists all user-level reports. that is active when you access this dialog box. use the Engineering Data Editor menu. If you want to run a report on drawing items. page 348 • Generate a Report.Displays options for specifying the scope of your report. page 331 My Reports Dialog Box Allows you to choose one of your custom reports and to specify what items to report on. Report using . Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. This dialog box opens either when you click Reports > My Reports on the main toolbar or when you click View > My Reports on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. not the Engineering Data Editor command. Current Selection . Include items in drawing stockpile .Produces a report containing the contents of the entire drawing. page 334 • Generating Reports: An Overview. Note • You can define the location for storing user-level report templates by clicking Tools > Options and then selecting the Files tab. This list is alphabetical. They can be stored on your local workstation. use the Reports menu.Produces a report containing the items currently selected in your drawing or table. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 335 . If you want to run a report based on drawing items.Allows you to specify whether or not you want items that reside in the drawing stockpile in your report. if you want to run a report based on table items. This option is not available if no drawing or table items are selected. if you want to run a report on table items.

page 335 • Select an Item. Related Topics • Generate a Report. You can include more items in your report by selecting the Entire drawing option. page 334 • My Reports Command.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • A report can contain up to the default value of 255 items. Using either of these options allows the software to ignore the 255 item limit. page 147 336 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

that report template is tightly linked to the plant that creates the property. any item that is related in any way to the basic item type of your report makes its properties available to include in the definition of your template. Fixed format templates allow the greatest amount of freedom in formatting your report. Not only can you completely control the format of your report. thus.Generating Reports: An Overview Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview Although the software includes several default report templates. but you can control the content of the template also. page 357 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. page 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 337 . you create your own custom report templates or modify the delivered templates in order to gather and display the specific information that you want. page 340 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. such as Equipment List and Pipe Run List. combine tabular and fixed formatting. too. when a property is mapped to a report template. the properties of inline components and instruments can be used in a pipe run report because inline components are related to their pipe runs. So the software allows you to define report templates in several different formats and with all manner of information from the design database. as long as all plants use the same property name. the same report template is valid. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 338 • Edit a Report Template. page 341 • Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. and the properties that are associated with that item type are readily available to include in your report. page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. therefore. which is included in the glossaries attached to online Help. Now the property name is mapped into the report template. Each report is based on a unique item type. and composite report templates. as the name suggests. see the Properties Glossary. In addition. and thereby how you can map the properties that you want into your report templates. You can create report templates in three different formats: • • • Tabular Fixed Composite Format Report The delivered report templates are all tabular format reports. Portable report templates In previous versions of the software. For instance. In order to discover how items and their properties are related. the template file stores an internal identifier for that property.

Be sure to include space in your header for the labels of your columns. On the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. The Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is important for setting aside space for the header and empty rows between lines in the report because the placement of report item properties is restricted in the tabular format report template. tabular format reports are row-based. page 338 • Display the Properties of a Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Tabular Format Report All the delivered report templates are tabular format reports. click Options. you are free to type a label and map report item properties anywhere in the lines that you designate for your header. the output appears like this: Equipment Name Equipment Description Equipment Type D-100 T-100 Horizontal Drum 100 Potable Water Tank Horizontal Drum Vertical Tank Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. the report template for an Equipment List can appear like this: Equipment Name Equipment Description Equipment Type #Equipment::Name# #Equipment::Description# #Equipment::Type# When the report is generated. page 348 • Generate a Report. page 357 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. In other words. That is. page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. For example. such as Unit or Plant Name. • • • 338 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . all properties populate the report by using the same format defined for the first row. When the report is generated. you can add graphics in your report header. The header is a good place to put information that applies to all the items in your report. Also. 2. On the Options dialog box. Tips • The header is part of the tabular format report template where data is not mapped based on rows. page 334 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template 1. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. choose the size of your report header.

9. for example the Line List. in your header. if needed. a new Microsoft Excel worksheet is created. if you create a template based on an existing template.Generating Reports: An Overview 3. designate two rows of data for each report item and then an empty row. Properties for all the items follow the format you map for the first one. the format of your report template is also tabular. For more information. Tip This cell can be either in the body of the report or in the header. • 5. and the header is saved on the new sheet because the entire header no longer fits in the space allotted on the first sheet. Save the template and quit Microsoft Excel. Choose the property that you want to map to your cell from the Map Properties menu. • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 339 . • 10. The location for user-level templates is defined on the Files tab of the Options dialog box (Tools > Options). Notes • Because the delivered report templates are tabular format. The items on this menu are chosen when you define the contents of your template. Only one property can be mapped to a given cell. Repeat the previous steps until you have mapped all the properties that you want to map on this report template. page 357. Each row is filled with properties for one item. Tip Some report templates. Choose the number of empty lines that you want between rows in your report. 4. The location of plant-level report templates is specified in Options Manager. 7. although the same property can be mapped to more than one cell. Select Blank as your source template if you want to create a fixed or composite format report template. You can customize the number of rows in the report header by using the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and choosing a larger value in the Rows in report header option in the Options dialog box. When you add any property value in the header. Complete general labels and graphics. Select a cell in your report template where you want to map a particular property. 8. Click OK to close the Options dialog box. • Tips • You only have to map properties for one item. Complete column headings in the last row of your header. 6. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template.

Repeat the previous steps until you have labeled and mapped all the needed report item properties to the corresponding locations in your template. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Tip The properties on the Map Properties menu are specified when you define the contents of your report. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. For more information. one for each item of the report item type. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. page 340 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. page 338 Fixed Format Report The fixed format report creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. • 340 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 4. When you generate your report. Choose a cell on your Microsoft Excel worksheet and type labeling information into it. Click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Tip A label is not a required feature of a fixed format report template. all fixed format worksheets. When defining the report template. 2. and from the menu select the property that you want to map to the cell you chose in the previous step. Choose a cell where you want the property associated with the labeling to appear. and the layout for each worksheet matches the layout defined for the first worksheet. page 348 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template 1. follow the format of the first Microsoft Excel worksheet. When you generate a fixed format report. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. You can simply map properties to cells without any labeling if you want. • 3. page 357. the data for each report item appears in its own worksheet. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. page 349 • Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Related Topics • Composite Format Report. you only edit the first worksheet.

The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere on your worksheet. page 348 • Generate a Report. The properties of the first item are displayed on the first worksheet. the first worksheet is automatically fixed format. In a composite format report template. page 341 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. Note • Because the delivered report templates are tabular format. In your Microsoft Excel workbook the first sheet contains the fixed format report. Tips • Each item in the report has its own page. Define the layout of the first Microsoft Excel worksheet. but the properties for subsequent items in the report are displayed starting with the third sheet because the second worksheet is tabular format. choose Blank from the Source template list if you want to create a composite format template. page 340. Related Topics • Composite Format Report. see Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. page 338 Composite Format Report The composite format report template is a combination of fixed and tabular format reports.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • You use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. page 334 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template 1. page 344 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. For more information about defining fixed format report templates. and the second sheet contains the tabular format report. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 341 . You choose your report format on the Report Properties dialog box.

page 338. the second worksheet is automatically tabular format. however. the Options command is available for you to use in the tabular portion of the composite report template. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want to on your worksheet. Define the layout of the second Microsoft Excel worksheet. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. For more information about defining tabular format report templates. a new Microsoft Excel worksheet is created. although you can map the same property to more than one cell. • Related Topics Composite Format Report. When you add any property value in the header. 2. page 338 • 342 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In a composite format report template. Notes • You can map only one property into a given cell.Generating Reports: An Overview You use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. see Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. • 3. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. After you have defined the layout for the first and second worksheets in your report template. and the header is saved on the new sheet because the entire header no longer fits in the space allotted on the first sheet. You can customize the number of rows in the report header by using the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and choosing a larger value in the Rows in report header option. save the template and quit Excel.

you must specify an item type. formats.xls to the name when you save the Excel workbook. Templates in this list appear in alphabetical order. the item type automatically displays the item type that corresponds to your source template.Generating Reports: An Overview New Command Reports > New Displays the New Report Template dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > New on the main menu bar. plant-level template. This dialog box provides options for defining plant-level and user-level templates.Specifies your report format. You only edit the first worksheet. Item type . but all fixed format worksheets. This name matches your Microsoft Excel workbook. You do not have to edit the report template when you first create it. Name . Related Topics • Composite Format Report. one for each item of the report item type. follow the format of the first worksheet when you generate your report. and composite. You can assign source templates. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. If you chose Blank. whereas.Defines the item properties available in your report. if you do not chose Blank. and descriptions for your report template and define the item type upon which you base your report. page 349 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 343 . The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. or Blank.Creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. The Blank option creates a Microsoft Excel workbook with no predetermined formatting information. page 338 New Report Template Dialog Box Displays options for creating plant-level and user-level report templates. If you do not select a Blank source template type.Allows you to enter a meaningful name to describe the report that you are creating. tabular.Lists the names of all existing report templates and Blank. then the Item type option automatically displays the item type that corresponds to your source template. names. You select a user-level template. All delivered report templates are tabular format. Fixed format . Report Type . page 340 • Tabular Format Report. The software appends . Available options include fixed. Source template . page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. page 341 • Create a New Blank Report Template.

you must choose Blank if you want a fixed or composite format report template. page 345 • New Command. 3. the software appends . • Tip This entry is the name of your Microsoft Excel workbook. nonetheless. For more information. • 5. 344 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 350 • Edit a Report Template. Since delivered reports are all in tabular format. When you save the template. In the Item type box. page 348 • Edit Command.Formats your report in a combination of fixed and tabular formats.Generating Reports: An Overview Tabular format . You can assign any description. That is. On the New Report Template dialog box. Composite format . Tips • You can create a new report template based on an existing template by specifying a source template also. see Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. Tip • These options are only available when you choose Blank from the Source template list.Formats your report in a table. page 349. choose template format. page 34 Create a New Blank Report Template 1.Describes the report type that this template produces. type a meaningful name to describe the report template you are creating. Click Reports > New. Description .xls to the name. page 344 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. In the Report type box. Subsequent fixed format worksheets are created after sheet two for each item of your report item type when you generate your report. In the Name box. the properties of each item included in your report begin on a unique row. 4. or the template format is row-based. the second sheet is Tabular format. select an item type. All delivered reports are tabular format. 2. The first sheet in the workbook is Fixed format. You can select Blank for a tabular format report template. select Blank from the Source template list. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template.

click OK and define the layout and contents of the template. Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. In the Description box. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. 8. • 9. page 357 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. select the Add to plant reports option. page 341 Related Topics • Composite Format Report. type a description for the template. When the software gives you the option to edit your new template in Microsoft Excel. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. For more information on those procedures. You can select a template and view its properties and edit it in Microsoft Excel. 7. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. If you want this template to be available at the plant-level. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 331 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 345 . page 348 • Fixed Format Report. Note • You must have valid privileges to edit a report template. Click OK to create the template. This dialog box lists all the available report templates. to create plant-level report templates. Tip You must have the appropriate permissions. page 340 Edit Command Opens the Edit Report Template dialog box.Generating Reports: An Overview 6. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

Open . Available reports . whereas.Defines the item properties available to populate your report.Specifies your report format. and composite. Name . Templates in this list appear in alphabetically. to edit plant-level report templates.Displays the selected template in Microsoft Excel. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. if you do not choose Blank. you must specify an item type. page 345 • New Command. Source template . Report Type . If you choose the Blank option. The name matches your Microsoft Excel workbook. Available options include fixed. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > Edit on the main menu bar. the software automatically specified the Item type option as the item type that corresponds to your source template. plant-level template.Lists all report templates available to edit or customize. Select a template from the list. the Item type option is automatically specified with the item type that corresponds to your source template.Displays the Report Properties dialog box where you can modify the description and the report template format. The software appends . The Blank option creates a Microsoft Excel workbook with no predetermined formatting information. This dialog box opens when you click Properties on the Edit Report Template dialog box.xls to the name when you save the Excel workbook. tabular. 346 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . or Blank. You select a user-level template. Important • You must have the correct privileges. page 34 Report Properties Dialog Box Displays properties for plant-level and user-level report templates. Properties .Allows you to enter a meaningful name to describe the report that you are creating. Related Topics • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. Click Properties to view and update properties for a report template. If you select a source template other than Blank. Item type .Generating Reports: An Overview Edit Report Template Dialog Box Displays a list of available report templates and opens the selected report template in Microsoft Excel so that you can make changes to it.Displays the names of all existing report templates and Blank. page 349 • Edit a Report Template. page 348 • Edit Command.

Formats your report in a table. page 34 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 347 . page 344 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. but all fixed format worksheets. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Fixed format . one for each item of the report item type. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. page 345 • New Command. You can assign any description.Creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. All delivered report templates are tabular.Formats your report in a combination of fixed and tabular styles. or the report format is row-based. the second sheet is tabular format. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. Tabular format . That is. page 348 • Edit Command. follow the format of the first worksheet when you generate your report. the properties of each item included in your report begin on a unique row. Composite format . Description . The first sheet in the workbook is fixed format. You only edit the first worksheet. the software creates subsequent fixed format worksheets after sheet two for each item that matches your report item type. When you generate your report.Describes the report type that this template produces.

Delete in the Immediate window. Quit Excel. 2. Click Open on the Edit Report Template dialog box to display the report in Microsoft Excel so that you can edit the layout and contents of your report template. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Click Properties on the Edit Report Template dialog box in order to edit template properties on the Report Properties dialog box. For more information about these procedures. 2. page 357 Notes • If the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is missing when editing report templates in Microsoft Excel. then on the Excel menu bar. select a report from the Available reports list. Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview.CommandBars("SmartPlant Reports").Application. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. see • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. 3. Type Sheet1. 3. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. changing the Report type option and the description are the only available actions on the Report Properties dialog box. to edit a report template.Generating Reports: An Overview Edit a Report Template 1. select Tools > Macro > Visual Basic Editor and follow these steps: 1. page 341 Define the Contents of Your Report Template. 4. On the Edit Report Template dialog box. Select View > Immediate Window. Tip Because you are modifying a template that already is defined. page 337 • Generating Reports: An Overview. and the toolbar is displayed the next time a report is edited. page 331 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Reports > Edit. • You must have the correct permissions.

4. For more information. page 357 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. choose Blank from the Source template list. click OK to open Microsoft Excel and define the contents and layout of your report. On the New Report Template dialog box. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. 5. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. page 341 Notes • Because the delivered report templates are all in tabular format. select an existing template from the Source template list. Click OK. 6. type a name for the new report template. 3. page 340 • Generating Reports: An Overview. some options on the New Report Template dialog box are not available. For more information about those procedures. In the Description box. Click Reports > New. 2. see Create a New Blank Report Template. type a description for the new report template. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. In the Name box. • Related Topics • Composite Format Report. if you create a template using an existing template. Because you are creating a report based on an existing template. page 331 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 349 . page 344. When the software gives you the option to edit your template. the format of your report template is tabular. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template 1. In order to make all options available.

which allows you to select and delete a report template. Select Reports > Edit. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 34 350 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 345 • New Command. Available Reports . page 351 • Edit Command. page 331 Delete Report Template Dialog Box Displays a list of available report templates. 3. page 346 Delete Command Reports > Delete Displays the Delete Report Template dialog box. Click Properties. page 351 • Generating Reports: An Overview. Related Topics • Delete a Report Template. Note • You must have valid privileges. to delete a report template.Generating Reports: An Overview Display the Properties of a Report Template 1. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.Lists all available report templates. Related Topics • Delete a Report Template. Select a report from the Available reports list on the Edit Report Template dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > Delete on the main menu bar. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. 2. Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. You can delete a selected report template if you have the proper privileges. page 331 • Report Properties Dialog Box.

page 17 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 351 . 2. page 348 • Map Properties Command. 4. page 331 SmartPlant Reports Toolbar Appears when you are editing or creating a report template in Microsoft Excel. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. On the Delete Report Template dialog box. 3. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. Quit Excel. 2. Click OK to delete the report template. Important • You must have the correct privileges. Note • If the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is missing when editing report templates in Microsoft Excel. Click Reports > Delete on the main menu bar. and the toolbar is displayed the next time a report is edited. select a report from the Available reports list.Delete in the Immediate window.Application. Select View > Immediate Window. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.CommandBars("SmartPlant Reports"). page 360 • Options Command. then click Tools > Macro > Visual Basic Editor in Excel and follow the steps below: 1. page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Related Topics • Define Command. Click Close. Type Sheet1. 3.Generating Reports: An Overview Delete a Report Template 1. to delete a report template. Related Topics • Edit a Report Template.

In order to define the layout of the report item properties. For the selected item in the Report on tree. Each report item is based on an item type (equipment. or item types related to it. and so forth) and controls how the properties of that item type. To create a report definition (a list of report item properties available to include in your template). page 348 Define Report Contents Dialog Box Defines new items to include in your report and selects the cells to include for the new items. click Tools > Macro > Macros > PrintFromToDataForAllSheets in Excel. instrument. pipe run. This dialog box opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. page 344 • Edit a Report Template. use the Define Report Items dialog box.Generating Reports: An Overview Define Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Define Opens the Define Report Contents dialog box. Define .Displays the Define Report Items dialog box. A report definition describes how to collect the properties data and how to format it in a report. You map properties to the individual Microsoft Excel cells to define the content and layout of your report. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. Use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. are retrieved from the database. you define the properties that you want available for inclusion in your report template. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on the worksheet. Select the cell and then select the property from the Map Properties menu on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. This template is a Microsoft Excel workbook that contains cells and worksheets. which opens when you click Define on the Define Reports Contents dialog box. Choose the PrintFromToDataForActiveSheet macro to generate this data for only the active worksheet. which allows you to define a report template specifying the layout and contents of your report. nozzle. Note • In order to generate From and To data for all Microsoft Excel worksheets. you assign properties to particular cells. 352 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

For instance.Adds the selected item type to the Report on tree on the Define Report Contents dialog box. New . page 348 • New Command. Its properties are no longer available for your report template. Note • The level into which you add an item type affects the properties that you can access for your template. you must select an item from the Report on list and click Define.Displays a tree view of item types the properties available for inclusion in your report template. a new item type added into the hierarchy under another item type does not give you access to the same properties that you have if the item type is higher in the hierarchy. Apply . Select an item type to make its properties available to include in your report. the equipment item type only reports on equipment associated with a nozzle.Displays the New Items dialog box. The software adds this item type as a child of the item type selected on the Define Report Contents dialog box. Then you can map the properties that you select to cells in your report template. Report on .Removes an item from the tree view and from your report structure. a new item type added into the hierarchy under another item type does not give you access to the same properties that you have if the item type is higher in the hierarchy. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 353 . Note • The level into which you add an item type affects the properties that you can access for your template. That is. and equipment without nozzles is not reported. That is. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. and equipment without nozzles is not reported. To include the properties. the equipment item type only reports on equipment associated with a nozzle. if you add the equipment item type under nozzles.Generating Reports: An Overview Delete . For instance. page 349 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. If you add a new item type. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. if you add the equipment item type under nozzles. You use this dialog box to specify new item types to include in the Report on tree. its properties are available for inclusion in your report template. page 34 New Items Dialog Box Opens when you click New on the Define Report Contents dialog box and displays a list of items that are related to the item that you selected there. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template.

Group by the selected property . This dialog box is accessed by clicking Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. in turn. page 34 Properties Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Displays properties for a report item so you can select properties to use in your report template. page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Items related to . The Report Item Group Total property displays the number of items that have identical reported properties. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box. 2" nominal diameter. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 34 Define Report Items Dialog Box Specifies the report item properties available for your report. Name . such as item tags. which. onto your report. is accessed by clicking Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. page 344 • Define Command. the software prompts you to rename the new item type uniquely. Select item types from this list to include in your report template. then items are never grouped together because a unique tag is a property that items never share.Automatically adds a special Report Item Group Total property to the Map Properties menu on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. If you do. For example.5" nominal diameter. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. page 348 • New Command.Displays the name of the selected item type. you can use this feature to give you the total numbers of valves with 1" nominal diameter. page 348 • Edit Command. and so forth. page 345 • New Command. be sure not to map unique properties. 1. page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. 354 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Displays a list of item types related to the item type that you selected in the Report on tree on the Define Report Contents dialog box. You can rename the item. The properties of the new item types are then available to use in your report. If you want to tally similar items in this way. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. Select the properties to include for each report item type and define sorting and filtering for those properties. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. If you have duplicate item type names in your report item type hierarchy.

You can select more than one item by using the Shift and Ctrl keys and then clicking the right arrow. Selected properties . Use short text .Includes the numerical index of the select entry along with either the short value or select list value for that property.Displays the cells of parent item data in your report. Also. the short value is longer than the regular value.Moves the selected item in the Selected properties list to the Available properties list. Related Topics Edit a Report Template. In a few cases. For example.Displays the short text value. Only select-listed properties can be displayed in their short value form.Generating Reports: An Overview Repeat parent data . which is defined in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. Right Arrow . page 348 • New Command. Left Arrow .Lists the report item properties you have selected from the Available properties list that are consequently available for inclusion in your report. if your report contains Unit then Drawing as a child of Unit. page 34 • New Report Template Dialog Box. Use select list index .Moves the selected item out of the Available properties list and into the Selected properties list.Displays all properties for the report item you specified on the Define Report Contents dialog box. see SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager Help. page 343 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 355 . selecting this option for Drawing causes repetition of Unit cells on any line containing Drawing cells. For more information about select lists and their values and indices. double-clicking an item in the Selected properties list moves it to the Available properties list. Available properties . You can select more than one item by using the Shift and Ctrl keys and then clicking the left arrow. double-clicking an item in the Available properties list moves it to the Selected properties list. Also.

Displays the properties selected for sorting. Right Arrow .Moves the selected item down in sorting priority. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. page 360 • Options Command. in turn.Moves the selected item in the Sort properties list to the Available properties list. Left Arrow .Moves the selected item in the Available properties list to the Sort properties list. page 17 • Sort Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Defines the cells that you use to sort the report items and how. Down Arrow . double-clicking an item moves it to the Sort properties list. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box.Displays the Select Filter dialog box. double-clicking an item moves it to the Available properties list. Related Topics • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. You can select more than one item and then click this button.Lists all the properties of your report item.Displays your selected filter. opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Also. which. Up Arrow . opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Browse . in turn.Moves the selected item up in sorting priority. Sort properties . which.Generating Reports: An Overview Filter Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Defines the filter that you want to use for your report item.Specifies the sorting order (ascending or descending) for the report data. page 348 • New Report Template Dialog Box. Also. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. Order . which allows you to choose or to further define item types for your report template. Related Topics Define Command. Available properties . page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 348 • Map Properties Command. page 343 356 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 357 • Edit a Report Template. type a valid filter name or click Browse to locate a filter. You can select more than one item and then click this button. Applied filter . To select a new filter. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box.

• Using the New command skillfully allows you to navigate in all directions in the plant hierarchy and gather properties from throughout the plant database. Click New. Tip If you want to add more new items under another node in the hierarchy. Change the name of the item that appears in the hierarchy by typing text in the Name box. Select the node in the Report on hierarchy under which you want the new item type to appear to add a new report item type so that its properties are available to map onto your report template. you can choose from only those items that are related to the item you selected in the Report on hierarchy. On the Properties tab of the Define Report Items dialog box. 2. you must type a different name for it in the Name box. select an item with properties that you want for your report template. You can add items under any nodes subordinate to the main report item type as long as they have items related to them. 10. Tips • When you click New on the Define Report Contents dialog box. click Close. 4. The highest node in the Report on hierarchy under which you can add a new item is the node that belongs to the report item type that you base your template definition on. Click Define. Tip If the item that you choose has the same name as an item elsewhere in the hierarchy. 6.Generating Reports: An Overview Define the Contents of Your Report Template 1. 8. When you have added all the items that you want from this list. Click Apply. select the new item that you want to add to the hierarchy. On the SmartPlant Reports toolbar in Microsoft Excel. choose that node and repeat the previous steps. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 357 . On the New Items dialog box. On the Define Report Contents dialog box. • 9. 3. choose the properties that you want to map to your report template. click Define. • 5. • 7.

page 357 • Edit a Report Template. Choose the PrintFromToDataForActiveSheet macro to generate this data for only the active worksheet. If you want to change the filter that finds your report items. • Tip The Define Report Contents dialog box remains open. In order to generate From and To data for all Microsoft Excel worksheets. click OK on the Define Report Contents dialog box. click Tools > Macro > Macros > PrintFromToDataForAllSheets in Excel. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. For instance. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want to on your worksheet. • Notes • All the properties that you have made available to map into your template are now displayed when you click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Related Topics • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 331 358 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. choose the property or properties to sort on by using the Sort tab. 11. you can switch from a filter that displays all pumps to a filter that displays only active pumps. use the Filter tab. 12. page 331 Options Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Options Opens the Report Options dialog box. When you have selected all the properties that you want in your report. Now you can use the properties you have specified in the layout of your template. which provides options for defining header and spacing details in your report template. Click OK. and so you can repeat the previous steps to continue adding more items and specifying their properties.Generating Reports: An Overview Tips • If you want to sort the order in which your items are listed when you generate a report. • Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview.

Generating Reports: An Overview Report Options Dialog Box Specifies the number of empty rows between items in your report and the number of rows in your report header. page 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 359 . page 341 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. The maximum value allowed is 1000. Skip lines between rows . page 338 • Edit a Report Template. page 349 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. You can enter a value in the box or use the scroll buttons to select a value. you are not constrained to have a header or rows at all. It is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place captions and properties in any configuration that you want. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. In fixed format report templates. Note • The Options command is available for tabular and composite format report templates only.Defines the number of blank lines between each row in your report. This dialog box opens when you click Options on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar in Microsoft Excel. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template.Specifies the number of rows in your report header. Rows in report header .

You can select a cell in your report template and then assign a property from the Map Properties list. Note • The SmartPlant Reports toolbar appears in Microsoft Excel when you create or edit a report template. page 349 • Edit a Report Template. page 331 360 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. This menu is populated with the items that you define with the SmartPlant Reports toolbar Define command. The Map Properties menu contains a subset of all the properties in the plant database. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. The software places the corresponding property in the selected cell.Generating Reports: An Overview Map Properties Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Map Properties Displays a menu of all properties associated with your report. and you can add properties to the menu by using the Define command again. You do not have to map all the properties in the Map Properties menu. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview.

Note Zero length pipe runs will print. If you use printer fonts. To set the print range and scale. Before you print a drawing. such as TrueType® fonts. It also supports pen plotters.Printing Drawings: An Overview Printing Drawings: An Overview You can print your drawings on many different devices ranging from dot matrix printers to laser printers and plotters. Use scalable fonts. To do this. However. you must install and select the printer you want to use. when a reducer is connected to a nozzle. subject to the limitations of the device driver. For example. the screen display of the drawing closely matches the printed drawing. or file. select a printer and the settings for it. Before you print. the fonts you select can affect the match between what you see on the screen and what appears on the printed page. you can send a copy of it to a specified printer. your drawing prints exactly as it appears in the Drawing view. or filtered items. You can set properties for the printer by clicking the Properties button. Set printing options. Items look the same on the screen and in the printed drawing. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 361 . plotter. You can click the Print command on the File menu to do the following: • • Print an entire drawing or specific views from a drawing. printer fonts. see the documentation for your printer. to make sure that what you see on the screen is what appears on the printed page. The software supports plotting using standard Windows plotting capabilities. Except for the color settings and a few special effects. Three kinds of fonts affect your work: scalable fonts. and screen fonts. click the Settings button. This stipulation applies to special settings like the display of claimed items. Printing a Drawing As you work on a drawing. inconsistency indicators. and then click the printer you want to use. For more information about installation. Zero length pipe runs will not print if you print your drawing using Drawing Manager. you must have a corresponding screen font and font size to display each font on the screen. If each screen font you use has a matching printer font. such as the range of sheets or number of copies to print. the zero length pipe run between these symbols will print. click the Print command on the File menu. Preparing to print The printer you use affects the way the current drawing prints and displays text on the screen.

Printing Drawings: An Overview Printing Part of a Drawing You can print selected sheets in a drawing or a selected area. Related Topics • Print a Drawing. A DPR Windows printer driver extends the capabilities of File > Print to add drawings to the DPR. You can print not only drawing items that are selected. anyone with a Web browser can view the digital drawings online. After you populate the DPR. but other items that are in the view with the select set print. because they can make the necessary calculations faster. Printing to a Digital Archive You can use a separate Intergraph software application to store drawings in a Web server-based digital archive called the Digital Print Room (DPR). Expect longer print times when you have drawings that contain a large number of the following items: • • • • Curved items Many fills that have complex colors. or textures Large bitmaps Links to various drawings The type of printer you have also affects the printing time. This feature is handy if you are working on a complex drawing and you want to print only certain parts to proof them. The type of controller boards and the amount of RAM in the printer also affect your printing times. Some older versions of PostScript® printers are slower when compared to the newer ones. Contact Intergraph for more information. PostScript® printers print faster than LaserJet printers. You can print all views or certain views. Printing Time Drawings can take some time to print. patterns. page 368 362 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 365 • Print a Selected Area. page 366 • Print to a File.

Properties .Displays any comments you entered during printer configuration. such as. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 363 . The Print to File dialog box appears when you select the Print to file option on the Print dialog box and then click OK.Identifies the printer path. Type .Opens the Printer Document Properties dialog box. Options are available for defining the printing area. The printer you select in the Name box is the default printer for the rest of the current design session until you specify a different printer. or physical location of the currently selected printer. printer port. or file. busy or idle. printer.Specifies the printer you want to use. page 102 Print Dialog Box Controls how a drawing is printed. For help on installing a printer. Then you can print from a computer that does not have the application installed or print to a printer other than the one you currently have configured. This area is read-only.pri instead of sending it to a printer. This dialog box opens when you click File > Print on the menu bar. range. Status . page 367 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Where . Selecting File > Print also opens the Print dialog box. This area is read-only. which allows you to specify page setup and other printer settings. you must install and select a printer. The information below the Name box applies to the selected printer. You can select from a list of all the available configured printers. You select a file name and location for the print file in the Print to File dialog box. This area is read-only. Before using this command.Printing Drawings: An Overview Print Command File > Print Sends a copy of the active drawing to a specified plotter. queue name. Name . Print to file . page 361 • Set Print Options. Comment . Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. see the printer documentation. number of copies.Displays the type of printer currently selected.Describes the state of the selected printer. This area is read-only. and other printing characteristics.Stores your drawing in a file with extension .

Prints your entire drawing. When you select this option. This dialog box opens when you click Settings on the Print dialog box. page 365 • Print Command. page 368 • Set Print Options. page 363 • Print to a File.Prints a faint graphic in the drawing background. For example.Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the configured device. View . This button is disabled when the Selection option in the Print range group is selected. Print black and white . Settings .Prints the copies in proper binding order. Selection . If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale. Active .Prints the drawing in black and white. Number of copies . then the printed range appears to be 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper.Prints only the active view. Related Topics • Print a Drawing.Activates the All and Active check boxes so you can then define the view or views to print. if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12.Prints the user-defined area. 364 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Prints your entire drawing on one page.Printing Drawings: An Overview Drawing . Collate . the Settings button at the bottom of the Print dialog box is unavailable.Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing.Prints each defined view associated with the drawing. Type the number or use the scroll buttons to specify a number. Best fit . page 367 Settings Dialog Box Specifies the area you want to print. All .Opens the Settings dialog box. Manual scale . Print watermark . you can set the Paper length option to 1 and the Design length option to 1.Displays the number of copies you want to print. Fit to page . which allows you to view and edit the scale and origin of your print area.

specify the range of pages you want to print. 4. Preview . If you do not set this option. Design length. when you change an option. 2. Therefore. page 365 • Print a Selected Area. Click Print on the Main toolbar. page 363 • Print to a File. Because the fonts available on the selected printer affect both displaying and printing. Related Topics • Print a Drawing. Center . and black boxes in the Preview area change to reflect your new values. page 368 Print a Drawing 1. X.Sets a shift in the y-direction from the origin. In the Number of copies box. and so forth. blue. Select the printer that you want to use from the Name list. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 365 . page 366 • Print Command. 3. type the number of copies you want. select the printer before you begin working on a drawing.Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left. Note • For many of the options on this dialog box such as. Paper length. you have a dynamic representation of how your graphic fills the printed sheet.Printing Drawings: An Overview Paper length . Caution • It is a good idea to save your drawing before you print it so that a printer error or other problem does not cause you to lose any work completed since the last time you saved the drawing. the red.Sets a shift in the x-direction from the origin. Design length . X origin .Specifies a design length (size of the printed graphic) with respect to the Paper length option. Y origin .Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print with respect to the Design length option. Y.Displays dynamically how the graphic prints on the sheet as you change other options on the dialog box. In the Print range box.

choose Selection from the Printer Range area.Printing Drawings: An Overview Notes • You can set other options for the printer by clicking the Properties button or the Settings button on the Print dialog box. you must connect the printer to the computer or network. page 368 Print a Selected Area 1. Tip For more information on zooming in on an area of a drawing. Click File > Page Setup to specify the drawing size. page 363 • Print to a File. On the Print dialog box. Select the portion of the drawing for printing. Click Tools > Options. • • • Related Topics • Print a Selected Area. page 361 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Click File > Print. page 23. see the printer documentation. install a printer driver. and select the printer to print the drawing. Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. page 366 • Print Command. For more information about how to install a printer. see Zoom In on an Area. 2. Before you can print for the first time. You can display the drawing as it is to be printed. page 144 366 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • 3. On the General tab. select the Display as printed option.

source. The Print to File dialog box appears. use SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. Click Selection. • Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview.Printing Drawings: An Overview Set Print Options 1. select View and All. You can create more than one Drawing view by selecting Window > New > Drawing and zooming or panning to the area of the Drawing view that you want to print. select Drawing. Do one of the following. select Collate. To sort the sheets by sheet number. Click OK. Tip • button on the Main toolbar. Select the item or portion of the drawing that you want to print. To print The entire drawing All defined views Do this Under the Print range option. and orientation. which has multiple drawing printing functionality. In the Number of Copies box. The active view A selected area To a file Select View and then Active. select Fit to page. If you want to print more than one drawing. Click OK on the Print dialog box. The entire drawing is printed. Multiple copies Drawing fit to 1 page Watermark Black and white Notes • You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print dialog box. Under Options. Under Options. and you can enter the file name and select its location. The Settings button becomes unavailable. Select Print to file on the Print dialog box. enter a number of copies. page 361 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 367 . select Print watermark. Click File > Print or the Print 2. You can set the paper size. Arrange the views you want to print. select Print black and white. Under Options. and then on the Print dialog box.

3. 6. click Properties. Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. On the Print dialog box. 4. 2. 4. select the folder to which you want to print to. view or change the Orientation option and choose the Duplex Printing option if necessary. view or change the Paper Source option and color quality setting. click Print 3. Click OK.prn extension. On the Print dialog box.Printing Drawings: An Overview Change Printer Properties 1. Click Properties on the Print System Advanced Options dialog box to open the Halftone Color Adjustment dialog box and further specify color. Click Advanced on the Printer Document Properties dialog box to specify more printing options. On the Main toolbar. Note Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. page 361 Print to a File 1. and so forth. the Copy Count. and type the name of the file. Click File > Print. and so forth. On the Layout tab. On the Paper/Quality tab. On the Print to file dialog box. picture. The file is saved with a . such as. page 361 368 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 5. Paper Size options. Note • . style. Scaling. 2. select Print to file.

for example. page 119 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. orientation. Browse .Printing Drawings: An Overview Page Setup Command File > Page Setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box. page 125 • Set Document Properties. Choose the template size from the list. The Custom option is not available for existing drawings. You can set the sheet size. which allows you to specify information about the layout and size for the drawing or template.Click this button to search for a watermark graphic. Sheet Size . page 102 • Page Setup Dialog Box Specifies information about the layout for the entire drawing. Orientation . The size choices are more limited for an existing drawing than for a new template. page 370 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. and watermark. Click File > Page Setup to open this dialog box. a B-size drawing to a C-size. only for new templates. Custom . If you select Custom as the sheet size. you must type custom W and H values. Show Watermark .Specifies when a watermark appears by selecting either the While working option or the While printing option. page 116 • Set up a Page Layout.Click either the Portrait or Landscape option.Sets the size of the sheet. that is. The page orientation is displayed according to each option. H (Height) . If you select Custom as the sheet size.Displays the height of the custom sheet size. you must type custom W and H values.Displays the page so that the long edge is the top of the page.Displays the page so that the short edge is the top of the page.Defines the sheet size according to the recorded width (W) and height (H) values. Note • You can specify a new sheet size for an existing drawing. Related Topics Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. Portrait . Landscape . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 369 . you can change.

page 361 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 370 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Specify when you want the watermark to be displayed by selecting either the While working option or the While printing option. Related Topics • Page Setup Command.Displays the watermark in the background while you are working within the drawing. While working . Watermark .Displays the width of the custom sheet size. Tip You can specify a new sheet size for an existing drawing. you can change. page 370 Set up a Page Layout 1.Displays the watermark only when you are printing the drawing. Click File > Page Setup.Allows you to choose a graphic that faintly appears in the background of the drawing. • 4. W. that is. page 369 • Set up a Page Layout. page 119 • Printing Drawings: An Overview. Specify a watermark if you want a watermark to be displayed. On the Page Setup dialog box. and height.Printing Drawings: An Overview Standard . If you select Custom. Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. of the sheet. While printing . select either Standard or Custom sheet size. Choose the template size from the list. and the Custom option is not available for an existing drawing. The size choices are more limited for an existing drawing than for a new template. for example. specify the width. H. The watermark also appears on any printed copies.Defines the sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes. a B-size drawing to a C-size. specify a standard sheet size. Select either Portrait or Landscape. 2. 3. W (Width) . If you select Standard.

Registering Tools with The Engineering Framework Before you can publish and retrieve documents from any of the other authoring tools. and Drawing Manager. A SmartPlant Engineering Manager administrator typically registers a plant with TEF. SmartPlant P&ID. The Framework menu commands are not available unless your plant is registered with the Framework. such as Zyqad. such as Zyqad or INtools. In SmartPlant P&ID and Drawing Manager you can also use the Framework menu to publish drawings and retrieve data. After the plant is registered. constructing. The software maps a plant and all its projects to a single SmartPlant Foundation URL. and operating a plant. and SmartPlant P&ID. SmartPlant Foundation plant database and its projects. you can publish and retrieve documents. this action takes place in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. see the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager Help. SmartPlant P&D interacts with TEF by correlating items between the plant database and the SmartPlant Foundation database. The system administrator must register each plant in the authoring tool with TEF once. INtools. Equipment Data sheets. For more information about TEF commands in SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. and the like from TEF. TEF acts as a repository for data and a medium through which information is shared among other tools. you are registering an authoring tool plant with a SmartPlant Foundation URL and plant that you specify. you must register each plant in SmartPlant P&ID with a SmartPlant Foundation database. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 371 . When you use the Register command in any of the authoring tools. For more information.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview The Engineering Framework (TEF) standardizes and improves the communication among the various authoring tools you use in the course of designing. which points to one. and creating a set of tasks in the To Do List that you can run to update the plant database. The connection allows SmartPlant P&ID to display The Engineering Framework (TEF) commands. and only one. retrieving PFDs. Most of the commands that provide access to TEF functionality exist in the common user interface available on the Framework menu in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client in order to browse in TEF and subscribe to change notifications and compare documents.

page 378 • Retrieve a Document from TEF.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF. page 386 372 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 381 • Find a Document to Publish.

and specifying a version and revision of the document if specified in SmartPlant Foundation. assigning it to a workflow when necessary. for instance) publish data to TEF in . you can retrieve the data from TEF into other authoring tools. When you publish documents. After the data is loaded into SmartPlant Foundation.xml files to the SmartPlant Foundation database. The publishing process involves selecting a document to publish. The document types and data that you can publish depend on the authoring tool that you use. From that point on. such as . For many applications. it is used for reporting and subsequent retrieval by downstream applications. the authoring tools share data and relationships when you publish documents containing the data and relationships. For most documents. The software publishes some document types without the associated data.pdf or . see the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client User's Guide. Publishes a visual representation of the document that you can view without the authoring tool. The viewable file can also be an Excel workbook or another viewable file type. You can submit documents published without data to workflows just like documents with data. which can be a different workflow from the original publish action.doc. If the data is approved and loaded. Publishes associated data into TEF. line lists in P&ID). this is an Intergraph proprietary file. The published data is not enough to recreate the document in the original authoring tool.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Publishing to TEF: An Overview In The Engineering Framework (TEF). The software the loads the data from the . the software creates new versions and revisions each time that you publish the document. You can publish subsequent revisions into a workflow.xml format. called a RAD file. The software relates revisions to the master document. Changes in the document status of a related revision change the status of the subsequently published versions and revisions of the document. depending on workflow approval. the software also publishes the data that is associated with the document when you publish. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 373 . such as reports from authoring tools (for example. the software does the following things: • Creates a new master document and the first revision in SmartPlant Foundation the first time that you publish a particular document. Users can review and edit the visual representation of the document using SmartPlant Markup. The software publishes only meaningful engineering data to TEF. • • • For more information about revisions and versions. The authoring tools (SmartPlant P&ID or INtools.

you can publish a document to a For sharing workflow that has only a load step so that the data is loaded into SmartPlant Foundation as soon as you publish the document. When you do not select a workflow for a document during publishing. the document types that each tool publishes. You can also publish a document by not assigning the document to a workflow but by using the default workflow from SmartPlant Foundation. The following list contains each authoring tool that is part of the Framework. allowing users to avoid creating data multiple times in multiple authoring tools To report on common data that originates in multiple tools To provide enterprise-wide accessibility to published documents To manage change. limited Instrument Specification Sheet documents Instrument Process Data Sheet documents Instrument Loop Drawings I/O Assignment document Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) documents and data Line List documents P&ID generated report documents PFD documents and data Equipment Data Sheet documents and data Summary Sheet documents and data SmartPlant P&ID • • • Zyqad • • • 374 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . To share data. INtools • • • • • Instrument Index documents and data.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Reasons to Publish You can publish documents and associated data into TEF for several reasons: • To exchange and enhance data among tools. and information about whether data is also published with each document type. the Framework Loader loads the document into SmartPlant Foundation as soon as it reaches the top of the Loader queue. including workflow history and document revision management • • • You can also publish documents to share information with users in other tools without going through a formal workflow. Document Types for Publishing Each authoring tool publishes different documents and data.

and allows you to send the information of the documents that you have selected to The Engineering Framework (TEF). Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. the authoring tools are notified about the plant. page 380 Publish Command Framework > Publish Opens the Publish dialog box. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. The WBS document contains information about the project and its status in a plant/project/contract structure. The PBS in the authoring tools must match the one in SmartPlant Foundation for publishing from the authoring tools and object correlation to work properly. page 371 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 375 . such as Microsoft Word or Excel files. The primary reasons to publish documents without data are that the SmartPlant Foundation Change Management functionality can manage document changes and reviews using workflows and that you can view the documents electronically. The WBS in the authoring tools must match the one in SmartPlant Foundation for publishing from the authoring tools and object correlation to work correctly. These documents are always published without data. When a PBS document is published from SmartPlant Foundation. Related Topics Publishing to TEF: An Overview. the authoring tools are notified of projects and contracts that need to be created in the authoring tools. or SmartSketch® files. and units that need to be created in each authoring tool. in order to publish them. page 381 • Find a Document to Publish. When a WBS document is published from SmartPlant Foundation. areas. Publishing Files without Data You can also browse to other file types on the file system.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview SmartPlant 3D • Orthographic Drawings Work Breakdown Structures (WBS) Plant Breakdown Structures (PBS) SmartPlant Foundation • • All Authoring Tools The PBS document contains information about the physical project with the following structure: plant/area/unit.

which allows you to search for files that are of a specific type and that have been updated since they were last published to TEF. Find . and subtype of the document. Selected documents . description. you open the Document Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. Engineering Tool . and you can specify information about the file. the revision and version numbers. If this options is not selected. Remove . Note • You may select rows that are in white on this dialog box.Opens a tool-specific dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the Selected documents list. File System . This dialog box opens when you click Framework > Publish on the main menu bar.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Publish Dialog Box Displays a list of documents to publish to The Engineering Framework (TEF).Opens the standard Microsoft Select File dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the Selected documents list. which allows you to search for documents to add to the Selected documents list. You can populate this list by clicking the buttons in the Add area of this dialog box. This command is available only if it is defined by your project implementation team. Rows that are gray are provided for viewing purposes only and cannot be selected. When you select a file in this dialog box. the type of the document.Displays a list of the documents selected for publishing. the application which last published the document. page 375 376 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . such as whether it is a new file or was previously published. For each document. opens the Contract dialog box. and the name. the documents begin to be published as soon as you click OK.Indicates that the system publishes the selected documents in batch mode (that is.Removes the selected file or files from the Selected documents list. the revision schedule. Advanced . this list provides the name. the category. in the background).If applicable. page 378 • Publish Command. Batch publish . and title of the document. Contract . You are notified by e-mail when the operation is complete.Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF. type.Opens the Advanced Publish Options dialog box. and the date that the document was last published.

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Advanced Publish Options Dialog Box Allows you to specify the type of files that you want to search for when you look for documents to publish.Lists the subtype of the document.Indicates that the file has already been published to TEF at lease once before.Allows you to enter the official title of the document.Allows you to enter the name of the file as it is known in TEF. If applicable. This dialog box opens when you click Advanced on the Publish dialog box.Indicates the types of documents the software considers when selecting the documents to publish. Published previously . The options that appear in this list are determined by the selection you make in the Document type box. This dialog box opens when you click File System on the Publish dialog box. This description appears later to help you recognize the file.Allows you to select a category to assign to the document. Note • An asterisk * next to a box indicates that the information is mandatory. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 377 . New document . page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. Name .Indicates that this document has not been published to The Engineering Framework (TEF) before.Allows you to enter a brief description of the file. select one. page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. Descriptions . Selected file . Title . The options that appear in this list are determined by the selection you make in the Document category box. Document type . Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. Document category .Allows you to select the type of the document. Document subtype .Displays the name of the file that you selected on the Select File dialog box. Document type . page 375 Document Properties Dialog Box Provides details about a new or existing document selected for publishing. page 378 • Publish Command.

2. For more information. page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. an e-mail message alerts you when the process is complete. Click Framework > Publish. For more information. Tips • This feature is also available through the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 378 • Publish Command. This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). • The documents listed on the Publish dialog box when it first opens are documents that you selected in the authoring tool before you clicked the Publish command. • Note • You can select the Batch publish option to indicate that the retrieval process is run in batch mode (that is. page 371 378 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Add any additional documents to the Selected documents list on the Publish dialog box by using the buttons in the Add area. page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. Otherwise. see Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. the publishing process begins interactively as soon as you click OK. page 381. Related Topics • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. page 375 Publish a Document to TEF 1. in the background). When you use this feature.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish.

and need to be re-published. page 378 • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF. The information that appears in the lists on this dialog box were found on this date and time.Selects all the files in the Select documents to publish list. For each file. Select All . Update . this list displays the name and type of the file and the date that the document was last published.Performs a new search for documents to publish. Last search performed . The dialog box opens when you click Framework > Find Documents to Publish on the main menu bar. If the file has not been published to TEF. for instance). the Last Published box for the document displays the value New. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. Select documents to publish . page 371 Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box Allows you to search for documents that have been updated since they were last published to The Engineering Framework (TEF) or that were previously published but no longer exist in your authoring tool (SmartPlant P&ID or INtools.Indicates what types of files were considered when the last search was conducted. have never been published. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. this list displays the name and type of the file and the date that it was last published. which helps you select the documents that you want to write to The Engineering Framework (TEF) and specifies those documents that have been published before. This list is specific to the authoring tool from which you used the command. For each file.Displays the date when the files were last searched.Displays a list of all the files that were previously published to TEF but were subsequently removed from the project.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Find Documents to Publish Command Framework > Find Documents to Publish Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box.Displays a list of files that were either updated since they were last published to TEF or files that have not yet been published. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 379 . Document types searched . Select documents to terminate .

and you can publish them to TEF. or you can clear the entire list by clicking Clear All. Tips • This feature is also available by clicking the Find button on the Publish dialog box. Click Framework > Find Documents to Publish. page 378 • Publish Command. For more information.Cancels the selection of all the files in the Select documents to publish list. page 378. the documents appear in lists in the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. see Publish a Document to TEF. This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. This step is necessary only if a document was deleted from the authoring tool. The selected documents now appear in the Documents to Publish list on the Publish dialog box. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. From the Select documents to publish list on the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. For more information about publishing documents.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Clear All . 2. • TEF communicates with the authoring tool to determine the documents that need to be published or re-published to TEF. • • 380 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. • Tip You can quickly select the entire list by clicking Select All. page 375 Find a Document to Publish 1. indicate the documents that you want to remove from TEF. From the Select documents to terminate list. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. indicate the documents that you want to publish to TEF by clicking the corresponding check box. When the results of this search are available. 3. • Tips • Documents in this list are in TEF but are no longer present in the authoring tool. but is still available in TEF.

Note • From the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. page 371 Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client Click Framework > Browser. such as browsing for documents that have been published to TEF. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. and so forth. using the SmartPlant Foundation To Do List to complete tasks. but this process can be time consuming. comparing documents. and subscribing to documents in order to receive notification of changes to the documents. For more information. but the Web Client provides unique access to other features such as the Web Client To Do List and search capabilities. depending on the mode you are running the applications in: synchronous or asynchronous. From this interface. page 371 Browser Command Framework > Browser Opens a web-based user interface that allows you to interact with SmartPlant Foundation if the active plant is registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). Related Topics • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. you can perform a number of tasks. You can update the lists by clicking Update.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Note • The lists displayed on the Find Documents to Publish dialog box are compiled at the time indicated in the Last search performed box. Tip • This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). Related Topics • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. comparing TEF documents with the data in your authoring tool. page 381 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Many of these tasks can be performed from the authoring tools. such as publishing or retrieving documents. you can perform a number of tasks. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 381 . subscribing to document changes. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. such as SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant Electrical.

Retrieves only the data the authoring tool originally published with the selected revision and version of the document. The Framework > Retrieve command in an authoring tool is slightly different from the Retrieve command available in the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. The Web Client presents a list of documents that you can choose to retrieve. The authoring tools provide commands that let you select a document and retrieve it into that tool. With the latest data . the software retrieves the most current data in the SmartPlant Foundation database for those common objects. or you can find the document that you want to retrieve using the Web Client search capability. without first selecting documents. such as SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant Electrical.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieving from TEF: An Overview You can retrieve documents from The Engineering Framework (TEF) into an authoring tool for subsequent work. That is. you can use the Framework > Retrieve command in the Web Client to start the retrieval process. • 382 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Retrieval States • As published . You can use either the Framework > Retrieve command to open a wizard that assists you in retrieving applicable documents. and these are presented in a list in the Retrieve dialog box. you can access the Web Client through the Framework > Browser command. or with some authoring tools. For example. when you use the command from an authoring tool. from INtools. you can retrieve engineering information from a published SmartPlant P&ID. if another more recently published document contains updates to objects in the document that you selected. Additionally. you can configure an automatic retrieval feature.Retrieves the latest data associated with the selected document in the SmartPlant Foundation database. After you select the documents that you want to retrieve. and then you can select the document or documents that you want to retrieve from your Web Client To Do List or the tree view. However. the software searches the SmartPlant Foundation project for documents to retrieve.

areas. When an authoring tool retrieves it. Notes • Retrieving the WBS and PBS into SmartPlant Engineering Manager (SPEM) creates items in the SPEM To Do List. projects. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 383 . The following lists include the documents that each authoring tool can retrieve: SmartPlant P&ID • • • • • PFDs Equipment Data Sheets Instrument Index documents Instrument I/O Assignment documents P&IDs PFDs Equipment Data Sheets Summary Sheet documents and data P&IDs P&IDs Instrument Index documents P&IDs Zyqad • • • • INtools • • SmartPlant 3D • All Authoring Tools From most authoring tools. are retrieved by authoring tools in order to provide information about the plants. and contracts that need to be created in the authoring tool so that the information is consistent across all associated applications. units. The WBS contains information about the concepts of the project in a plant-project-contract hierarchy. the WBS communicates project status. created in SmartPlant Foundation and published to TEF. Create the appropriate structures by running these tasks. you can retrieve Plant Breakdown Structure (PBS) and Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) documents. The PBS contains information about the physical project with the following plant hierarchy: plant-area-unit.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieval Document Types The types of documents that you can retrieve depend on the authoring tool that you are using. The PBS and WBS.

The To Do List gives you the opportunity to view and understand potential changes before accepting.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview • When using SmartPlant 3D. you do not have to define it. you must create the PBS and WBS structures manually. or modifying those changes. which pulls the data and correlates items. When you change common properties for the pump and retrieve the changes into SmartPlant P&ID. deleting. Zyqad. For example. You must create at least one unit before you can retrieve any documents from TEF. In SmartPlant 3D. such as a stream in Zyqad that results in multiple pipe runs in SmartPlant P&ID. When using INtools. tasks to update the pump automatically appear in the To Do List. you must create the plant-area-unit according to PBS information in SmartPlant Foundation before you retrieve either the PBS or the WBS. the authoring tool analyzes the impact of the newly retrieved data on the existing database. The same process works for logical items that are a design basis for other items. on the other hand automatically overwrites the existing database information when you retrieve data. you can view the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) by using the View > P&ID command. An object that becomes a design basis for another object can be a specific object that gets richer as it moves through the schematic or logical lifecycle of one application and evolves into a more detailed object downstream. The design basis is implied and based on retrieval. page 386 384 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In SmartPlant P&ID and INtools. and then it places tasks that instruct you to create. Design Basis Objects that tools retrieve from other authoring tools can become the design basis for objects downstream in the design process. page 391 • Retrieve a Document from TEF. • Data Handling After Retrieval The authoring tool that you use also determines how the software deals with changes in downstream data when you retrieve a document. delete. or modify items at the appropriate time in the design process on the To Do List. a pump retrieved from a PFD becomes the design basis for a pump in the P&ID. These documents cannot be retrieved into that application. You are not required to accept or reject changes in Zyqad. Related Topics • Open the To Do List.

You can select the documents that you want to retrieve and thereby bring in the information from the The Engineering Framework (TEF). the documents are retrieved as soon as you click OK. page 382 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. for instance). page 386 • Retrieve Command. If this option is not selected. page 386 • Retrieving from TEF: An Overview. and the Revision option. Documents to retrieve . You are notified by e-mail when the operation is complete.Selects all the files in the Documents to retrieve list.Allows you to indicate whether you want to view a list of all of the latest documents available or of only those documents that need to be retrieved from TEF. Document type . Related Topics Retrieve a Document from TEF. Select All . page 371 Retrieve Dialog Box Allows you to specify options for retrieving information from The Engineering Framework (TEF). page 385 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 385 . Batch retrieve . the revision and version numbers. the last retrieval date.Displays a list of the documents to be retrieved from TEF. the status of the document.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieve Command Framework > Retrieve Opens the Retrieve dialog box. you can indicate whether you want to retrieve the document as it was published or with the latest data. By using the Revision option.Indicates the type of documents you can retrieve from TEF and changes the list view so that it displays only that document type.Indicates that the system retrieves the selected documents in batch mode. For each document.Cancels the selection of documents in the Documents to retrieve list. this list provides the name. the type of document. Clear All . Show . Related Topics • Retrieve a Document from TEF. The dialog box opens when you click Framework > Retrieve on the main menu bar. and provides a list of the files that can be retrieved by the authoring tool (SmartPlant Electrical or SmartPlant P&ID.

select the documents you want to retrieve by clicking the corresponding check box. Tips • This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). Click Framework > Retrieve. These documents can appear in the Documents to retrieve list. Tip You can quickly select the entire list by clicking Select All. Related Topics • Retrieving from TEF: An Overview. the retrieval process begins interactively as soon as you click OK. By using the Retrieve Option list for each document you are retrieving. From the Documents to retrieve list. 4. • 3. When you use this feature. page 371 386 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. For more information.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieve a Document from TEF 1. On the Retrieve dialog box. TEF searches the SmartPlant Foundation project for documents that are ready to be retrieved into your tool. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. Otherwise. an e-mail message alerts you when the process is complete. in the background). select whether you want to retrieve each document by using the As published option or the With the latest data option. or you can clear the entire list by clicking Clear All. page 382 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. • Notes • You can select the Batch retrieve option to indicate that the retrieval process is run in batch mode (that is. select the types of files that are displayed in the Documents to retrieve list by choosing either Only documents to be retrieved or All documents in the SmartPlant Foundation project or by using the Document type list.

For example. a single stream item in Zyqad normally maps to multiple pipe runs in SmartPlant P&ID. the item is highlighted in the drawing.Lists all the items associated with a single design basis item. For some types of piping. Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. a one-to-one relationship exists between an item in an external application and an item or items in the drawing software. page 371 Correlate Items Dialog Box Allows you to review and edit the relationship between plant items and design basis items imported from external applications. The Correlate Items command allows you to review and manage these relationships within the drawing environment. page 389 • Correlating Items: An Overview. When you import a document into SmartPlant P&ID from The Engineering Framework (TEF). page 389 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. a piece of equipment defined in Zyqad usually maps to a single equipment item in SmartPlant P&ID. page 389 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Correlating Items: An Overview In many cases. This dialog box opens when you click Framework > Correlate on the main menu bar. Items . each item that is created in a stockpile is automatically correlated to the design basis item from which it came. page 387 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. and when selected. page 389 Correlate Command Framework > Correlate Opens the Correlate Items dialog box and allows you to review and edit the correlation between plant items and design basis items. Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 387 . Items in the active drawing are displayed in bold font style. For example. A single item can be selected from the list. a single item in the external application is associated with multiple items within the drawing software.

Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Select . the new item inherits the properties of the item that it is correlated to rather than the design basis item. it is added to the Items list as a primary item. Then the application searches the database for all other items that are correlated to the same design basis item and adds them to the list as well. When you click on a correlated item.Deletes the selected item from the Items list and cancels its correlation with the design basis item. page 389 • Correlate Command. page 371 388 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Allows you to correlate an additional item to the same design basis item that the listed items are already correlated to. page 389 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. both are associated with the same design basis item. This command is available only when one or more items already appear in the Items list. Remove . If you correlate a new item with a previously correlated item. however. a confirmation message appears. If you click on an item that is already correlated to some other design basis item. When you click on a highlighted item.Allows you to review a different drawing item. it is correlated with the same design basis item. Right-clicking quits this command. the item is highlighted. the drawing item is highlighted. As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that has the same item type as the items in the list. page 387 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that is already correlated. Add . and it is added to the list. Clicking this button clears the Items list.

Note • When you import a document into SmartPlant P&ID from TEF. 3. Since items from TEF already have a correlation. Tip As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that is already correlated. On the Correlate Items dialog box. In the drawing. select the item in the Items list whose correlation with the design basis you want to remove. page 387 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. When you click on a correlated item. Click Tools > Correlate Items. Click Framework > Correlate Items. page 371 Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items 1. Click Remove. select either an item that was retrieved using The Engineering Framework (TEF) and placed in the drawing or a previously correlated item. 2. 2. you can highlight and select only items that were retrieved from TEF or native P&ID items that are already correlated.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item 1. click Add. the item is highlighted. Related Topics • Correlating Items: An Overview. 3. Then the application searches the database for all other items that are correlated to the same design basis item and adds them to the list as well. On the Correlate Items dialog box. The above procedure is to correlate additional drawing items to the design basis item. Tip • When the Correlate Items dialog box opens. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 389 . Select a item in the drawing that you want to correlate to the retrieved item. each item that is created in a stockpile is automatically correlated to the design basis item that it came from. a message appears to make sure that you want to change the existing correlation. • 4. it is added to the Items list on the Correlate Items dialog box as a primary item.

• 390 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Error status occurs. or delete them altogether. you can perform tasks. The available task types are • • • • Create . If you successfully run the task. From the To Do List. Some types of tasks have associated code and you can run them thereby causing the database or drawings to be modified. A single To Do List is shared by all the users of a plant database.Deletes the specified item from the plant Manual . By clicking the heading of columns on the To Do List.Creates a new item in the stockpile Update . If you attempt to run a task. but the process is not completed successfully. Additionally. defer them. or modified to bring the drawing into agreement with the newest information retrieved from TEF. but certain information is provided for all types. You can view the entire To Do List and see the tasks that have been completed and those that are pending.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Using the To Do List: An Overview The To Do List allows you to keep track of tasks required to keep P&IDs updated with information in The Engineering Framework (TEF). the units of measure used in properties are automatically converted to the defaults for the plant. for example. You can change the order in which these columns appear in the Task List by right-clicking a column heading and choosing either Shift Left or Shift Right from the shortcut menu to move the column one place in either direction. the status is Open. this feature aids in retrieving data from TEF by providing a list of all the things that must be added. the status is changed to Error . Specifically. Notes • When an Update task is created in the To Do List. you sort the list by the values in that column. You can decide when a manual task is complete and set the status accordingly. The information that is available is specific to the type of task that is selected: Create tasks and Update tasks. the status changes to Complete . Initially. The units of measure used for properties in Create tasks are converted to the plant defaults when the task is run. deleted.Creates and displays a reminder. You can also postpone running a task and change its status to Deferred . you can view properties for each task in the To Do List. Each task in the To Do List has a status. if you attempt to run an Update task assigned to a drawing that is not currently open.Updates the selected properties of the specified item Delete . for instance.

defer.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List. page 401 • Update the To Do List Display. From this dialog box. or delete tasks. page 402 • Open a Drawing from the To Do List. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 391 . page 402 • Run a Task from the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 371 Open the To Do List Click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. Note • This command is available regardless of whether a drawing is open or not. which lists tasks to be performed in SmartPlant P&ID. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. you can run. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 394 • Remove a Task from the To Do List. and you can organize your tasks. page 405 To Do List Command Framework > To Do List Opens the To Do List dialog box. page 396 • Defer a Task on the To Do List.

You select the tasks from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. If multiple tasks are selected. in other words. the associated drawing is open and active. New Manual Task . This dialog box opens when you click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. Any drawings that are currently open. The commands associated with the To Do List are all on the To Do List toolbar. If multiple tasks are selected.Runs the task that you select from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. If multiple tasks are selected. If the drawing is not active. This command is not available for manually created tasks. This dialog box shows the detailed properties of the task. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. Zoom In . This command is available when an executable task is selected.Opens the drawing associated with the selected task. remain open. this command activates it. Run Task . Assign Drawing . the command is only available for tasks generated automatically by integration with The Engineering Framework (TEF) and importing of data from TEF. The Assign Drawing dialog box opens and lists the available drawings. 392 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Displays the Task Properties dialog box. and allows you to manually create a new task.Displays the Task Properties dialog box for the selected task. This command allows you to visually inspect the referenced objects in the context of the surrounding drawing and is available when the selected task is associated with graphics and the drawing that contains the object is open and active. This command is available when a drawing-specific task is selected and the drawing is not currently open or active. If multiple tasks are selected. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. This command is available only when a single task is selected. This command is available when you select manually added tasks or tasks resulting from the Create command.Centers and zooms in on the drawing items associated with the selected task or tasks in the Drawing view.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview To Do List Dialog Box Provides the ability to manage tasks that need to be run within a SmartPlant P&ID database to keep the plant current with information in The Engineering Framework (TEF). You can assign or reassign a Create task. but Update and Delete tasks that are already assigned to a drawing cannot be reassigned.Creates an association between the selected task or tasks and a particular drawing. Properties . this command is available only if they are assigned to the same drawing. Open Drawing . this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. and the status of the selected task is Open or Error.

including. and so forth. for example. You can change the order in which these columns appear in the Task List by right-clicking a column heading and choosing either Shift Left or Shift Right on the shortcut menu to move the column one place in either direction.xls.Opens Excel and runs a report on the contents of the To Do List. If there is a problem. If you wish to completely delete tasks from the list of deleted tasks. page 391 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 393 . the status is updated to Error . By clicking the heading of any of these columns. you can select them and click Delete Task again on the To Do List toolbar.Allows you to delete the selected task from the To Do List.Populates automatically when you retrieve a document from TEF. multiple users can be working in the To Do List at the same time. You can use the Refresh command to stay up-to-date. Delete Task .Toggles the status of the selected tasks between Open and Deferred . the destination drawing. the status is updated to Completed . Report . Related Topics • Open the To Do List. Task List . Refresh . the status of the task and the Run Date and Run By properties are updated. Error . you sort the list by the values in that column. and a timestamp and error message are added to the Notes area. but the report template. Since only one To Do List is generated per plant. and so the information can change at any time. a description of the task. This command toggles this feature on and off. page 391 • To Do List Command. Doubleclicking a task opens the Task Properties dialog box for that task. This command is available only when one or more tasks are selected. If the task runs successfully. or Deferred status. called To Do List.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Note • When a task runs. This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. the name of the task. A confirmation dialog box appears to verify deletion of the selected task or tasks. produces reports much the same way other SmartPlant reports are produced. View Deleted . This list provides information about each task. Defer Task .Updates the information that is displayed in the To Do List. the status of the task.Displays a list of tasks that have been deleted from the To Do List in the Task list on a gray background. This command is available only when the selected task or tasks have either Open.

see Assign a Task to a Drawing. • Note • Once the drawing is open. For more information. This command is available when a drawing-specific task is selected and the drawing is not currently open or active. page 394 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. select a task that is assigned to a drawing. this command activates it. remain open. 394 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 3. see View a Drawing Item from the To Do List. Related Topics Open a Drawing from the To Do List. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. Any drawings that are currently open. page 395. too. this command is available only if they are assigned to the same drawing. page 400. page 371 • Zoom In Command Framework > To Do List > Zoom In Centers and zooms in on the drawing items associated with the selected task or tasks in the Drawing view. 2. You can assign or reassign a Create task. This command allows you to visually inspect the referenced objects in the context of the surrounding drawing and is available when the selected task is associated with graphics and the drawing that contains the object is open and active. For more information. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Open Drawing Command Framework > To Do List > Open Drawing Opens the drawing associated with the selected task. If the drawing is not active. but Update and Delete tasks that are already assigned to a drawing cannot be reassigned. On the To Do List. Click Open Drawing . you can display drawing items from the To Do List. Click Framework > To Do List. You select the tasks from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. page 371 • Open a Drawing from the To Do List 1. Tip You can assign tasks to drawings by using commands on the To Do List. If multiple tasks are selected.

page 394. page 371 View a Drawing Item from the To Do List 1. page 395 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. On the To Do List toolbar. Related Topics • Open a Drawing from the To Do List. • Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. click Zoom Tip • . not for Create tasks. see Open a Drawing from the To Do List. page 371 New Manual Task Command Framework > To Do List > New Manual Task Displays the Task Properties dialog box. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. 2. The software opens a Drawing view with the drawing items that are associated with the task highlighted. Notes • The Zoom command is available only for Update and Delete tasks. For more information. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview If multiple tasks are selected. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 395 . page 394 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. You can open a drawing from the To Do List. 3. select a task or tasks. Click Framework > To Do List. On the To Do List dialog box. and only when the drawing that the item belongs to is already open. page 390 • View a Drawing Item from the To Do List. Related Topics • Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List. page 396 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. and allows you to manually create a new task.

page 399 • Properties Command. select the General tab. This dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box. On the To Do List dialog box toolbar. The tabs that appear on this dialog box are determined by the type of task that you selected from the To Do List. This command is available only when a single task is selected. 4. and status for the new task. and Delete tasks. page 371 Task Properties Dialog Box Provides information about tasks that are defined in the task list of the To Do List dialog box. page 28 396 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 Properties Command Framework > To Do List > Properties Displays the Task Properties dialog box for the selected task. 5. Manually created tasks are not executable tasks and cannot be run from the To Do List. Note • . page 399 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. In the Notes area. Enter a name. 2. There are three basis types of tasks: Create. description. This dialog box shows the detailed properties of the task. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. Click Framework > To Do List.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List 1. enter comments if you want to. Update. On the Task Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. You must select a task from the To Do List in order to open this dialog box. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. click New Manual Task 3.

Notes .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview General Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Displays properties that are common to all types of tasks. page 28 Details Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Provides information that is common to all types of tasks and that concerns the source and destination of the information being imported as part of the task.Provides a descriptive string that helps you identify the purpose of the task.Displays the name of the document from which this task originated (for example. For Create tasks. Name . Status . The following choices are available: Open. Drawing .Indicates the level of completion of the task. Completed . For Update and Delete tasks.Displays the item tag of the drawing object from which this task originated. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 397 . this box displays the item tag of an existing item. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. page 399 • Properties Command. which does not have an identifying icon in the Task list on the To Do List. but you can use the Assign Drawing command on the To Do List dialog box to change this value. Document . The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. This information is read-only.Displays the name of the application that published the document from which this task originated. and Error . When a task is created. You can also enter hyperlinks to other documents for more extensive information. the status is set to Open. such as the success of the procedure. Description . This information cannot be directly edited on this tab. this box displays the item tag of the item to be created.Allows you to enter freeform text about the task. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. Deferred . Item Tag .For drawing-specific tasks.Displays a longer description of the purpose of the task. Engineering Tool . a Zyqad equipment data sheet or an INtools instrument index). this box displays the name of the drawing to which the task is assigned. Information about the execution of the task. This value is not a unique identifier for the task. is added to the end of any existing notes for a task.

The information on this tab is read-only. Created Date .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties.Displays the user name that last ran the task. Deleted By . or deleted the task.Displays the date and time that the task was last run. turn off the property by selecting it in the list. page 399 • Properties Command. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties.Indicates the catalog item used to create the drawing item if the task is run. Catalog item . Run By . and so forth. Modified Date . The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. modified. Deleted Date . modified. modification of an item.Displays the date and time that the task was last run.Displays the user name of the task creator. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. page 28 Create Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Displays information specific to tasks that create new items in the drawing. Created By . page 399 • Properties Command. Item Type . Modified By . This information includes the user names and dates for the creation of an item.Shows the name of each item property and its new value. 398 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . To prevent a value from being used if the Create task is run.Displays the user name that removed the task.Displays the date and time that the task was removed. Run Date .Displays the user name that last ran.Displays the type of item to be created.Displays the date and time that the task was created. This information includes the type of item created and the names and values of the properties of the new item. Item Properties . or deleted. page 28 History Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Provides information this is common to all types of tasks and that concerns the history of the task.

2. This command is available when you select manually added tasks or tasks resulting from the Create command. The Assign Drawing dialog box opens and lists the available drawings. page 400 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. For all types. On the Properties dialog box. Note • The properties available for each task depend on the type of task. For Update tasks. • . you can turn off or on the new values assigned to properties for the item. From the task list on the To Do List dialog box. page 28 Modify To Do List Task Properties 1. you can edit the name and notes for the task. change the properties as necessary. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. For Create tasks. 3. Click Framework > To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. you can edit the catalog item being created and turn off or on the values assigned to different properties for that item. Related Topics Assign a Task to a Drawing. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. 4. On the toolbar. page 371 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 399 . select the task or tasks that you want to edit. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. page 371 Assign Drawing Command Framework > To Do List > Assign Drawing Creates an association between the selected task or tasks and a particular drawing. If multiple tasks are selected. page 399 • Properties Command. click Properties Tip You can also open the Properties dialog box by double-clicking a task in the To Do List.

Click Assign Drawing . 4. This dialog box opens when you click Assign Drawing on the To Do List dialog box. This command is available when an executable task is selected. the command is only available for tasks generated automatically by integration with The Engineering Framework (TEF) and importing of data from TEF. the associated drawing is open and active. in other words.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Assign Drawing Dialog Box Allows you to associate a task in the To Do List with a drawing assigned to the active plant structure. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. the selected tasks are assigned to that drawing. Drawings . When you select a drawing and click OK.Lists all the drawings associated with the active plant. and the status of the selected task is Open or Error. 3.Removes the association between the selected task and a drawing. 400 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Select the drawing that you want to associate with the task or tasks you selected on the To Do List dialog box. Related Topics • Assign a Task to a Drawing. The Create tasks are not initially associated with a drawing. 2. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 • Run Task Command Framework > To Do List > Run Task Runs the task that you select from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. From the list on the To Do List dialog box. On the Assign Drawing dialog box. Click Framework > To Do List. Clear . This command is not available for manually created tasks. select the task or tasks that you want to assign to a particular drawing. page 400 • Assign Drawing Command. page 399 Assign a Task to a Drawing 1. If multiple tasks are selected. select the drawing that you want to assign these tasks to. you can assign Create or Manual tasks using this dialog box.

• Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. If there is a problem. 3. page 371 • Run a Task from the To Do List 1. page 402 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. the status of the task and the Run Date and Run By properties are updated. Error . see Open a Drawing from the To Do List. Related Topics • Defer a Task on the To Do List. page 401 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. the status is updated to Error . Manually created tasks are not executable tasks and cannot be run from the To Do List. and a timestamp and error message are added to the Notes area. page 371 Defer Task Command Framework > To Do List > Defer Task Toggles the status of the selected tasks between Open and Deferred . 2. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. You can open a drawing from the To Do List. or Deferred status.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview When a task runs. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. This command is available only when the selected task or tasks have either Open. page 394. select the task or tasks that you want to run. Click Framework > To Do List. Related Topics Run a Task from the To Do List. For more information. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 401 . page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. On the To Do List dialog box. If a task is assigned to a drawing. that drawing must be open before you can run the task. Click Run Task Notes • . the status is updated to Completed . If the task runs successfully.

2. page 371 Remove a Task from the To Do List 1. Related Topics • Remove a Task from the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. This command is available only when one or more tasks are selected. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 402 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. On the To Do List dialog box. 2. On the toolbar.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Defer a Task on the To Do List 1. A confirmation dialog box appears to verify deletion of the selected task or tasks. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. You can display deleted tasks in the To Do List. 3. page 371 402 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Framework > To Do List. see Display Deleted Tasks on the To Do List. click Delete Task Note • . page 403. For more information. click Defer Task . page 371 Delete Task Command Framework > To Do List > Delete Task Allows you to delete the selected task from the To Do List. select the task or tasks that you want to defer. Click Framework > To Do List. select the task or tasks that you want to remove. On the To Do List dialog box. 3. On the toolbar. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview.

page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. 2. but the report template.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Display Deleted Tasks on the To Do List 1. produces reports much the same way other SmartPlant reports are produced. click View Deleted Tip • . called To Do List. page 371 Report Command Framework > To Do List > Report Opens Excel and runs a report on the contents of the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Click Framework > To Do List. To return to the current task list. Related Topics • Run a To Do List Report. click View Deleted again. On the To Do List dialog box toolbar. page 404 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 403 . Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview.xls. This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar.

page 334. see Generate a Report. 3. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. 2. You can use the Refresh command to stay up-to-date. page 348. you must choose a name and location for the current report on the Save As Output dialog box. This To Do List report can be customized in the same ways that other reports can be customized (for instance.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Run a To Do List Report 1. If a To Do List report has been generated previously. Since only one To Do List is generated per plant. page 371 404 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and so the information can change at any time. page 371 • Refresh Command Framework > To Do List > Refresh Updates the information that is displayed in the To Do List.xls. For more information on running reports. or you can sort the output in an appropriate order for your project). multiple users can be working in the To Do List at the same time. Click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. page 405 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. For more information. • on the toolbar. you can add a filter so that only tasks with particular properties are reported on. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. but the report is produced much the same way that other SmartPlant reports are produced. Click Report Tip This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. see Edit a Report Template. It is a tabular format report template. Then the report opens in Excel. Related Topics • Update the To Do List Display. Note • The report template for this report that is included with the software is called To Do List.

click Refresh .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Update the To Do List Display On the To Do List dialog box toolbar. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 405 . Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.

you can set construction status before or after you place an item. With SmartPlant P&ID whenever you place a component on a piece of equipment. page 410. and you can combine filters. These values for SmartPlant P&ID properties are called select-listed values.In PDS 2D.PDS 2D uses levels to separate data types in the Drawing view. page 412. Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID . For more information. Future. design file differences. Setting Construction Status . When you place an item. page 407. tanks. filters show certain parts of the drawing.With PDS™ 2D. see Setting Construction Status. construction status values. graphics are called cells. the software automatically creates a group relationship among the equipment and its components. consistency checking and propagation. and other items. relationships between placed items. page 408. you must identify the equipment group before adding equipment components to a piece of equipment. For more information. graphics are called catalog items. code lists and select lists. see Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation. the default construction status is New. Code Lists and Select Lists . For more information. see Using Filters Versus Levels. piping. they reside in a select list. you set the construction status by clicking the New.In PDS. For more information. page 409. In SmartPlant P&ID.Consistency Check in SmartPlant P&ID serves the same purpose as propagation in PDS 2D. page 407 • Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation. see Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID. an attribute that is restricted to pre-defined values is said to be code-listed. Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation . page 410 • Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. before you place an equipment group.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview The are many functions that can be compared between SmartPlant P&ID and the PDS product. Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID . page 413. such as only the equipment or only the piping. valves. For more information. see Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists.In PDS 2D. For more information. In SmartPlant P&ID. page 409 406 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . These graphics include pumps. They include attributes and properties. or Existing buttons on the Construction Status control. see Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. and using filters. Using Filters Versus Levels . In SmartPlant P&ID. Related Topics • Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists. page 408 • Setting Construction Status.

the accepted values for the attribute are defined in a code list. to modify select lists in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. That is. frequently in the Short Value entry. restricted values. they reside in a select list. These values for SmartPlant P&ID properties are called select-listed values. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Some code lists and select lists contain special. such as PDS 3D and SmartPlant 3D. an attribute that is restricted to pre-defined values is said to be code-listed. Consequently. you should use caution when modifying any entries already included with the product when it is delivered to you. In SmartPlant P&ID. These special values help SmartPlant P&ID communicate information to other applications. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 407 . Select entries are the individual members of a select list. For more information on defining select lists and entries. see SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager Help. Related Topics • Review and Edit Item Properties.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists In PDS. You must have special permissions. some properties are likewise restricted to preset values. Select lists and their select entries are defined in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager.

you must identify the equipment group before adding equipment components to a piece of equipment. Related Topics • Place Equipment. the software automatically creates a group relationship among the equipment and its components. This guideline also exists for placing equipment labels and equipment component labels.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID With PDS™ 2D. With SmartPlant P&ID whenever you place a component on a piece of equipment. page 153 408 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . before you place an equipment group. Moving components from one equipment group to another also requires that you manually regroup components so that they belong to the destination equipment.

page 21 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 409 .Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Setting Construction Status In PDS 2D. or Existing buttons on the Construction Status control. you set the construction status by clicking the New. • Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. When you place an item. select the item in the drawing and change the status in the Properties window. All items that are subsequently placed in the drawing are assigned this status. Future. and then set the status on the Placement tab. the default construction status is New. In SmartPlant P&ID. If you have already placed an item. you can set construction status before or after you place an item: • If you know the construction status before placing an item. click Tools > Options.

You must resolve them for an acceptable drawing. The software detects and reports the errors so you can correct them in the drawing. the process populates the associated database if serious propagation errors do not exist. In the SmartPlant P&ID environment.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation Consistency Check in SmartPlant P&ID serves the same purpose as propagation in PDS 2D. more so than the workflow associated with propagation. PDS 2D uses propagation. The designer places equipment. PDS 2D uses a process called propagation to verify the suitability of a design. route lines. To check for errors in your design. After the designer completes this work. places components on lines. or is consistent. routes lines between equipment. and label items. Propagation produces a report with propagation exceptions. The designer places the elements that compose the overall configuration of the design in a graphical mode. pinpointing the source of the inconsistency could require time. Also. Consistency checking is an important function in producing a useful design. Double-click an inconsistency in a Drawing view. Also. consistency checking occurs continuously as you place equipment. Consistency Check starts when you place or modify an item. SmartPlant P&ID continuously checks for design errors as you create the drawing. when you discover an error. Errors occur when you violate the design practices for a plant. You can list the types of errors you want to detect. according to settings in SmartPlant P&ID Rule Manager. propagation checks for errors each time that the software populates the database. Propagation determines that a drawing is not ambiguous. However. Available tools can help in the review of the report along with the drawing. However. an inconsistency occurs if a designated material is connected to a different type of material. and adds labels for accuracy. and the Consistency Check dialog box lists solutions to fix the errors. because you do not receive a list of possible solutions. with the design practices of the associated plant. resolution can be time-consuming. Consistency Check continuously blends into the software product. tools or suggested error recoveries are not available. SmartPlant P&ID uses predefined rules to establish relationships that verify the design. In PDS 2D. while SmartPlant P&ID uses consistency checking. However. In SmartPlant P&ID. and it automatically reports in the graphical view on junctions that do not follow these rules. instead of waiting to check for errors until after the drawing is complete. such as pipe and valve conflicts. consistency checking confirms that the created drawing agrees. For example. 410 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Related Topics • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency. page 317 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 411 .

which you can use to directly edit properties in the database by editing the properties of the label. page 184 412 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you propagate or write the information on the labels to the database. Most labels show item properties. In PDS 2D. and other items. which are stored in the database. you add or edit properties information for each item in the Properties window. These labels are referred to as "driven. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. In SmartPlant P&ID. see the SmartPlant Catalog Manager Help." because they are updated as the property values of the item are updated. you can record text on a label. graphics are called catalog items. graphics are called cells. SmartPlant P&ID also provides "driving" labels. In SmartPlant P&ID. These graphics include pumps. In SmartPlant P&ID. Then. You can add and delete cells or place cells from a library into the design file. For more information about creating symbols. valves. and the software continuously writes this information to the database. at certain times. labels play a different role than in PDS 2D. piping. tanks. SmartPlant P&ID supplies a pre-loaded set of symbols. Plant administrators can create more symbols if needed. PDS 2D cells are grouped together in libraries.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID In PDS 2D.

Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. see SmartPlant Filter Manager Help. You can even edit the individual properties of the filters. In SmartPlant P&ID. The plant administrator defines project filters. You can use filters along with rules to check for errors in certain filtered views. filters show certain parts of the drawing. Then. You can customize these levels.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Using Filters Versus Levels PDS 2D uses levels to separate data types in the Drawing view. you can combine a filter that displays 6-inch pipe with a filter that displays tanks more than 5 feet in diameter. while each individual user defines personal filters. and you can combine filters. such as only the equipment or only the piping. The software automatically defines levels for the various parts of process systems. SmartPlant P&ID offers extensive flexibility in creating and editing filters. For example. both 6-inch pipe and tanks over 5 feet in diameter are displayed. and you can combine them to view collective data sets. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 413 . For more information about creating and editing filters. and personal filters are stored in My Folders. SmartPlant P&ID filters fall into the following categories: • • Project filters Personal filters Project filters are stored in Project Folders.

and so forth. archive To copy a file to a specified storage location and then delete the file from the current location. append To add to the end of a file. attribute 1. You measure angles in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction. numbers. alphanumeric Information in the form of letter. symbols. annotations Dimensions. 2. a file name. Each property has an associated value that defines its current state. or reports that you place in a drawing to provide information or comments. notes. Most databases represent an attribute by a column in a table. and some special character and punctuation marks. angle Circular measurement of the intersection of two lines in degrees. access Performing actions that are required to use the SmartPlant P&ID software. beginning with the node name.txt. that locates a file. \\MyPC\C:\temp\MyFile. 414 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . A property or characteristic of a component. text string. for example. angle key-in A number that you type to specify an active angle.Glossary Glossary A absolute path name Sequence of directories. A characteristic that all members of a class possess. angle bisector A line that divides an angle into two equal parts. active placement point Coordinates that define the point where you place piping and instrumentation.

Bill of Materials A detailed list of the items that you assemble. Boolean operator Syntax that defines logical relationships between expressions like AND (both). Most orientations use an x-. break label A graphic label placed at a point in a piping line at which any property can change value. bearing The acute horizontal angle of a line with respect to a reference line. centerline Graphic representation of the central axis of an item. catalog A collection of catalog items. y-. C cache A secure place of storage. and z-axis. A set of filters can define the potential membership in a category. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 415 . A classification of items that share common values for specified properties. which are blueprints or templates for creating an item within the model. B batch A group of jobs to process on a computer at one time with the same program without user intervention. branch point A point on a pipe run that separates piping segments for assignments with different segment parameters. character Data type that stores alphanumeric character data. and NOT (other than). OR (either).Glossary axis An imaginary line that defines the orientation of a system or item. category A grouping of items by description.

or select list. intelligent computers that communicate with each other through a network. commodity item Standard component that you can find in a manufacturer catalog. and the database runs on the server. commodity code A code that you define that provides an index to material descriptions. concatenate To connect in a series. a node that accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource. A component has database information associated with it. usually a server. client/server database A database system in which the database engine and database applications reside on separate. In this system. 416 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The workstation for the user is the client. All network operations among two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. The class defines the properties and behaviors that an item can show. to link or append. class Blueprint for creating an item. that contains similar items. collection An indexed group. component A catalog item that represents a part of the P&ID. concentric Having a common center or origin point with varying radii. commodity option A pre-defined exception to the default settings for a component definition in the Piping Job Specification. the processing power is split between the two CPUs. client In network operations.Glossary check in Process of moving a file from a user location to a storage location and recording that location in the database. configuration Relative arrangement of parts or items.

behavior of a connector relies on the two items that it connects. change. coordinate system Geometric relation that denotes the location of points in the design cube. Also.Glossary connect point Active point item that is specially designated in a component. lines. cursor See pointer. or delete. Proper connectivity must exist to confirm valid data integrity. and labels.0. labels. Typical items in a data model are components. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 417 . data dictionary The underlying data model of a plant. or use a cylindrical coordinate system to define points on a cylinder. For example. or z-axis. Other coordinate systems more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entries. a location for applying a relationship connectivity Linkage between items that relates because of their graphics.0. coordinates Ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. D data Facts or raw material that you add. y-. context-sensitive help Display of help topics that are associated with a dialog box or command. and other components to one another. consisting of database entries and select lists. y-. data model Application items that populate a project. connector Item with multiple vertices. you can press F1 to learn about a dialog box. and z-axes. you can use a spherical coordinate system to define points on a sphere. like a valve and a pipe run. SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager maintains this information. coordinate Location of a point along the x-. A connect point is a location at which you can connect lines. For example. points are located by traversing the x-. the origin of coordinate systems is 0. Normally.

design database Database that contains the non-graphical data for the equipment and piping models. delimiter A separating mark or space. a closed shape exists. default Predetermined value of a parameter that the system or a program automatically supplies whenever the user does not specify a value. design session Elapsed time from when you open a design file until you close the design file. Indicating the region. device Non-addressable component of a network. along with an accompanying label that shows the property value. examples of devices are a tape drive. digits of accuracy Number of digits used after a decimal point to display the discharge dimensions. or process these files. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters.Glossary database Collection of files of comprehensive information that have predefined structure and organization. design-wide break A region of the drawing within which a single property value is defined for all the included components. database administrator The technical support person who assigns user IDs and data access permissions. design file File containing graphics and text data. creates new databases. database table Part of the database consisting of rows and columns and containing information about the project and design elements. ending at the points of intersection with that arc or circle. a specific program can communicate. and monitors disk storage usage of the database and performance. or floppy disk. disk drive. interpret. 418 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . diameter A straight line passing through the origin of an arc or circle. removes databases no longer in use. also called a drawing file.

display-only annotation Feature that allows you to generate temporary annotation graphics for review without placing the graphics in a design file. text. difference in longitude. You can consider a drawing view like a window into a specified volume in the model. scaled view produced from the model graphics. directional items use the direction of the line in which you located them. driving label Graphics. diversity Amount of deviation in airflow that a system encounters from the design conditions. More colors are produced with loss of some detail. directory File or folder that stores the names of other files. or both with their own entities and properties that you place on the P&ID to define values for properties of the components and groups to which they apply. drawing. drawing file File in which you place items. also called a design file. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 419 . E easting Term used in plane surveying that describes an east. drawing view Specific.Glossary directional Referring to items that depend on their orientations to directional flow for correct placement in a drawing. drag To use the software functionality that attaches the pointer to an item so you can see the item move in dynamics. or positive. Each drawing has a unique drawing number within the unit to which the drawing belongs. dithering Technique for achieving greater color resolution at the expense of spatial resolution. edge-edge model Model that represents connectivity entire by edges. P&ID Graphics file that contains data about one unit.

equipment group A single-name equipment body and any items within or attached to the body. such as a tray or nozzle. the software automatically creates a group relationship between the equipment and the component. 420 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . As you place equipment components. field Interface component of a dialog box that displays information to you or allows you to type data to record. exclusive database relationship Relationship that exists between any given instrument and the loop to which it belongs . F fences Temporary method of locating and grouping items that you need to change.Glossary endpoint Data point that defines the end of a linear element. file Collection of logical records stored as a unit. equipment components Items associated with pieces of equipment. Examples of events are creation. event A status milestone that tracks the history of an item. name change. and assignment to unit. such as nozzles and trays. As a group. the components move along with the equipment. the name should relate to the contents of the file. file specification Path name that instructs the software for the location of a file. enumerated list See select list. file name Name that a user defines for an interactively created file.that is. an instrument can belong only to one loop at a time. For easier identification. exit elevation Lowest downstream elevation point on the internal diameter of a pipe.

including the filename. flow rate Quantity of fluid that flows per unit of time. For SmartPlant P&ID. group Set of components with physical boundaries and a single name . from the start of the piped system. or company standard . ISO. flow time Required time for the flow. Icons that show the perpendicular or parallel relationships with other items in the drawing as you point over items in the drawing. 2.Glossary filter Function that creates a subset of items. See also relative path name.industry standard such as ANSI.that is. geometric industry standard A select-list property that identifies the source of the data . grid Network of uniformly spaced horizontal and perpendicular lines that help to identify either 2-D or 3-D relationships. full path name Name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 421 . G gap Condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the P&ID but not physically in the plant. to reach a downstream point. Icons attached to the pointer that provide feedback as you draw. glyphs identify the relationships that you are creating. This subset meets criteria that property values define. glyphs 1.from which the software deduces the specific geometry of a commodity item. fixed point A control point that usually is a locally known monument with known coordinates. font Complete set and style of the characters and symbols of a typeface used for displaying text that you place in a drawing file. or DIN. a group number.

Glossary H handles Graphical indications that appear when you perform a valid change to an item. and labels. refers to the relationships among groups. these components are not represented graphically. horizontal Parallel to. height property Distance between the base offset and the top of the item. implied piping component Piping components that the software creates in the alphanumeric database. for grouping files or commands. or dependents. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. horizontal angle Angle measured in the horizontal plane. I icon A pictorial representation or image. hierarchical An ordered relationship from greatest to least. Horizontal angles are the basic measurements needed to determine bearings and azimuths. components. hierarchy A classified structure with superiors. This property provides a method to represent a 3-D model when working in a 2-D drawing. 422 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . a symbol that graphically identifies a command or task. in the plane of. or roots. horizontal scale A scaling factor that exaggerates the horizontal scale as you draw graphics. or operating in a plane parallel to the horizon or to a base line. horizontal distance Distance between two points computed using only the northing and easting coordinates of the points. and subordinates. header First items of information in a file that precede any actual data.

such as flow or temperature. Inline instruments include instrument valves. In SmartPlant P&ID. a view in which the horizontal lines of an item are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. inline instruments Components that you can insert into a piping segment. and other instrument components. Instruments can be devices such as final control elements. inline Term used to refer to those piping or instrument components that you can insert in a piping segment. you can create instrument loops containing any combination of inline and offline instruments. computing devices. isometric Relating to or concerning a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. such as butterfly valves and temperature regulator valves.Glossary import Process that transports or transfers data from one environment to another. integer A whole number with no fractional part. interference checking Process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between items in a drawing. instrument loops A group of one or more instruments or control functions arranged so that signals can pass from one function to the next for the purpose of measuring and controlling a process variable. instruments Devices that directly or indirectly measure or control a variable in a plant process. such as orifice plates and flow controllers. instance A single allocation of an item class. import script File that the software uses to import or transfer data. Two types of instruments exist: inline instruments and offline instruments. input The data submitted to a computer for processing. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 423 . or electrical switches.

keypoint Point on an item. label. Each label is an entity with properties and provides the primary means of defining property values in the P&ID task. connect to the item. K key Property or column in a table that is the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. a single member in the P&ID. line style Collection of formats or properties that you name and store as a group to apply as a style of a line. and properties.that is. L label A graphic representation that reflects the status or condition of an associated item. to which you can snap in the drawing . components. such as equipment. layer A logical grouping of items on a drawing sheet. including vertices. item type Distinct objects that users can manipulate in SmartPlant P&ID. A line route contains line runs. and components that all share the same attribution. and safety classes. gaps.Glossary item Unit of storage within a larger unit. You can have several layers in a drawing sheet. 424 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . events. however. line route Collection of ordered line runs. line string A series of connected line segments. a line route does not contain any branches. such as a file in a catalog. J justification Point of orientation for text placement. PDS 2D Intelligent graphics and text that identify a group or component. gaps.

Point to the manipulation handle on upper corner of an item to display the mirror handle. a line. The term has a dual meaning: network can refer to the devices that connect the system. model A representation of graphics or a schema. mirror To create the reverse image of a display set through a plane or around a defined axis. collection of all items and their relationships to create a coherent description of a process plant. macro A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. or network can refer to the connected system. and so forth. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are VBA. makeup air Air brought into a space from the outside to replace exhausted air. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 425 . M MTO Material take-off. also called a Bill of Materials. the software performs the actions or runs the commands. Visual C++ Delphi. mirror handle Reflects an image about the horizontal and vertical axes. linear Having a single dimension. northing Term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. Visual Basic. Nominal Piping Diameter (NPD) The approximate diameter of a pipe.Glossary line width Thickness of a displayed item. nozzle A special equipment item that contains the connection point to piping. When you run the macro. N network Interconnection of host computers and workstations that allows them to share data and control.

Examples are equal to and greater than. 426 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the point where the x-. and z-axes intersect. offline instruments Components that you do not insert into a piping segment. For example. Typically. such as digital control stations (DCS) or computers. orientation by user A type of orientation in which you define the orientation of an item when you place it. You can change the default orientation at placement time. level gauges. Offline instruments include temperature regulators. orientation fixed A type of orientation in which the software places items in the same orientation in which you created them. orientation Position of items in the design plane relative to the origin. See also orientation by system and orientation by user. and orientation fixed. Oracle A relational database management system. orientation by user. y-. if you placed the item in a vertical line. See also orientation by system and orientation fixed. See also orientation by user. orientation by system A type of orientation in which the software places items in the same orientation that you created them. if you place the items in free space or in a horizontal line. and system functions.Glossary O occurrence A row within a relational database table. operator The part of the Structured Query Language (SQL) syntax that defines relationships between data. The default orientation of this item is identical to items that the software orients. regardless of the method or location that you used for placement. You cannot change the orientation at placement time. the software automatically rotates the item 90 degrees counterclockwise from the orientation in which you created it. offline Term that refers to those instrument components that are not inserted in a pipe run. origin In coordinate geometry. See also orientation by system. these components are the instruments that monitor and control inline instruments.

and instrumentation. peak flow Maximum flow rate of water through a specific size pipe. The P&ID includes three primary groups of items: equipment. the collection of pipe runs from all drawings in a project whose project-defined line property values are identical. branch points and gap components. The drawing relates critical processrelated information. It does not branch or contain spaces between components. such as process conditions for temperatures and pressures. pipe run A line run that has piping properties. Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) Primary drawing for maintaining a plant. and identifies physical components in the plant. A pipe run segment may have identical properties as a pipe run from which it branches but is not considered part of the pipe run. Also. parametric item Item that contains geometry constrained together using relationships. path name Sequence of directories leading to a file. a contiguous set of pipe run segments separated only by inline components. with driving dimensions that are defined as adjustable parameters.Glossary orthogonal view A view that is a projection of the drawing onto a plane along lines that are orthogonal to the plane. P PFD Process Flow Diagram. P&ID See Piping and Instrumentation Diagram. piping. a drawing that serves as a start for a P&ID. A pipe run has a beginning and an end. See also absolute path name and relative path name. parameter A property with a value that determines the characteristics or behavior of an item. The P&ID is the basis for both the construction of the physical plant and further specification of instrumentation components. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 427 . pipeline Set of connected piping segments and their associated piping items. Also.

pointer On-screen tool that allows you to indicate an item or area. A network terminates at a nozzle. piping components are connected with multiple line segments.for example. a 150-pound carbon steel specification. One company can have several plants located at different geographical locations. piping segment A line string with two or more vertices that defines the centerline geometry of the pipe run and contains the non-graphic data associated with the pipe run. a pipe cap. or one-point piping component . Specifically. reducers. strainers. primitive commands The most basic graphic command such as placing a line or placing a circle.for example. and safety components. PFD Process Flow Diagram.Glossary piping components Graphic elements that represent processes or functions within a particular piping segment. 428 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .typically. In drawings. plant A group of facilities and equipment that performs one or more material processing functions within a given geographical area. a representation of the piping that transfers process fluid. process line Ordered collection of connectors and inline components with an equal set of core properties . primitive items An item. flanges. items with the same line number. Piping components include valves. that you place by a primitive command. position angle Defines the angle between the horizontal axis. piping network Series of connected pipe runs and inline components. Piping Materials Class (PMC) Classification of components by service or specification . and the rotate handle. utility connector. as drawn through the anchor point. a drawing that serves as a start for a P&ID. off-page connector. such as a line or circle.

commodity libraries. Properties stored with the valve symbol are displayed in the Properties window when the valve symbol is selected. and width. probably in separate geographical locations and having limited communication among them. R RAD 2D Draft Platform 2D graphic platform developed from the product core functionality of SmartSketch. 2. or material. reference data A collection of information containing facts relative to industry design codes.Glossary process point A tool that defines the operating conditions at a particular place during a process. report formats. Other properties stored with the valve symbol can include the manufacturer. For example. Examples include defining temperature. A directory file created in an application environment that contains design files and subprojects. a graphic representation attached to a drawing view. property A unique characteristic of an object. relationship A condition that exists between items. job specifications. the properties of a valve symbol can include display properties such as color. label descriptions. Several projects can be under design at one time. reference file A drawing file attached to another drawing file for reviewing reference. item. and flow rate. project 1. lines extending from the boundaries of an item and between which dimensioning data for the area marked by the projection lines is placed. cost. or document. symbol. A project is not necessarily specific to an application. and other information of a similar theme. Term used for convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. The properties of an item can include display properties and properties stored with the item. line style. This connection indicates that some form of communication of behavior or state occurs. graphics symbology. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 429 . the project may contain design files from multiple applications. projection lines Witness lines. You can establish relationships as you place new items or between items already on the drawing sheet. density. catalog data of vendors.

rotation angle Defines the angle of change between the old and new positions of a rotated element. An item is required if the Tag Required Flag property is set to True for the item in the Properties window of Catalog Manager. rubberbanding Animation dynamic that allows you to specify the position of a data point while the item changes as you move the pointer. it appears in the stockpile for later placement. See also absolute path name and path name. relative path name Sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. rule Standard mechanism for creating relationships. revision cloud A set or arcs used to enclose changes that have occurred since the last revision. but much more difficult to predict. rotate handle Turns a selected item around its anchor point. orientation by system or orientation by user. You can select a user-level or a project-level template to create a new report template. A rule defines a valid context for two items to communicate their behavior or state. Relative placement mode is more flexible then absolute. report template An online outline for a new report that you need to define. one collection of column values for a table. Point to the manipulation handle on either side of an item to display the rotate handle. whether they are defined in the P&ID reference data as orientation fixed. and to the orientation of any graphic item to which they are attached at placement time. 430 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . If you delete a required item from a drawing. revision triangle A numbered triangle placed in the P&ID to indicate the drawing revision when the change occurred.Glossary relative mode A placement mode in which symbols respond to their orientation definition at creation time. required item Item that the plant model needs. row A unit of related information in a table.

All network operations between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. schema Description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. An ordered collection of connectors. See also pipe run. 3. nozzles. branches. Specifically. modifying only the dimensions but not the ratio among the pieces. Scale Handle Changes the size of a selected drawing item. and piping. off-pace and utility connectors. and by the terminal ends of piping lines. schematic file Schematic drawing or diagram of a particular item in the plant. 2. Intelligent line strings that connect offline instruments. signal run A line run with signal properties. and inline components with an equal set of core properties: typically. inline instruments. server In network operations. Segments terminate by property break labels. a representation of the wiring used for transferring electrical or software signals. A collection of signal runs from all drawings in a project whose project-defined line property values are identical. search criteria Set of values used to scan a database or object library. signal lines 1. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 431 . the node that maintains common data or performs a common task that clients need.Glossary S scale To enlarge or reduce the size of a defined item. items that share the same line number. segment Contiguous piping and piping components between two points in the network at which properties change value. select set A group of more than one drawing item. Point to the manipulation handle on any corner of the item to display the scale handle.

step angle Specifies the increment of rotation for a selected item. Usually. Standard Query Language (SQL) Language developed by IBM for creating. A value of 0 degrees allows free rotation. surface of revolution Surface formed by the revolution of a curve about an axis in its plane. symbol name Descriptive phrase that names a symbol that resides in a folder. See also neutral file. symbology provides graphical clarity to a drawing by differentiating among various items by their appearance. When you apply a style to a selected item. style 1. The style types include: fill.Glossary slider Interface component of a dialog box that displays values along a range. For example. modifying. symbology 1. dimension. the software applies all the formats or properties in the style to the element. including color. graphic Permanent association of items that you can store and place as a group but cannot manipulate as individual items. 2. the font used in a text box. In Options Manager. and querying relational databases. 432 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . specific energy Depth of flow plus velocity head. line. stockpile View of the data model. and text. A collection of formats or properties that you name and store as a group. and so forth. pattern. color and line weight of an element. and style associated with items in a particular filter. displaying items that you have not yet placed in the graphic model. source file Uncompiled version of a parametric definition or other data table. and width. style. The appearance of geometry and annotations on the drawing sheet. symbol. The default Step Angle is 0 degrees. Symbology refers to the color. Display style of an item. 2. text libraries contain source files. relative to the anchor point of the item. line weight.

data dictionaries or other database schemas. tabular data Non-graphic. template A document or file having a preset format. and changes that you request during job posting activities. Same as username. values Data stored in a property. The identifying number of the unit is unique within the project and within the plant. a template serves as an outline or blueprint for you to create a new drawing. time stamping Process that prompts the software to generate a record when you change an property. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 433 . user name Name that provides access to an account on the system. transaction Nongraphic record of any additions. V validation program User program that verifies data integrity in the database. In SmartPlant P&ID. a file used to create roles.Glossary T table Collection of data for quick reference. In SmartPlant Engineering Manager. used as a starting point or blueprint for a particular application so that the format does not have to be recreated each time it is used. U unit Group of parts of the schematic and individual worlds of a plant that together perform a given process function. task Grouping of related design activities. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. use the concept of unit. Most companies. but not all. alphanumeric information. a file used to create a drawing with a set of default parameters. deletions. either you can enter this data or the software determines the value. utility Program that provides a commonly used service.

The visual contents of a window displaying an aspect of the application model. also called Z scale or Z factor. constitute a unit. A coordinate triple (x. generally represented as a line. The format that you type for vertical angles is the occupied point. z) represents a vector. work session All operations performed in the period between opening and closing a database partition of the task. window A control in the software that is the physical outline that contains a view. the foresight point. workflow Method of selecting processes and performing tasks. 434 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . view Defined area of vision on a screen or window. and the measured angle. vertical Located at a right angle to the plane of a supporting surface. vector A quantity that has both magnitude and direction. vertical scale Scaling factor that exaggerates the vertical scale of graphics when you draw. y. work area Individual parts of a single process function that. You can manipulate vectors geometrically. witness lines Dimensioning items that extend from the dimension points to the dimension line. W width Line thickness of a displayed item. vertical angle Angle above or below a horizontal plane through the line of sight. A work session is not limited to worth in the drawing file.Glossary variable Quantity that can assume any one of a set of values. when considered as a whole.

working units can be defined in terms of feet and inches. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 435 . For example.Glossary working units Real-world units that you can group into the design plane.

36 Aspen Zyqad importing. 140 anchor point rotating. 210 placing. 105 accessing Help. 322 approved warnings. 158 Alter Segment routing lines. 125 autofilter Engineering Data Editor. 400 associating plant groups. 189 alter segment. 121. 285 assigning insulation specifications. 94. 323. 113 AutoCAD exporting. 396 toolbars. 313. 208 axes mirror. 171. 175. 329 tasks. 242 backgrounds customizing. 88 attaching commands. 238 annotations labels. 343 shortcut buttons. 381 activating symbol toolbars. 28. 159 altering segment. 126 OLE objects. 261 piping specifications. 76 actuators aligning. 241. 64 options. 395. 179 insulation specifications. 102. 182. 80 stockpile items. 12 recent drawings. 247. 178. 265. 95 items. 211 applying rules. 173 reports.Index Index AABBCC codes assigning. 94. 321. 132. 66. 133. 399. 237 instruments. 297 multi-sided. 61 AutoFilter customizing. 317 area breaks claiming. 319 approving warnings. 242 adding buttons. 277 shortcut buttons. 269 using. 261 item tags. 80 author documents. 122 sizes. 141 placing. 30 embedding. 212 arranging windows. 18 borders displaying. 280 lines. 171. 122 linking. 95 filter tabs. 286 explained. 267. 269 lines. 169. 161 piping specifications. 267. 284. 169. 175 items. 162 alternate symbology. 119 bounding box 436 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 169 access control. 172. 161 menus. 60 autogapping activate. 138. 212 rectangular. 27 affixing labels. 260. 131. 111 Web Client. 172. 287 saving. 96 pipe runs. 67. 60 tabular views. 316. 260. 80 catalog items. 131 filters. 184 aligning labels. 270 automation item tag formats. 262. 280 objects. 329 assemblies creating. 281 Save As. 173 tasks to drawings. 70 commands.

82 finding items. 65. 80. 78 page setups. 69 buttons. 14 Navigation menu. 74. 246 deleting items. 245 symbol properties. 90 process. 258 relationship properties.Index labels. 410 child SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 437 . 166 breaks area. 68. 345. 73 Catalog Manager Cut command. 187. 81. 82 toolbars. 398. 348 select set properties. 156. 281. 368 pipe runs. 80 View menu. 283 items. 72 deleting items. 83. 273 cells graphic. 84. 78 catalog items cloning. 165. 82 views. 48. 79. 90 brief properties pasting. 68. 70. 90 Catalog Explorer add to stockpile. 83 sources. 304 change groups. 94 calendar using. 248 lines. 74 displaying. 212 labels. 77. 88 bulk properties copying. 76 catalog nodes. 73 closing. 157 properties. 412 symbols. 199 linking objects. 75 cloning. 196. 141 placing items. 397. 72 overview. 86. 84. 319. 66 shortcut buttons. 278 mirror items. 254. 83. 197. 80 Catalog Explorer. 69. 78. 83 report templates. 283 catalogs cells and graphics. 76 command buttons. 182. 65. 82 catalog items. 197 removing items. 166 links. 82 custom catalogs. 399 view properties. 114 update symbols. 198 OPCs. 198 Offset Distance property. 256 branching lines. 165. 282 items. 157 linked objects. 276. 67 browsing for catalogs. 199 leader lines. 283 pipe runs. 191 breaking lines. 281. 82 opening. 238. 277 labels. 202 placing labels. 338. 250 inserting objects. 304 changing embedded objects. 36 case data. 282 table properties. 86 case data control. 87. 72. 412 checking paths. 82 File menu. 215. 33 checking inconsistencies. 75 deleting nodes. 89 browsing for catalogs. 78 navigating. 28. 68. 70 list view. 217. 89 buttons adding. 79. 73 cloning items. 84. 162 break labels. 54 tasks. 54. 124 change details. 48. 216. 197 brief properties. 66 displaying buttons. 412 CGM file format. 276 links. 396. 69 bulk properties. 325 unit of measure. 187. 255 selecting. 341. 282 list views. 156. 134 cascading windows. 197 branches connecting. 188.

44. 291. 381 connectors deleting. 156. 300 to do list. 105. 293. 146 tool. 308 Compare and Refresh dialog. 299 clearing selections. 308. 73 closing Catalog Explorer. 135. 406 consulting services. 20 storing. 21 Colors tab Options dialog box. 289. 341 compound filters. 293. 109 to TEF. 292. 250. 303 exclusive. 137 configuration PickQuick tool. 293. 301. 293 items. 68. 289. 305. 9 commodity codes adding. 44. 202 stockpile. 297 invalid claims. 207 opening partner. 295 multiple representations. 42. 17 commands buttons. 43 gaps. 95 comments on documentation. 167 composite formats. 293. 45. 390 validating properties. 297 related items. 407 colors customizing. 188 piping. 299 TEF. 251 labels. 18. 43. 244 rotating using handles. 289. 247 cloning Catalog Explorer. 251 moving. 32. 147. 206 open partner drawing. 305. 148 connected items. 216 stockpile items. 256 connecting items. 297 labels. 300 To Do List. 45. 302. 172 changing. 291. 293 and deleting. 204. 105. 255 lines. 309 versions. 352 continuation 438 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 293. 300. 109 to plant structures. 73 catalog items. 296 lines. 310 comparing. 154 claim modes. 298 and replacing items. 305 drawings. 308. 206 placing. 297 area breaks. 32. 43. 308. 247 pasting. 293. 410 consistency check PDS 2D propagation. 303 access. 315. 313. 406 constraints databases. 310 version. 289. 306 example. 304. 309 options.Index representations. 82 customizing. 292. 253 Cut command. 293 Compare and Refresh column headings. 289. 293. 166 pipe runs. 124 P&IDs. 173 compare. 32. 117 SmartPlant P&ID. 166 to databases. 301. 309 component handles. 246 Paste an Item. 205 consistency checking. 241. 293 status. 293 shared. 149 tools. 409 construction status placed items. 238 components inline. 289. 143 construction status. 238. 316. 293 releasing claims. 19 setting. 280 pasting items. 304. 147 Clipboard copying. 9 contents of reports. 118 code lists. 254. 28 inserting. 293 claiming. 207. 76 drawings. 306 Engineering Data Editor. 297 claim mode. 293.

92. 247 files. 92. 21 buttons. 216 inconsistencies. 90. 395. 357 reports. 91 cutting equipment components. 138 formats. 356. 78. 273 inline component values. 340. 21 instrument loops. 337. 91 colors. 96 Open dialog box. 91. 35. 213 report templates. 246 Data Dictionary Manager customized properties. 46 tasks. 28. 131. 68 compound filters. 253. 102 drawing templates. 93. 350 and claiming. 95 filter tabs. 309 display options. 28 catalog nodes. 245. 77. 93. 284. 322 using the select tool. 354. 82. 331. 352. 254. 401. 189 mirrored items. 389 creating area breaks. 308. 110 placement. 250 OPCs. 72 customer support. 136. 410 correlating items. 131 filters. 175 items. 335. 83. 17 toolbars. 19. 135. 351. 88. 96 P&IDs. 293 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 439 . 340. 56. 114 defaults construction status. 357 report template contents. 95. 105. 356. 91. 360 report items. 389 correlations removing. 273 items. 208 menus. 81. 341 select sets. 50. 321. 71. 217 error conditions. 109 databases constraints. 26. 52. 86. 89 files. 324 database connecting to. 396 toolbars. 137 custom catalogs. 134 decimal places. 89. 331 tabular views. 237 item tags. 341. 206 continuation drawings how to. 93. 119. 102 filter tabs. 164 report contents. 130. 21 compare options. 9 customization Options dialog box. 387. 21. 92. 256 shortcut buttons. 245. 132. 88. 91. 92 custom catalogs. 137. 80 tables. 331. 84 customizing appearance. 13 correcting actions. 354 report templates.Index drawings. 18. 28. 64 toolbars. 240 pipe run values. 212 assemblies. 83. 91 Catalog Explorer. 346. 80. 95 with macros. 352 table layouts. 349. 255. 107. 89 heat tracing. 254 copyrights software. 90 bulk properties. 17 setting. 27. 246. 354. 121. 402 defining brief properties. 17 display properties. 96 deferring tasks. 53 deleting. 129 graphical operations. 286 buttons. 133. 331. 334. 78 menus. 29. 207 copying bulk properties. 174 list views. 14 data files importing. 143 dates defining. 344. 94. 141 opening. 47. 43. 138. 409 restoring. 127. 254 labels. 27. 141 packages. 120. 122 drawings. 59. 30 environments. 353. 102. 175 properties. 72 documents. 338. 21. 91 reports. 409 Properties window. 343.

77 claim status. 207 creating. 30 nulls. 31 Help. 48 tables. 21. 309 in use. 24 windows. 105. 304. 385. 75 catalog nodes. 207. 28. 82 case data. 203 properties. 80. 30 tabular views. 218. 386 dragging items. 131 properties. 180 items. 94. 74 commands. 62 grids. 361 Disable Flip Text labels. 87. 59. 30 brief properties. 367 templates. 207. 246. 250. 22. 23. 76 table views. 251 model orphan items. 162 Digital Print Room driver. 78 diagonal mode. 248 report templates. 34 new views. 110 symbol toolbars. 17 stockpile. 64 filters. 130 displaying about SmartPlant P&ID. 102 history. 303 claims. 30 different symbols. 130 using filters. 17. 26 using zoom. 106.Index assembly items. 57 descriptions adding. 248. 251 inline components. 28. 251 instruments. 246. 214 templates. 112 recent. 314 labels. 111 440 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 351 select sets. 90 buttons. 348 settings. 35 toolbars. 30. 11 print options. 305. 104. 130 overview. 81. 250 shortcut buttons. 42. 198 display filters. 112. 13 inconsistencies. 95 connectors. 122 views. 371 filters. 41. 301. 402. 251 correlations. 32 customizing. 74. 261 deselecting items. 13 as printed. 81 stockpile items. 41 subnodes. 35 new. 121 drawings comparing. 309 continuation. 121. 250. 35 opening. 15 Drawing Manager change drawing name. 90 Catalog Explorer. 259 OPCs. 100 OPCs. 249. 89 reports. 284 catalog items. 389 from model. 89 properties. 84. 403 views. 335 reports toolbar. 308. 110 printing. 254 drawing revision clouds. 14. 29. 99. 69 document properties. 86. 64 distances offset. 85. 190 notes. 115 Engineering Data Editor. 30. 304. 107. 115 documentation comments. 34 Details command. 45. 66 catalog items. 207. 98. 305. 30. 102 Engineering Framework. 263 tabular views. 26 displays customizing. 30 leader lines. 15. 147 Design window. 32. 62. 207. 198 document properties. 9 documents retrieving. 57 tasks. 363. 331. 251 lines. 365 borders. 63 status bar. 197. 382. 108. 102. 367 properties. 302. 251. 119. 245. 65. 86. 333. 350.

97. 375. 51. 134. 398. 398 publishing. 382. 387. 281. 402 deleting tasks. 385 running a task. 38 filters. 378. 43 removing views. 397 opening drawings. 87. 54. 41 table layouts. 276 items. 221 properties. 350. 282 pipe run properties. 379. 101 tasks. 345 select set properties. 181 linked objects. 34. 278 URLs. 102. 57 selecting items. 305 saving. 129 consistency checking. 349. 338. 345. 276. 40. 273. 43 defining. 276. 181. 129 recreating errors. 346. 55. 41 editing. 43. 282 hyperlinks. 273 images. 331 importing. 398 creating tasks. 317. 316 conditions. 60 caption. 404 retrieving documents. 394. 258 properties of pipe runs. 395. 46 table views. 131. 337. 237 insulation specifications. 129 errors checking. 380 refresh. 389 creating properties. 87 equipment components. 353. 397. 34. 399 embedding borders. 46 tasks. 153 erasing items. 188 duplicating items. 386 retrieving files. 399. 392. 58 Engineering Framework accessing Web. 111 exiting Catalog Explorer. 35 driving labels. 35. 390. 396. 47 pasting. 400. 15 display. 280 objects. 127. 276 links. 83 sources. 40 autofilter. 373. 221 relationship properties. 277. 397. 282 filters. 401. 220. 389 correlations. 129 refreshing. 402 using.Index recreating. 381 adding tasks. 50 table properties. 401 existing drawings. 45. 118. 34. 119. 313 resolving inconsistencies. 381 correlating items. 357 reports. 260. 44 shortcut menu. 152. 354. 394 entering free text. 38 tabular views. 356. 396 deferring tasks. 152 groups. 396. 20. 275. 87. 127. 125 templates. 282 table items. 377. 34 displaying. 403. 319 Excel. 273 editing. 47 views. 403 modifying properties. 43 editing items. 273 Engineering Data Editor. 120 views. 118 exploring SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 441 . 68 P&IDs. 261 items. 371 zooming. 39 stockpiles. 404 refreshing. 329 executing macros. 263 Stockpile. 249 error conditions. 122 drawings. 348. 267. 376. 121. 48 copying. 217 labels. 394 properties. 395 assigning tasks. 124. 396. 216. 127. 408 placing. 220. 117 SmartPlant P&ID. 341. 391. 84. 83 report templates. 254 editing drawing templates. 122 documents. 400 Browser. 405 reporting. 400 To Do List. 214 embedded objects.

378. 375. 130 tab. 376. 378. 386 retrieving files. 378. 341 report templates. 104 publishing to TEF. 258 reports. 60 filters autofilter. 402 deleting tasks. 396. 391. 237 customizing. 64 finding catalog items. 395. 131 Filter tab customize. 47. 381 correlating items. 69. 338. 64. 413 display. 131 displays. 69 exporting drawings. 381 Framework accessing Web. 197 connectors. 371 zooming. 15 definition. 46. 396 deferring tasks. 22 stockpile. 377. 386 Files tab Options dialog box. 379. 133. 390. 394 freezing panes. 234 replacing. 340 flow arrows. 136 properties. 379. 385. 396. 47 Filter Manager Add Filter command. 403 modifying properties. 215 fonts printing. 401. 361 formats fixed. 194. 341 Foundation SmartPlant. 281 stockpile items. 373. 172 relationships. 169 fields reports. 132. 51. 17 report templates. 405 reporting. 346 reports. 283 manipulating. 389 correlations. 354. 137. 398 creating tasks. 91 defining. 237 inconsistencies. 29 filtering. 201 fluids code values. 352 files. 131 tabular views. 340. 356 rules. 357 gapping AutoGap. 230. 139 Properties. 273 opening. 230 new. 387. 191. 231. 21 Filter tab. 126 objects. 225. 70 catalogs. 402 using. 226. 381 adding tasks. 403. 227. 380 refresh. 234. 139. 132 tables. 138. 131. 392. 376. 389 creating properties. 186. 400 To Do List. 397 opening drawings. 373. 69 documents to publish. 399. 29. 135. 269 Gap Now. 131 Design window. 380 drawing items. 343. 130 setting. 226. 226. 373. 329 fabrication categories. 377. 54 tabular views. 267.Index elsewhere. 130 drawings. 340. 137 creating. 136. 335 reports. 64 from and to data reports. 60. 131. 397. 225. 400 Browser. 376. 68. 52. 375. 140 finding items. 228. 138 Paste. 24. 380 retrieving. 398 publishing. 352. 395 assigning tasks. 385 retrieving documents. 375. 394. 235 fitting views. 379. 394 properties. 404 Retrieve command. 138. 382. 25 fixed format. 382. 377 checking paths. 270 lines. 385 running a task. 61 compound. 269 442 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 136. 234. 173 fabrication categories assigning. 229. 377. 229. 404 refreshing. 110. 228.

28 commands. 278 icons customizing. 317 inline components and validation. 316 errors. 78 displaying small. 273 inserting. 242 parametric. 304. 94. 20. 175 offline instruments. 275. 241.Index manually. 156 headers defining for reports. 31 tabs. 323. 324 drawings. 321. 268 pumps. 305 hyperlinks adding. 319. 164. 67. 78 display. 163 tools. 31 placing. 33 snapping. 341 graphics cells. 31 styles. 313 histories. 270 General tab. 313 overview. 360 heat tracing. 323 pipe runs. 12 World Wide Web. 240. 161 objects. 259 defining. 270 using. 175. 31. 276 instruments into loops. 324 overview. 18 component. 239 selecting items. 88 handles colors. 315 resolving. 325. 151 spacing. 358. 408 groups equipment. 273 hyperlinks. 267. 150 properties. 335. 325 files. 359. 13 hiding toolbars. 13 support. 334. 238. 17. 78 large. 331. 351. 329 log. 30. 238. 30 indices. 234 inconsistency indicators. 273 from reports. 141 properties. 31 displaying. 273. 370 Help accessing. 247. 280 lines. 31 views. 275. 244 mirror. 178. 17 generating item tags. 412 grids densities. 26 highlights colors. 95 documents. 410 display. 340 reports. 12 programming. 261 heat tracing inline instrument. 276 importing data. 324. 238. 325 stream data. 338. 179 items. 333. 248 vertex. 216 displaying. 265. 112 General tab Options dialog box. 276 inserting. 238 rotate. 208 reports. 244 scale. 265. 12 user's guides. 277. 328 items. 276. 268 inconsistencies checking. 32. 177 height printing. 152 plants. 268 SmartSketch files. 324 from SmartSketch. 278 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 443 . 273 images. 314 finding. 329 using reports. 30. 238. 18 hints consistency check. 322 inconsistency indicators. 150 grouping equipment. 262. 226. 157. 316 correcting. 77 images embedding. 175 inserting buttons. 144 using.

161 viewing items. 198 offset source. 293. 190. 199 aligning. 195. 182. 179. 11 integration Aspen Zyqad. 156. 174. 191. 166 labels. 197 components. 198 title blocks. 412 driving. 53. 199 property breaks. 44 joining lines. 126 layouts default. 201. 186. 44. 302. 22 tables. 182 placement. 197 copying. 200 text display. 300. 186. 201 descriptions. 254. 338. 300. 194. 125 PDS 2D. 156. 161 shortcut buttons. 265 offline. 188. 200 updating. 198 one-point placements. 45. 175. 198. 197 types of terminators. 387. 256 correlating. 262 insulation heat tracing. 261 specifications. 260 Insulation Manager overview. 184. 182. 413 libraries 444 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 197 Catalog Manager. 182. 178. 273 vertices. 188. 67 URLs. 197 leader lines. 198 flow arrows. 48 Page Setup. 293 removing correlations. 189 displaying. 329 Internet viewing drawings. 208 validation. 188. 210 breaks. 202 piping. 32. 194. 126 MicroStation. 199 mirrorable. 341 reports. 191. 369 report templates. 54 leader lines connectors. 161. 186 OPCs. 302. 198 modifying. 141 invalid claims. 292. 233 selecting. 174 loop. 191. 124 intranet bypassing. 197 terminator types. 182. 157. 186 legal notices. 186. 329 with Aspen Zyqad. 32. 178. 50 options. 289. 182. 301.Index pipe runs. 30 Installation Guide overview. 45. 190 landscape printing. 42 implied. 211 properties. 80 stockpile items. 340. 47. 190 placing. 182. 259. 389 replacing. 30 driven. 161. 187 placements. 181. 190 labels. 302 generating. 177 properties. 175. 301. 406 using filters. 262 revisions. 370 layers AutoCAD. 182. 44. 255. 186. 412 fitting text. 188. 188 types. 197 item types. 292. 11 instruments inline. 323 importing. 329 using Aspen Zyqad. 196 moving. 165. 191. 258 offset distance. 199 flipped text. 184. 166 pipe runs. 199 displaying. 196 rotatable. 188 placing. 189 annotations. 46 setting. 13 levels exporting. 182. 291. 267. 191. 197 two-point placements. 338 saving. 303 item tags. 179. 197. 125 exporting. 208 items claiming. 389 deleting. 199 targeting. 164. 291. 51. 232. 180 loops. 175. 303 connected. 196.

96 default. 44. 284 borders. 101 making buttons. 166 objects. 132 items. 83 sources. 158. 125 migration rules. 248. 287 equipment. 282 filters. 281 Save As. 202 pipe runs. 255. 219. 126 OLE objects. 97. 226 loops instrument. 278. 273 lines. 15 MicroStation exporting. 216. 220 selecting. 207. 265 stockpile. 281. 162 breaking. 221 OPCs. 300. 166 properties. 165 deleting. 251 gapping. 242 handles. 282 list views. 121. 169 menus creating. 221 views. 351. 68 inconsistencies. 78 locating catalog items. 166 routing. 160. 96 shortcuts. 241 modeler displaying windows. 360 Match all defining filters. 242 items. 281 pipe runs. 178. 161. 240. 174. 282 properties. 45. 180 macros adding. 238. 25 windows. 146. 156. 256 starting. 357. 302. 240. 292. 303 embedded objects. 98. 281 links breaking. 325 migrator importing. 13 line routing ribbon. 175. 145. 92. 238 leader lines. 96 restoring. 95. 84. 272 linking assemblies. 28 filter tabs. 271 lines branching. 135 maximum units. 338. 412 licenses notices. 65. 131 shortcut buttons. 166 updating. 265 relationship properties. 407 views. 122 changing. 54 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 445 . 179. 258. 217. 241 items. 52 Match Any filters. 25 mapping attributes. 52 Match All filters. 241. 301. 80 manipulating assemblies. 198. 77 tags. 272 line settings updating. 162 routing ribbon. 93. 325 SmartSketch. 159 update settings. 83 report templates. 153 items. 157. 242 mirroring axes. 218. 159. 119. 91 executing. 271. 100 modifying claimed items. 328 mirror axes. 341. 156 weight and color. 160. 15 models orphan items. 102. 265 links. 281 files.Index cells. 91. 254. 54. 135 Match any defining filters. 283 changing. 190 lines. 282 table properties. 165. 163 joining. 92 customizing. 281 editing. 238. 345 select set properties. 276. 78 lists select. 145. 87. 99.

107. 65 navigating. 110. 97. 126 filters. 198 source. 219. 51 templates. 397. 202 off-page connectors. 42. 186 how to. 206 placing. 206. 184 labels. 184. 154 naming catalog nodes. 204 properties. 35. 205. 198. 105. 255 creating. 30 properties. 265 to another drawing. 201 OLE files. 186. 222 moving partners. 182 one-point placement. 396. 189. 206. 381 options codes.Index tabular views. 186 labels. 138 report items. 14 rename. 27 views. 188. 102. 182 moving. 197. 101 new drawings. 343 tables. 184. 186 properties. 186. 399 title blocks. 216. 222. 268 moving. 253 labels. 353 report templates. 251 matching OPC label. 169 defining. 35. 394 files. 221 piping components. 223. 120 toolbars. 220. 86 offline instruments placing. 408 items. 27 Navigation Catalog Explorer. 35 drawings. 194 using reports. 222. 137 drawings. 238. 104. 223 multiple drawings printing. 367 multiple representations child and parent. 205 open partner drawing. 206. 202. 398. 206 opening Catalog Explorer. 254 selecting. 109 recent drawings. 261 nozzles placing internally. 204. 204 storing partner. 256 new compound filters. 190 leader lines. 46 user's guides. 344 toolbars. 203 storing. 190 lines. 265. 195 OPCs deleting. 343. 111. 207 opening partner OPC. 218. 20. 12 macros. 273 insert an object. 220. 12 Web Client. 207. 217. 201. 75 nominal diameters assigning. 156. 121 plant structures. 204. 216 window. 167 select sets. 277 one-point placement. 109 drawing views. 111 symbol set. 106. 136 report items. 108. 105. 72 continuation drawings. 20. 105. 215. 264. 205. 72 renaming. 184. 173 defning. 69 tables. 223 stockpile items. 222. 156. 34 nodes Catalog Explorer. 46 tasks. 201 offset distance. 12 filters. 177 off-page connectors. 216. 89 setting to display. 204 equipment. 136. 187. 121 features. 222 pipe runs. 221 OPCs. 104 Help. 172 notes displaying. 173 446 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 132. 79 networks connecting. 263. 35 drawings. 75 compound filters. 207 databases. 137 drawing views. 331 report templates. 108. 153 null property value.

256 specifications. 413 PickQuick configuration tool. 271 organizing tasks. 165. 10 overviews creating a drawing. 238 parametrics resizing. 159. 256 selecting runs. 406 construction status. 166 selecting. 333 symbology. 175 item tag. 268 joining. 11 removing items. 255 PipeSpec assigning. 181 reports. 287 catalog items. 173 selecting. 409 equipment groups. 283 linking files. 159. 369 printing. 160 runs. 408 errors. 245 report templates. 202 Cut command. 272 update symbology. 370 orphan items deleting. 17 Options dialog box. 166 routing. 66 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 447 . 167 inserting vertices. 102 filters. 141 database. 246 default units. 165 components. 162. 42. 370 templates. 43 special. 278. 409 labels. 215. 412 comparing to SmartPlant. 369 printing. 272 overview. 166 properties. 182. 211 area breaks. 175 placing items. 154 pasting bulk properties. 410 using filters. 365. 331 P2C2 Web forum. 273 items. 213 stockpile. 363. 172. 182. 146 placement. 188 placing annotations. 280 paths checking. 141 design window. 254. 173 Placement tab Options dialog box. 246. 158. 250 line settings. 17 placements construction status. 280 properties. 239 parent representations. 391 orientations drawings. 171 using. 253. 25 parametric handles. 161 joining. 122 panes freezing. 156. 121 Page Setup. 280 objects. 18 construction status. 162 breaking runs. 172. 271 symbology changes. 313 solving inconsistencies. 169 piping branches. 169. 181 one-point. 62 panning views. 277. 247. 284. 171. 265 page setups changing. 212 assemblies. 148 pipe runs inline components and validation. 149 selecting items. 17 Options Manager connectors. 409 setting. 184. 130 labels. 368 layouts. 89 files. 88. 167.Index colors. 77. 13 packages creating. 15 drawings. 186 tolerances. 147. 114 deleting items. 273 PDS 2D cells. 19 two-point. 369 Page Setup. 98 overview SmartPlant P&ID.

86. 265 plant structures opening. 150 labels. 66. 90 displaying. 141 Page Setup. 86 documents. 302. 213 pipe runs. 202. 48. 259 and claiming. 30. 194 heat tracing. 33. 321. 365. 264 items on a grid. 144 end. 195 OPCs. 131. 221 piping components. 12 printing copies. 87. 215. 406 PDS 2D. 144. 85. 88. 288 statuses. 89 copying. 112. 175 internal nozzles. 115. 87 448 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 175 in stockpile. 370 files. 88 PMC assigning. 167 revision clouds. 86 displaying categorially. 361. 289. 363. 211 lines. 288 overview. 294. 87 displaying alphabetically. 296. 367 origin. 196 brief. 370 settings. 291. 201 postponing tasks. 113. 169 programming customization. 90 display. 221 multiple representations. 114 pressure maximum. 369 page setups. 182. 114 filters. 173 property. 300 prompts status bar. 186. 364. 43. 114.Index component labels. 363. 169 printable user's guides. 89. 264 title blocks. 402 precision units. 162. 368 fonts. 116 drawings. 361. 410 properties. 300 enabling. 329 macros. 44. 303 claiming items. 361 multiple drawings. 66. 175. 101 projects. 370 positioning assemblies. 177 instruments with heat tracing. 401. 367 drawings. 158. 32. 232. 361. 77 inline instruments. 295. 91 importing. 84. 184. 188. 367. 284 catalog items. 363 overview. 84. 363 scale. 201. 368. 158. 146. 258 explained. 28. 141. 149. 248 labels. 299 break labels. 204 equipment. 90 bulk. 172. 233. 84. 195 connectors. 45. 363. 367 setting options. 263. 299. 171 using. 288 to do list. 363 selected areas. 322 customizing. 300. 366. 153 items. 292. 105. 66 equipment. 337 portrait printing. 109 plants groups. 367 process case data assigning. 112 editing. 361 to a file. 293. 152. 301. 182. 84. 84 adding descriptions. 361. 42. 153 items. 162. 141 files. 144 portable reports. 333 plant item groups examples. 187. 97. 297. 112. 363. 367 time. 237 formatted. 154 offline instruments. 153 flow arrows. 169 points center. 367 documents. 88. 88. 48. 368 range. 17 propagation comparing. 175 instruments. 194 plant reports. 298. 214 stockpile items. 177 OPCs. 84. 204 packages.

89 OPCs. 198. 57 renaming catalog items. 166. 315. 81 stockpile items. 74. 29. 344. 380 files. 44. 376. 229. 268 lengths. 180 items. 341 deleting templates. 405 versions. 166. 58 To Do List. 35. 331 editing. 377. 371 with SmartPlant Foundation. 175. 380 queries Engineering Data Editor. 358 spacings. 356 defining contents. 333 importing items. 404 version. 228. 373. 248. 377. 380 to TEF. 350. 251 instruments. 89 proxy server. 240 refresh Compare and Refresh dialog. 58 refreshing. 159. 141 publishing documents. 371 relationships using. 45. 74 commands. 232 replacing and claiming. 398. 321 recreating drawings. 234. 75 drawings. 379. 151 Properties window. 354 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 449 . 376. 345 composite. 334. 305 drawings. 303 removing assembly items. 43 pipe runs. 350 shortcut buttons. 335. 28. 403 views. 343. 379. 40 quitting Catalog Explorer. 305 tabular views. 397. 293 items. 90 tasks. 215. 376. 99. 354 deleting. 335. 75 catalog nodes. 368 relationship. 341 creating templates. 358 including select lists. 203 pasting. 83 releasing claims. 165. 378. 302. 358 reporting contents. 354. 292. 14. 299 views. 201. 100. 346. 375. 305 registering projects. 46. 403. 399 validating. 75. 378. 245. 43 releasing claims. 167 printers. 102 Replace Mode catalog items. 95 correlations. 68. 165. 68. 310 To Do List. 373. 235. 31 inconsistencies. 127. 259. 331. 377. 246. 350 editing. 221 notes. 88. 94. 233. 404 reports changing templates. 51. 310 views. 248 report templates. 237 mode. 251 OPCs. 378. 345 editing items. 379. 232. 221 piping components. 350 table. 301. 396. 375. 354 options. 357 defining layouts. 199 lines. 262 labels. 159. 373. 333 creating. 233 report templates contents. 284 buttons. 230. 249.Index grids. 300. 129 reflecting items. 333 to do list. 375. 319 instruments. 220. 98. 306 example. 352 creating. 68. 346 formats. 28. 250. 354. 225. 337 defining items. 261 nulls. 83 report templates. 338. 231. 42 tasks. 76 SmartPlant P&ID. 118 reapplying rules. 351 displaying. 340. 340 headers. 341 contents. 402. 76 catalog nodes. 389 inline components. 341 defining template layouts. 80 catalog items. 337.

156. 238 rotating handles. 56 templates. 340. 239 searching for drawing items. 251 resetting toolbars. 37. 161 rotation. 32 migration.Index editing templates. 220. 341 template formats. 226. 344 spacings. 337. 216. 254. 382. 21 fixed formats. 160. 217. 248 connected items. 351. 349. 351. 386 from TEF. 341. 265 items. 125. 400 saving assemblies. 220. 118 settings. 255. 359 tabular. 159. 102. 382. 130. 124. 343 options. 352. 157. 356 layouts. 239 parametrics. 28 views. 359 overview. 410 restoring menus. 359 importing items. 313 filters. 144 selecting all. 162. 157 insert. 22. 284. 338. 218 piping. 256 450 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 160. 340 template items. 385. 357. 341 formats. 243. 101 tasks. 146 rotate handles. 358 template properties. 148. 244 routing lines. 340. 199. 221 Rule Manager consistency checking. 346. 42. 352 filters. 158. 340. 385. 96 toolbars. 125 views. 369. 282 report templates. 154 parent. 154 required items. 240. 11 rules inconsistencies. 117. 346. 286 drawings. 282 revision clouds. 227. 386 reviewing properties. 124. 42. 352 find directory. 359. 382. 243 select tool. 345 sources. 160. 262 ribbons line routing. 239 embedded objects. 348. 370 parametrics. 285. 162. 358 fields. 338. 118. 360 toolbars. 321. 157 select sets. 344. 322. 354. 44. 22 retrieving documents. 228 segment alter. 156. 345. 87 revising drawings. 352. 350 templates. 341. 335 modifying. 338 lengths. 352. 37 tabular views. 42. 145. 159. 241 move. 225. 322 running macros. 354. 239 resolving inconsistencies. 214 links. 221 mirror. 147. 242. 55 scale handles. 237 for items. 214 revisions text. 319. 386 files. 220. 343. 217. 360 types. 157. 385. 238 scaling drawing items. 244 items. 343 representations child. 28 resizing drawings. 337 sort orders. 161. 353 template options. 321. 156. 325 reapplying. 352 source templates. 141 portable. 157. 126 P&IDs. 154 multiple. 315. 343 new. 221 pipe runs. 343 headers. 317. 20 handles. 356. 130 overview. 350. 348. 345 naming templates.

263. 79. 11 Insulation Manager. 256 tool. 369. 248 deleting items. 63 shortcuts buttons. 144. 255. 198. 91 Catalog Explorer. 43. 254. 255. 65. 121. 80. 67 Aspen Zyqad. 272 printing. 81. 44 runs. 43. 254 selection criteria. 254. 223. 255. 146. 218. 158. 287 SP_ID. 261 splitting drawings. 148. 116 status construction. 237 inline components. 344 symbol file. 130 importing. 267. 328 snapping grids. 317. 264 removing items. 159 P&IDs. 179. 215. 246 deleted items. 278. 256 sets. 409 status bar prompts. 264. 81 case data. 114 for a drawing. 101 networks. 256 inserted items. 77 connectors. 190 lines. 112 setting options. 44. 381 using. 190 sites open server. 223 spreadsheets adding items. 254. 141 pipe runs. 202 overview. 86. 30 items. 293. 10 Rule Manager. 407 filters. 356 tables. 77 Engineering Data Editor. 256 lists. 367 saving. 105 settings labels. 131. 20 stockpiles adding items. 255. 15. 159 statistics current document. 11 SmartSketch migration. 158. 90 buttons. 22 tabular views. 109 Open Site Server. 109 Open Site Server. 271. 66. 41 filters. 42. 11 Options Manager. 255. 141 packages. 283. 151 solving inconsistencies. 299 setting partner locations. 329 starting lines. 335 selections colors. 145. 65 menus. 90 inconsistencies. 86. 370 SmartPlant Engineering Manager using. 105 sizing drawings. 46 drawings. 319. 146.Index entries. 265. 18 servers open site server. 254. 248. 248. 222. 325. 410 sorting report items. 302 specifications insulation. 254. 333. 147. 329 importing. 62. 281. 371 SmartPlant Foundation interfacing with. 282 symbols. 277. 17 stockpile claiming items. 245 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 451 . 407 macros. 265 placing items. 122. 260. 67 adding to. 82. 178. 201 Cut items. 248. 145. 255. 265 OPCs. 256 properties. 84. 314 leader lines. 112 properties. 250 displayed items. 222. 17 showing brief properties. 254. 86. 83. 329 moving items. 97. 325 SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. 53 sources offset. 32. 371 SmartPlant Migrator importing. 11 overview. 256 lines. 201 report templates.

46. 378 refresh. 381 correlating items. 47. 400 Browser. 293. 396 assigning to drawings. 400 creating. 204. 396 deferring tasks. 116 support Help. 301. 45 modifying. 375. 391. 394 properties. 399. 272 symbols displaying. 111 windows.Index reporting. 391. 50. 53. 111 views. 403 reporting. 36 symbol sources. 262. 12 World Wide Web. 38 layouts. 402 executing. 395 assigning tasks. 399 refreshing. 208 XML. 58 view displays. 400. 399 opening drawings. 402 ing items. 38 editing items. 398 publishing. 47 table views. 401 modifying. 303 updating. 403. 281 toolbars. 333 saving. 52. 377. 46. 398 creating tasks. 398. 112 setting options. 71. 387 modifying properties. 63 view filters. 14 viewing. 399. 405 removing. 265 tasks adding. 385 running a task. 57 displaying views. 43. 287 toolbars. 58. 338 freezing panes. 333 view. 63 views. 390. 405 reporting. 394 properties. 376. 47 tabular views editing. 38 editing properties. 404. 394. 48. 54. 278. 390. 371 zooming. 60. 392. 62 updating views. 46. 258 filters. 45 tags required. 381 adding tasks. 76 symbology alternate. 69. 401 To Do List. 395. 63 Tabular Editor filters. 397. 397 opening drawings. 140 claims. 39. 59. 34. 246. 41. 329 summaries current document. 398. 47. 44. 404 refreshing. 38 items. 15. 57. 397. 403. 46. 69 sources. 40. 41 storing partner OPCs. 32. 396. 401. 400 To Do List. 394 452 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 396. 90 tabs customizing. 389 correlations. 38. 395 technical support. 12 switching drawings. 400. 54 new. 301 accessing Web. 62 filters. 277. 404 retrieving documents. 76 tables bold items. 55. 248 validation. 404 running. 402 using. 56 stockpiles. 20. 394 types. 396. 62. 395. 401. 205 stream data importing. 396. 396 deferring. 395. 292. 271. 46 view layouts. 245. 61 format reports. 46 reporting. 54 italic items. 292. 35. 405 zooming. 382. 35. 138 tabular customizing views. 64 deleting. 373. 390 updating. 389 creating properties. 402. 35. 397. 51 properties. 392. 9 TEF. 289. 387. 46 view settings. 386 retrieving files. 263 tools. 113 for a drawing. 60. 404.

21 Select Tool. 191 title blocks labels. 76 To Do List. 71 Properties window. 71 tools Customize. 281 properties. 119 reports. 254 tree views. 348. 204 validation item tags. 396 deferring items. 119. 359. 271. 272 tabular views. 28 creating. 114 To Do List. 202. 390 updating drawings. 188. 28. 398. 400 creating properties. 329 symbol toolbars. 404 running a task. 105 user's guides printable. 398 creating tasks. 390 To Do List adding tasks. 20. 402 removing tasks. 19 pointer. 395 tolerances placement. 12 utility connectors. 130. 360 symbol. 58 to do list. 195 undoing actions. 354. 391. 404 remove a task. 346. 92. 369. 102 drawings. 28 displaying. 121. 200 testing databases. 391 opening drawings. 340. 345. 402 reporting. 329 label settings. 272 links. 217 units for a drawing. 370 terminators types of. 120 creating for drawing. 214 items. 84 reports. 392 how to. 92 customizing. 399 refresh. 21 gapping. 271. 338. 396. 26. 267. 395 assign drawing. 17 PickQuick. 404. 169 templates creating. 400 updating. 394 properties. 197 placing. 397. 122 included sizes. 94. 19 toolbars adding buttons. 27. 121. 182 two-point placement labels.Index temperature maximum. 349. 96 customizing. 394. 216 assemblies. 125 sizes. 394 modifying properties. 403 dialog box. 95 default. 65 two-point placement. 405 zooming. 146 reports. 285 changes. 352. 36 title blocks. 208 piperun and inline components. 71. 270 General tab. 397 opening. 93. 13 versions compare. 175 values dates. 134 short. 27. 187. 17. 122. 143 tiling windows. 405 user access. 310 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 453 . 194 to and from data reports. 341. 344. 169 version numbers. 112 precision. 403. 402 deleted tasks. 353. 83. 399 assigning tasks. 76 symbology. 184. 401 deferring tasks. 350 saving. 392 user specific. 26 project specific. 343. 91. 351. 357 to do list tasks. 190 line settings.

66 catalog items. 34 displaying. 84. 305. 237 properties of documents. 13 Catalog Explorer. 15 drawing views. 102 list. 115 report templates. 33 claims. 83 switching. 77 defining filters. 36 overview. 115 drawing.Index comparing. 319 watermarks Page Setup. 36 wizards migration. 57 Design. 35 tabular. 333. 36 views arranging. 13 Web Client accessing. 88. 111 tabular. 14. 305 vertices. 367 properties. 350 reports. 12 width printing. 258 warnings approve. 308. 25 previous. 335 settings. 314 leader lines. 28. 259 support. 370 Web forum. 310 refreshing. 23 out. 78 manipulating. 381 What's New for this release. 34 fitting. 22. 47. 35 using zoom. 85. 32 lists. 23. 54. 89. 46. 370 windows arranging. 22. 36 displaying. 309 refresh. 55 settings. 35 General tab. 35. 13 links to. 39. 24 tasks. 32 consistency checking. 151 restoring. 23 in. 53 tables. 131. 367. 14. 39 switching. 141 panning. 304. 329 454 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 26. 29. 17. 52 Design view. 22 Engineering Data Editor. 41. 24 using zooming. 51. 34 drawings. 394. 369 printing. 15 drawing. 22 table layouts. 78 changing properties. 25 grids. 36 cascading. 36 Catalog Explorer. 265 zooming areas. 35 drawings. 37 stockpile. 313 resolving inconsistencies. 12 viewing drawings. 25 properties. 22. 22 printing. 48. 317. 395 Zyqad importing. 23 windows. 15. 303 deleting. 77. 124 XML tags. 31 inconsistencies. 34. 190 properties. 161 inserting. 325 World Wide Web forum. 36 panning. 35 document properties. 150 inconsistencies. 258 Engineering Data Editor. 22 saving. 15. 161 viewing about SmartPlant P&ID. 30 grids. 90. 24.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful